HyperMesh 11.0 Core Tutorials

HyperWorks 11.
0
HyperMesh Core Tutorials
Altair Engineering Contact Information
Web site www.altair.com
FTP site Address: ftp.altair.com or ftp2.altair.com or http://ftp.altair.com/ftp

Login: ftp
Password: <your e-mail address>
Location Telephone e-mail

North America 248.614.2425 hwsupport@altair.com
China 86.400.619.6186. support@altair.com.cn
France 33.1.4133.0992 francesupport@altair.com
Germany 49.7031.6208.22 hwsupport@altair.de
India 91.80.6629.4500 support@india.altair.com
1800.425.0234 (toll
free)
Italy 39.800.905.595 support@altairengineering.it
Japan 81.3.5396.2881 support@altairjp.co.jp
Korea 82.70.4050.9200 help@altair.co.kr
Scandinavia 46.46.286.2052 support@altair.se
United Kingdom 01926 .468.600 support@uk.altair.com
Brazil 55.11.3384.0414 br_support@altair.com.br
Australia 61.3.9016.9042 anzsupport@altair.com
New Zealand 64.9.413.7981 anzsupport@altair.com
The following countries have distributors for Altair Engineering:

Asia Pacific: Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, Taiwan, Thailand
Europe: Czech Republic, Hungary, Poland, Romania, Spain, Turkey.
© 2011 Altair Engineering, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated to another language without the written permission of Altair
Engineering, Inc. To obtain this permission, write to the attention Altair Engineering legal department at: 1820 E. Big
Beaver, Troy, Michigan, USA, or call +1-248-614-2400.
®
HyperWorks 11.0 Release Notes
Trademark and Registered Trademark Acknowledgments
Listed below are Altair® HyperWorks® applications. Copyright© Altair Engineering Inc., All Rights Reserved for:
HyperMesh® 1990-2011; HyperCrash™ 2001-2011; OptiStruct® 1996-2011; RADIOSS® 1986-2011; HyperView®
® ® ® ®
1999-2011; HyperView Player 2001-2011; HyperStudy 1999-2011; HyperGraph 1995-2011; MotionView 1993-
® ® ®
2011; MotionSolve 2002-2011; HyperForm 1998-2011; HyperXtrude 1999-2011; Process Manager™ 2003-2011;
Templex™ 1990-2011; Data Manager™ 2005-2011; MediaView™ 1999-2011; BatchMesher™ 2003-2011;
TextView™ 1996-2011; HyperMath™ 2007-2011; ScriptView™ 2007-2011; Manufacturing Solutions™ 2005-2011;
HyperWeld™ 2009-2011; HyperMold™ 2009-2011; solidThinking™ 1993-2011; solidThinking Inspired™ 2009-2011;
Durability Director™ 2009-2011; Suspension Director™ 2009-2011; AcuSolve™ 1997-2011; and AcuConsole™
2006-2011.
In addition to HyperWorks® trademarks noted above, GridWorks™, PBS™ Gridworks®, PBS™ Professional®,
PBS™ and Portable Batch System® are trademarks of ALTAIR ENGINEERING INC., as is patent # 6,859,792. All
are protected under U.S. and international laws and treaties. All other marks are the property of their respective
owners.
HyperMesh Core Tutorials
HyperMesh
Basics...........................................................................................................................................5
HM-1000: Getting Started with HyperMesh
...........................................................................................................................................6
HM-1010: Opening and Saving Files
...........................................................................................................................................10
HM-1020: Working with Panels
...........................................................................................................................................15
HM-1030:Organizing a Model
...........................................................................................................................................22
HM-1040: Controlling the Display
...........................................................................................................................................32
Geometry
...........................................................................................................................................41
HM-2000: Importing and Repairing CAD
...........................................................................................................................................42
HM-2010: Generating a Midsurface
...........................................................................................................................................51
HM-2020: Simplifying Geometry
...........................................................................................................................................54
HM-2030: Refining Topology to Achieve a Quality Mesh
...........................................................................................................................................61
HM-2040: Creating and Editing Line Data
...........................................................................................................................................72
HM-2060: Creating and Editing Solid Geometry
...........................................................................................................................................87
HM-2070: Geometry and Mesh Editing Using the Quick Edit Panel
...........................................................................................................................................102
HM-2080: Modifying Models using solidThinking
...........................................................................................................................................109
HM-2090: Dimensioning
...........................................................................................................................................111
Meshing
...........................................................................................................................................125
1-D Elements
...........................................................................................................................................126
HM-3000: Creating 1-D Elements
..............................................................................................................................127
2-D Elements
...........................................................................................................................................131
HM-3100: AutoMeshing
..............................................................................................................................132
HM-3110: Meshing without Surfaces
..............................................................................................................................142
HM-3120: 2-D Mesh in Curved Surfaces
..............................................................................................................................150
HM-3130: QI Mesh Creation
..............................................................................................................................155
HM-3140: Batch Meshing
..............................................................................................................................159
HM-3150: Meshing a Model Using Shrink Wrap
..............................................................................................................................167
3-D Elements
...........................................................................................................................................178
HM-3200: Tetrameshing
..............................................................................................................................179
HM-3210: Creating a Hex-Penta Mesh using Surfaces
..............................................................................................................................188
HM-3220: Creating a Hexahedral Mesh using the Solid Map Function
..............................................................................................................................203
HM-3270: Using the TetraMesh Process Manager
..............................................................................................................................211
Quality
...........................................................................................................................................222
HM-3300: Checking and Editing Mesh
...........................................................................................................................................223
HM-3320: Penetration
...........................................................................................................................................236
Assembly
...........................................................................................................................................250
HM-3400: Creating Connectors
...........................................................................................................................................251
Altair Engineering HyperMesh Core Tutorials i
Proprietary Inform ation of Altair Engineering

HM-3410: Creating Area Connectors
...........................................................................................................................................271
HM-3420: Creating Bolt Connectors
...........................................................................................................................................277
HM-3430: Part Replacement Through Connectors
...........................................................................................................................................281
Morphing
...........................................................................................................................................285
HM-3510: Freehand Morphing
...........................................................................................................................................286
HM-3520: Sculpting
...........................................................................................................................................288
HM-3530: Changing a Curvature Using Map to Geometry
...........................................................................................................................................291
HM-3540: Changing a Profile Using Map to Sections
...........................................................................................................................................293
HM-3550: Morph Volume
...........................................................................................................................................295
HM-3560: Basics of Domains and Handles
...........................................................................................................................................298
HM-3570: Altering Cross-Sections Using Domains
...........................................................................................................................................304
HM-3580: Morphing About an Axis Using Domains
...........................................................................................................................................306
HM-3590: Morph Adhesive Layers
...........................................................................................................................................308
HM-3600: Morph Tube to Different Configurations
...........................................................................................................................................313
HM-3610: Shaping a Dome Using Cyclic Symmetry
...........................................................................................................................................318
HM-3620: Shaping a Bead Using Cyclic Symmetry
...........................................................................................................................................324
HM-3625: Morph a Symmetric Part onto a New Geometry
...........................................................................................................................................331
HM-3630: Morphing with Shapes
...........................................................................................................................................336
HM-3640: Interpolating Loads Using Shapes
...........................................................................................................................................342
HM-3650: Creating Shapes Using Record
...........................................................................................................................................346
HM-3660: Maintaining Area Using Constraints
...........................................................................................................................................350
HM-3670: Positioning a Dummy Using Limiting Constraints
...........................................................................................................................................354
HM-3680: Preserving a Shape Using Cluster Constraints
...........................................................................................................................................356
HM-3690: Remeshing Domains After Morphing
...........................................................................................................................................361
Analysis Setup
...........................................................................................................................................365
HM-4000: Setting up Loading Conditions
...........................................................................................................................................366
HM-4010: Formatting Model for Analysis
...........................................................................................................................................372
HM-4020: Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties using HyperBeam
...........................................................................................................................................380
HM-4030: Defining Composites
...........................................................................................................................................390
HM-4040: Working with Loads on Geometry
...........................................................................................................................................395
HM-4060: Working with Include Files
...........................................................................................................................................406
HM-4070: OptiView
...........................................................................................................................................414
Customization
...........................................................................................................................................417
Scripts
...........................................................................................................................................418
HM-8010: Add a Button to the User Page on the Utility Menu
..............................................................................................................................419
HM-8020: Create a Utility Menu Macro From a Command File
..............................................................................................................................422
HM-8030: Create a Utility Menu Macro to Create Constraints on a Plane
..............................................................................................................................426
HM-8040: Create a Utility Menu Macro from a Tcl Script
..............................................................................................................................431
HM-8050: Create Forces on Nodes and Add a Button on the User Page
..............................................................................................................................435
HM-8060: Calculate the Resultant Sum of Forces
..............................................................................................................................440
HM-8070: Create Spline Surfaces on Tria Elements
..............................................................................................................................445
ii HyperMesh Core Tutorials Altair Engineering

HM-8080: Calculate the Radius of an Arc
..............................................................................................................................451
HM-8090: Create an OptiStruct PSHELL property
..............................................................................................................................456
Post-Processing
...........................................................................................................................................461
HM-9000: Exporting Data for Fatigue Analysis
...........................................................................................................................................462
HM-9010: Free Body Diagram
...........................................................................................................................................465
Altair Engineering HyperMesh Core Tutorials iii

HyperMesh
Basics
Geometry

Meshing
1-D Elements
2-D Elements
Altair Engineering HyperMesh Core Tutorials 1

3-D Elements
Quality
Assembly
Morphing
HM-3520: Sculpting
2 HyperMesh Core Tutorials Altair Engineering

Analysis Setup
HM-4070: OptiView
Customization
Scripts

Post-Processing

Basics


In this tutorial, you will explore the basic concepts of the user interface of HyperMesh.
Overview
It is highly recommended before you begin the exercise, you review the general overview for this tutorial.
Tools
The HyperMesh interface contains several areas. Each is described below.
Title bar The bar across the top of the interface is the title bar. It contains the version
of HyperMesh that you are running and the name of the file you are working
on.
Menu Bar Located just under the title bar. Like the pull-down menus in many graphical
user interface applications, these menus "drop down" a list of options when
clicked. Use these options to access different areas of HyperMesh
functionality.
Toolbars Located around the graphics area, these buttons provide quick access to

commonly-used functions, such as changing display options. They can now
be dragged and placed at top or side of the graphics area.
Tab Area The Tab Area is so named because various specialized tools display on tabs
in this area of the interface. Two such examples are the Model Browser
and the Utility Menu.
The Model tab contains the Model Browser. This tool displays the
contents of a model in a hierarchical tree format. It can be used to
create and edit many types of entities, and also to organize them
and control their display status.
The Utility Menu contains four pages of tools that perform various
functions, accessed via buttons at the bottom of the menu. By
default, the Disp page is active; the Disp page tools control how a
model is displayed in the graphics area. The other pages available
are QA/Model (element checking tools), Geom/Mesh (tools for
working with a model’s geometry as well as for creating and editing
meshes), and User (custom tools you create). The content of the
Utility tab changes based upon the selected user profile.
Graphics area The graphics area under the title bar is the display area for your model. You
can interact with the model in three-dimensional space in real time. In
addition to viewing the model, entities can be selected interactively from the
graphics area.
Main menu The main menu displays for each page the functions available on that page.
You access those functions by clicking on the button corresponding to the
function you wish to use.
Main menu pages The main menu pages menu divides the main menu into groups of related
functions. Only one page of the main menu is displayed at a time.
The Geom page contains functions for creating and editing geometry.
The 1D, 2D, and 3D pages contain element creation and editing tools
grouped according to element type.
The Analysis page contains functions to set up the analysis problem and
define the boundary conditions.
The Tool page contains miscellaneous tools and model checking functions.
The Post page contains post-processing functions.
Command window You can type HyperMesh commands directly into this text box and execute
them instead of using the HyperMesh graphical user interface. This window
is not displayed by default, but can be opened via the View menu.
Status bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the screen. The left end of the
status bar displays your current location in the main menu. By default,
Geometry is displayed. The three fields on the right side of the status bar

display the current Include file, current component collector, and current load
collector. All three fields are blank by default.
As you work in HyperMesh, any warning or error messages also display in

the status bar. Warning messages appear in green and error messages
appear in red.
Hint: You can hold the left mouse button down on top of a panel to see a
description for it in the status bar.
Starting HyperMesh
To start HyperMesh on a PC, go to Start > Programs > Altair HyperWorks > Altair HyperMesh.
To start HyperMesh on UNIX, perform the following steps:
1. Go to your operating system prompt.
2. Enter the full path of the HyperMesh script (e.g., <altair_home>\altair\scripts\hm) and press
the ENTER key.
Or
3. Type in a pre-defined alias that you or a systems administrator has created in the user .alias or .
cshrc file in the user home directory.
Start Directory
By default, HyperMesh uses a "start directory" for files. HyperMesh reads and writes a number of files from
the start directory:
At start up, HyperMesh reads configuration files (hm.mac, hmmenu.set, etc.).
Upon closing, HyperMesh writes out a command history file (command.cmf) and a menu settings
file (hmmenu.set).
By default, HyperMesh will read from/write to this directory for any open, save, save as, import, or
export funcionality.
Image files (.jpg) created using the F6 key are saved to the start directory.
To determine the start directory on Windows, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click the HyperMesh icon.
2. Go to Properties.
3. On the Shortcut tab, view the path in the Start In field.

On UNIX, the start directory is determined by the following:
Location in which you typed the command to run HyperMesh
Your "home" directory if configuration files are not found in the start directory
HyperMesh Help
To obtain help for a particular feature, go to the Help menu and select HyperMesh and Batch Mesher. The
help is organized by product and contains the following types of information:
How to use individual functions
Notes on interfacing HyperMesh with external data types
Tutorials
Programming guides
Model Files
All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the

<install_directory>\tutorials\hm\ directory unless otherwise noted.

In this tutorial, you will learn how to:
Open a HyperMesh file
Import a file into a current HyperMesh session
Save the HyperMesh session as a HyperMesh model file
Export all the geometry to an IGES file
Export all the mesh data to an OptiStruct input file
Delete all data from the current HyperMesh session
Import an IGES file
Import an OptiStruct file to the current HyperMesh session
Exercise 1: Opening and Saving Files
This exercise uses the following model files: bumper_cen_mid1.hm, bumper_mid.hm, bumper_end.
igs, and bumper_end_rgd.fem. Each model file contains various sections, but the whole bumper model
is shown, following.
Step 1: Open the HyperMesh model file, bumper_cen_mid1.hm.

1. Access the Open File… dialog in one of the following ways:
From the menu bar, choose File > Open > Model.
From the standard toolbar, click Open Model ( )
2. Open the model file, bumper_cen_mid1.hm.
The model file, bumper_cen_mid1.hm, is now loaded. This file contains mesh and geometry data.

HyperMesh model file, bumper_cen_mid1.hm, opened in HyperMesh
Step 2: Import the HyperMesh model file, bumper_mid.hm, into the current
HyperMesh session.
1. Access the Import tab in one of the following ways:
From the menu bar, choose File > Import > Model.
From the standard toolbar, click Import ( ).
2. From the Import tab in the tab area, click the Import HM model icon , if not already active.
3. Under File selection, click the file icon ( ) and browse to select the file, bumper_mid.hm.
4. Click Import.
The file, bumper_mid.hm, is now imported into the session.
HyperMesh model file, bumper_mid.hm, imported on top of existing data in the HyperMesh session
Step 3: Import the IGES geometry file, bumper_end.iges, into the current
HyperMesh session.
1. From the Import tab in the tab area, click the Geometry icon .
2. In the File type: field, select IGES from the pull-down menu.

3. Click the file icon ( ) and browse to select the file, bumper_end.iges.
4. Click Import.
Geometry data is added to the model.
IGES geometry file, bumper_end.igs, imported into the session
Step 4: Import the OptiStruct input file, bumper_end_rgd.fem, into the current
HyperMesh session.
1. From the Import tab in the tab area, click the Import Solver Deck icon .
2. In the File type: field, select OptiStruct from the pull-down menu.
3. In the File field, click the folder icon and browse to bumper_end_rgd.fem.
4. Click Import.
This OptiStruct input file contains mesh for the bumper’s end portion. The mesh is added to the existing
data in the current HyperMesh session and will be located in the same area as the geometry
representing the bumper’s end.

OptiStruct input file, bumper_end_rgd.fem, imported on top of data in the current HyperMesh session
Step 5: Save the HyperMesh session as a HyperMesh model file called practice.
hm.
1. From the menu bar, click File >Save As > Model.
2. Enter the name, practice.hm.
3. Click Save.
The data currently loaded in HyperMesh is now saved in a HyperMesh binary data file of the name you
entered.
Step 6: Export the model’s geometry data to an IGES file called practice.iges.
1. Access the Export tab in one of the following ways:
From the menu bar, choose File > Export > Model.
From the standard toolbar, click Export Geometry
2. In the Export tab, click the Export Geometry icon if not already selected.
3. Set the File type: field to IGES.
4. Click the folder icon in the File field, browse to the desired destination folder, and enter practice.igs.
5. Click Export.

All of the geometry loaded in HyperMesh (points, lines, surfaces) is now saved in an .iges file with the
name you entered.
Step 7: Export the model’s mesh data to an OptiStruct input file called practice.
fem.
1. In the Export tab, click the Export FE model icon .
2. Under File selection, choose File type: OptiStruct from the pull-down menu.
3. Under File selection, click the folder icon in the File field, browse to the desired destination folder, and
enter practice.fem.
4. Click Export.
All of the finite element data loaded in HyperMesh (nodes, elements, loads, etc.) is now saved as an .
fem file with the name you entered.
Step 8 (Optional): Delete all data from the current HyperMesh session by starting a
new session.
1. Access the New HyperMesh Model function in one of the following ways:
From the menu bar, click File > New > Model.
From the standard toolbar, click New Model ( )
2. Answer Yes to the pop-up question "Do you wish to delete the current model? (y/n)".
Step 9 (Optional): Import the IGES geometry file you created, practice.igs.
Refer to Step 3 for detailed instructions.
Step 10 (Optional): Import the Optistruct input file you created, practice.fem,
into the current HyperMesh session.
Import practice.fem into the current session. The data in the file will be added to the existing data in the
current HyperMesh session. Refer to Step 4 for detailed instructions.
With the completion of Steps 8, 9, and 10, your current HyperMesh session should contain all of the
geometry and mesh data that existed in the HyperMesh session that was saved to a HyperMesh file in Step
5.
Step 11 (Optional): Save your work.

A large portion of HyperMesh functionality is organized into panels. Many panels have common attributes
and controls, so once you become familiar with the features of one panel, it is much easier to understand
other panels.
Use the entity selector and the extended entity selection menu to select and unselect nodes and
elements from the graphics area.
Use the direction selector to define vectors along which to translate nodes and elements.
Switch between different entities to select and methods to define vectors.
Toggle between two options.
Enter, copy and paste, and calculate numbers.
Use the rapid menu functionality to execute commands with the mouse buttons rather than clicking
buttons.
Interrupt, but not exit, a panel to go to another panel using the keyboard function keys.
Exercise
Step 1: Open and view the model file, bumper.hm.
Step 2: In the translate panel, select nodes from the graphics area.
1. Open the Translate panel by clicking Mesh > Translate > Nodes.
2. Select a few nodes from the graphics area by left-clicking the corners of the elements.
Node selector
The cyan border around the node selector indicates that it is active; HyperMesh is expecting nodes to be
selected as the next action.
A node is positioned at each element corner. A selected node is highlighted with a small, white circle.

Node Handles
3. Reset the selection of nodes by clicking the reset icon, .
Step 3: Select and unselect elements from the graphics area.
1. Click the entity selector switch ( ) and select elems. (Switch the entity selector to elems.)
Entity selector w ith its sw itch
The menu that pops-up contains a list of entities that can be translated.
2. With the elems selector active, select several elements from the graphics area.
To select an element, click its element handle (the dot at the element’s center).
The elements are highlighted in white when they are selected.

Element Handles
3. Unselect an element using the right mouse button.
Step 4: Select and unselect elements using the quick window selection method.
1. Verify that the elems selector is active.
2. Move the mouse handle into the graphics area.
3. Press and hold the SHIFT key + left mouse button and move the mouse to draw a rectangular window
around a few elements, and then release the SHIFT key and left mouse button.
All the element handles inside the rectangular window are selected.
4. Unselect elements by pressing and holding the SHIFT key + right mouse button and moving the mouse
to create a window around the selected elements.
5. Press the SHIFT key and quick-click the left mouse button.
A pop-up window appears, which contains six icons as shown in the following image.
Quick w indow pop-up menu
6. Select the inside polygon shape .

7. Press and hold the SHIFT key + left mouse button and move the mouse around a few unselected
elements, and then release the SHIFT key and mouse button.
This draws a polygon window rather than a rectangular window. All element handles inside this window
are selected.
Step 5: Select and unselect elements by using the extended entity selection menu.
1. Click the elems selector and select reverse. (Select elems >> reverse.)
The selection of elements is reversed; the elements that were selected are now unselected and the
elements that were not selected are now selected.
The menu that appears contains a list of functions for selecting elements. Once you select a function
from the menu, the menu disappears. If you do not want to select a function, move the mouse handle out
of the menu.
Extended entity selection menu
2. Select elems >> by adjacent.
Elements adjacent to the selected elements are now selected.
Step 6: Shade the elements, reset the selection, and select a few adjacent
elements.
1. On the Visualization toolbar, click Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines, .
The elements are displayed in shaded mode, rather than wireframe mode.
2. In the Translate panel, click the reset icon ( ) to clear the elements selection.
3. With the elems selector active, select a few elements that are adjacent to each other.
Step 7: Specify a direction vector (N1 and N2 only) along which to translate the
selected elements.
1. Click the direction selector switch
Direction selector includes node selectors to define the direction vector
The menu shown in the following image appears. It contains a list of vector and plane options for defining
the direction in which to translate the selected elements.

Direction selector pop-up menu
2. Select N1, N2, N3 from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the N1 to activate the selector.
N1 now has a cyan border indicating it is the active selector.
The selected elements are displayed in gray because the elems entity selector is not active.
4. In the graphics area, select any node for N1.
The selected node is highlighted in green. The active selector advances to N2.
5. Select a node near N1 for N2.
The selected node is highlighted in blue. The active selector advances to N3. Do not select a node for N3
.
Note: Selecting the two nodes, N1 and N2, defines a vector for the direction of translation. This vector
goes from N1 towards N2. Selecting a third node, N3,defines a plane. The direction of
translation is the positive direction of the vector normal to the plane. The positive direction is
determined by the right-hand rule.
Step 8: Specify a distance to translate the selected elements and then translate
them.
1. Click the toggle ( ) to change magnitude = to magnitude = N2-N1.
2. Click translate +.
The selected elements translate in the direction from N1 to N2 by N2-N1 units.
3. Notice the thick, black border around the translate + button. It indicates this is a rapid menu button; you
can click the middle mouse button rather than click translate +.
4. Click the middle mouse button.
The selected elements are translated again by N2-N1 units.
5. Click translate - twice.
The selected elements are translated in the negative N1-N2 vector direction and are now in their original
position.
Step 9: Measure the distance between two nodes.

1. Press the F4 function key to interrupt, but not exit, the Translate panel and go to the Distance panel on
the Geom page.
The element and node you selected in the Translate panel are currently not visible. However, they are
still selected. They will be visible again when you return to the Translate panel.
2. Verify you are in the two nodes subpanel.
Notice N1 is the active selector.
3. Select any node for N1.
The entity selector advances to N2.
4. Select a node near N1 for N2.
Notice the distance = field value reflects the absolute distance between N1 and N2.
5. Click in the distance = field to highlight the value.
6. Press CTRL+C to copy the value.
7. Click return to return to the Translate panel.
8. Notice the elements and nodes you selected in the Translate panel before you went to the Distance
panel are once again visible.
Step 10: Specify a distance to translate the selected elements and then translate
them.
1. Toggle from magnitude = N1-N2 to magnitude =.
2. Click in the magnitude = field to highlight its value.
3. Press CTRL+V to paste the distance = value copied from the Distance panel.
4. Click translate +.
The selected elements translate in the direction from N1 to N2 by the number of units specified for
magnitude =.
5. Click translate – once.
The selected elements are translated in the negative N1-N2 vector direction and are now in their original
position.
Step 11: Calculate 5.5 * 10.5 and specify the resulting value for magnitude =.
1. Right click in the magnitude = field.
2. Click 5 . 5 (in that order) and then click enter.
3. Click 10 . 5 (in that order).
4. Click X.

The calculated value in the calculator window is 57.75.
5. Click exit.
The calculator closes and 57.75 appears in the magnitude = field.
You can type a value in the magnitude = field by clicking in the field once to highlight the current value.
Then type a new value.
Step 12: Specify a new vector and translate the elements again.
1. Click the reset icon ( ) for the direction selector.
2. Notice N1 is the active selector.
3. Select three nodes for N1, N2, N3 to define a plane.
4. Click translate + or press the middle mouse button.
The elements are translated 57.75 units in the positive direction normal to the defined plane.
5. Click return to exit the panel.

With all of the exercise complete, you can save the model if desired.

A large portion of HyperMesh functionality is organized into panels. Many panels have common attributes
and controls, so once you become familiar with the features of one panel, it is much easier to understand
other panels.
Create geometry and organize it into components
Organize elements into the components
Rename components
Identify and delete empty components
Delete all the geometry lines
Reorder the components in a specific order
Renumber all the components, starting with ID 1 and incrementing by 1
Create an assembly
Organize the constraint
Overview
It is recommend to review the general overview before completing this tutorial.
Step 1: Retrieve the model file, bumper.hm.

Step 2: Create a component named geometry to hold the model’s geometry.
1. Access the Component Collector panel in one of the following ways:
From the menu bar, choose Collectors > Create > Components.
Right click in the Model Browser and click Create > Component.
2. Click the Name: field and enter geometry.
3. Click color and choose yellow.
4. Leave the material and property unassigned and click Create to create the component collector,
geometry.
The message: "Component created" appears in the status bar.
Left-click once anywhere in the HyperMesh window (except on a button) to dismiss the message in the
status bar.
The component called geometry is the current component and is bold in the Model Browser.
Step 3: Create two geometry lines and organize them into different components.
1. Access the Lines panel by clicking Geometry > Create > Lines > Standard Nodes.

2. With the node list selector active, select two nodes, opposite and diagonal to each other, on the same
element as indicated in the following image.
3. Click create to create the line.
4. Notice the line is yellow, the same color assigned to the component, geometry. This is because the line
is organized into the current component, geometry.
5. In the Model Browser click the rigid component.
6. Right click and click Make Current in the menu.
The rigid component is now the active component.
7. With the node list selector active, select two nodes, opposite and diagonal to each other on another
element.
Notice the line is the same color assigned to the component, rigid. This is because the line is organized
into the current component, rigid.
Step 4: Move all the model’s geometry surfaces into the component, geometry.
1. Click Geometry > Organize > Surfaces to access the Organize panel.
2. Go to the collectors subpanel if not already there.
3. Switch the entity selector to surfs if not already set.
4. Click surfs >> all.

Displayed surfaces are highlighted in white indicating they are selected. All other surfaces that are not
displayed are still selected because you selected surfs >> all.
5. Click dest component= and select geometry from the list of components in the model.
6. Click move to move the selected surfaces into the geometry component.
Step 5: Move all the model’s shell elements (quads and trias) into the component,
center.
You should still be in the Organize panel.
1. Switch the entity selector to elems.
2. Click elems >> by collector.
A list of the model’s components appears.
3. Select the components, mid1, mid2, and end.
Select a component by left-clicking its name, color, or check box. A component is selected when it has
a check in its check box. To unselect a component, right-click it.
4. Click select to complete the selection of components.
5. Set dest component = to the component, center.
6. Click move to move the elements in the selected components to the component, center.
All of the shell elements should now be a cyan blue, the same color assigned to the component, center.
Step 6: Rename the component, center, to shells.

1. In the Model Browser select the center component.
2. Right click and click Rename in the menu.
3. Type shells for the component name and press Enter.
Step 7: Identify and delete all of the empty components.

1. Press F2 to open the Delete panel.
2. Switch the selector to comps.
3. Click preview empty.
The status bar displays the message: "3 entities are empty."
These are the mid1, mid2, and end components that no longer have elements in them.
4. Click the entity selector, comps, once to see a list of the identified empty components.

A complete list of the model’s components appears. The empty components are indicated with an
activated check box.
5. Click return to return to the Delete panel.
6. Click delete entity.
The status bar displays the message, "Deleted 3 comps."
Step 8: Delete all the geometry lines in the model.

You should still be in the Delete panel.
1. Switch the entity selector to lines.
2. Click lines >> all.
The two lines you created earlier are deleted.
4. Click return to exit the menu.
Step 9: Move the component, geometry, to the front in the components list.
1. From the menu bar click Collectors > Reorder > Components.
2. Click the comps selector to see a list of the model’s components.
3. On the right side of the panel, click the switch and select name(id). (Switch from name to name(id).)
Notice the IDs of the components. The ID for shells is one, the ID for rigid is five, and the ID for
geometry is six.
4. Select the component, geometry.
5. Click select to complete the selection.
6. Activate the option move to: front.
7. Click reorder to apply the reorder function to the component, geometry.
The status bar displays the message, "The selected collectors have been moved."
9. Click the comps selector once to review the reordered list of components.
Notice the component, geometry, is at the top of the list. However, it still has the same ID, six.
Step 10: Renumber the components to be the same as their position in the list.
1. From the menu bar click Collectors > Renumber > Components.
2. Go to the single subpanel.

3. Switch the entity selector to comps if not already set.
4. Click the comps selector to see a list of the model’s components.
5. On the panel’s right side, click comps >> all.
7. Verify start with = is set to 1.
8. Verify increment by = is set to 1.
9. Verify offset = is set to 0.
10. Click renumber to renumber the components.
11. Click the comps selector to review the model’s component list.
Notice the components are numbered according to their position in the list. Set the view to name(id) if
not already done to see the numbers.
Having components with IDs that do not reflect their position in the model’s list of components will not
result in errors. However, having components with IDs that do reflect their position in the model’s list of
components can be helpful for organizational purposes.
Step 11: Create an assembly containing the components, shells and rigid.
1. From the menu bar click Collectors > Create > Assemblies .
2. For Name:, enter elements.
3. Select a Color for the assembly.
4. Click Create to create the assembly.
5. Select the rigid and shells components in the model tree.
6. Drag the components with the left mouse button over the elements assembly until it highlights. The
components are now added to the assembly.
Step 12: Create a load collector named constraints.

1. Access the Load Collector dialog box in one of the following ways:
From the menu bar click Collectors > Create > Load Collectors
Right click in the Model Browser and click Create > Load Collector
2. For Name: enter constraints.
3. Click Color and choose red.
4. Click Create to create the load collector.
The status bar displays the message: "Load collector created."

5. Left-click anywhere in the HyperMesh window (except on a button) to dismiss the message in the status
bar.
The constraints load collector is bold in the Model Browser showing it is the active load collector. Any
loads that are created will be organized into this load collector.
Step 13: Move the model’s one constraint into the load collector, constraints.
The existing load collector, loads, contains several forces and one constraint. The Organize panel is used
to move the one constraint in the load collector, constraints.
1. From the menu bar click Collectors > Organize > Load Collectors.
2. Go to the collectors subpanel.
3. Switch the entity selector to loads.
4. Select loads >> by config.
5. Click config = and select const.
6. In the center of the panel, toggle from displayed to all.
7. Click select entities.
8. Verify that dest = is set to the load collector, constraints.
9. Click move to move the selected (constraints) into the load collector, constraints.
Step 14: Create a component from the Model Browser.

1. Right-click in the white blank area below the list of components, materials, load collectors, and system
collectors in the Model Browser.
2. From the pop-up menu, click Create > Component.

3. Enter the name component1 in the Name: field.
4. Click the Color icon and chose the component’s color as pink.
5. Click Create to create the component.

The component named component1 is appended to the list.
6. In the Model Browser, click the + button beside the Components entity to see that Component1 is
bolded in the list to indicate it is the current component.
Step 15: Review the existing assembly elements from the Model Browser.
1. Left-click the + button next to Assembly Hierarchy then click the + button next to elements to expand
its tree. Notice that it contains two components, rigid and shells.
Note that the Assemblies panel allows you to add components which are in one assembly to another
assembly. The Model Browser does not allow you to do this, but you can create assemblies from it.
Step 16: Add the components, geometry and component1, to the assembly,
assem_mid, using the Model Browser.
1. Left-click the component name, geometry, to select it.
2. Press the CTRL key and left-click the component name, component1.

if you accidentally select the wrong item, hold the CTRL key and left-click it again deselect it.
3. Left-click any one of the selected components and drag the mouse pointer over the assembly,
assem_mid. When assem_mid is highlighted, release the mouse button.
The selected components are added to the assembly, assem_mid.
Use the SHIFT key and left mouse button to select multiple items in the Model Browser list at one
time. Left-click the first item in the list. Then press the SHIFT key and left-click the last item in the list.
Step 17: Rename assem_mid to assem_geom in the Model Browser.

1. Right-click assem_mid and click Rename.
Assem_mid is highlighted and ready for editing.
2. Type assem_geom and press ENTER.
Step 18: Delete component1 from the Model Browser.

1. Right-click component1 and select Delete.
2. Confirm that you wish to delete the component by clicking Yes in the delete confirm dialog.
Component1 is deleted.
Notice that in the list, there is no bolded component name. This indicates there is no current component
specified.
Step 19: Set the current component from the Model Browser.
1. Right-click shells and select Make Current.
The component name is bolded.

When performing finite element modeling and analysis setup, it is important to be able to view the model from
different vantage points and control the visibility of entities. You may need to rotate the model to understand
the shape, zoom in to view details more closely, or hide specific parts of the model so other parts can be
seen. Sometimes a shaded view is best, while other times, a wireframe view allows you work on details
inside the model.
HyperMesh has many functions to help you control the view, visibility, and display of entities.
Control the points of view using the mouse and toolbar.
Control the visibility of entities using the Display panel, Mask panel, and tools on the Utility Menu.
Control how entities look by using the toolbar and the Model Browser.
Rename components.
Identify and delete empty components.
Delete all the geometry lines.
Step 1: Retrieve the HyperMesh model file, bumper.hm.
Step 2: Manipulate the model view using the mouse controls.

The CTRL + mouse keys are used to rotate the model, change the center of rotation, zoom, fit, and pan.
1. Move the mouse pointer into the graphics area.
2. Press the CTRL key + left mouse button and move the mouse around.
The model rotates with the movement of the mouse.
A small white square appears in the middle of the graphics area, indicating the center of the rotation.
Release the left mouse button and press it again to rotate the model in a different direction.
3. Press the CTRL key and quick-click the left mouse button anywhere on the model.
The center of rotation square appears near where you clicked.
HyperMesh searches for one of the following conditions in the listed order and relocates the center of
rotation at or near the first condition identified (if none of the conditions are met, the center of rotation is
relocated to the center of the screen):
A nearby node or surface vertex
A nearby surface edge to project onto
A nearby geometry surface or shaded element
4. Press the CTRL key + left mouse button to rotate the model and view the change in rotation behavior.

5. Press the CTRL key and quick-click the left mouse button anywhere in the graphics area, except for on
the model.
The center of rotation square is relocated to the center of the screen.
6. Press the CTRL key + left mouse button to rotate the model and observe the change in rotation behavior.
7. Press the CTRL key + middle mouse button, move the mouse around, and then release the mouse
button.
A white line is drawn along the path of the mouse movement. When the mouse button is released,
HyperMesh zooms in on the portion of the model where the line was drawn.
You can also simply draw a line to zoom in on a portion of the model.
8. Press the CTRL key + quick-click the middle mouse button.
The model is fitted to the graphics area.
9. Press the CTRL key and spin the mouse wheel.
The model zooms in or out depending on which direction you spin the mouse wheel.
10. Move the mouse pointer to a different location in the graphics area and repeat #9.
Notice the model zooms in or out from where the mouse handle is located.
11. Press the CTRL key + quick-click the middle mouse button to fit the model to the graphics area.
12. Press the CTRL key + right mouse button and move the mouse around.
The model is panned (translated) according to the mouse movement.
Step 3: Manipulate the view of the model using the rotate functions on the toolbar.
1. On the View Controls toolbar, left-click Dynamic Rotate.
The center of rotation square appears.
3. Press and hold the left mouse button, and then move the mouse around.
The model rotates with the movement of the mouse, similar to the way the model rotates when you press
the CTRL key + left mouse button and move the mouse.
4. Click the middle mouse button on the model.
The center of rotation square appears near where you clicked.
5. Move the mouse pointer out of the graphics area or right-click to exit the rotation mode.
6. On the View Controls toolbar, right-click Dynamic Rotate and move the mouse pointer into the
graphics area.
Again, the center of rotation square appears. You can click the middle mouse button on the model to
change the center of rotation.

7. Press the left mouse button near the center of rotation square.
The model rotates continuously in the direction of your mouse pointer, relative to the center of rotation.
8. With the left mouse button still pressed, move the mouse around slowly.
The direction and speed of the rotating model changes. The farther the mouse pointer is from the center
of rotation, the quicker the model rotates.
You can release the left mouse button, and then press it again to rotate the model in a different direction.
9. Middle mouse click anywhere in the graphics area, except on the model.
The center of rotation square is relocated to the screen’s center.
10. Move the mouse pointer out of the graphics area or left-click to exit the rotation mode.
Step 4: Manipulate the view of the model by using the zoom in and out functions
on the toolbar.
1. On the View Controls toolbar, left-click circle / dynamic zoom, .
The status bar displays the message, "Circle the data to be zoomed in on."
3. Press the left mouse button, move the mouse around, and then release the left mouse button.
A white line is drawn along the path of the mouse movement. When the mouse button is released,
HyperMesh zooms in on the portion of the model where the line was drawn.
You can also simply draw a linear line to zoom in on a portion of the model.
This function is similar to pressing the CTRL key + middle mouse button to zoom into a portion of the
model.
4. On the Standard Views toolbar, click fit, .
The model is fitted to the graphics area.
5. On the View Controls toolbar, left-click zoom in / out, .
The model is zoomed in by the factor specified in the options panel.
6. On the View Controls toolbar, right-click zoom in / out, .
The model is zoomed out by the same factor.
7. From the menu bat click Preferences > Meshing Options or Geometry Options.
8. Go to the geometry or mesh subpanel.
9. For zoom factor =, specify 4.

11. On the View Controls toolbar, left-click zoom in / out, .
The model is zoomed in by the larger, specified factor.
12. On the View Controls toolbar, right-click circle / dynamic zoom, .
The status bar displays the message "Drag up/down to zoom in/out."
13. Move the mouse pointer into the graphics area, press the left mouse button, and then move the mouse
pointer up and down.
The model is zoomed in and out according to how far you move the mouse up or down.
14. Move the mouse pointer out of the graphics area or left-click to exit the dynamic zoom mode.
Step 5: Manipulate the model view using the arrows and view panel on the toolbar.
1. On the View Controls toolbar, right-click or left-click any of the rotate icons ( , , ).
The model rotates in the direction of the arrow by the rotation angle specified in the Options panel.
2. On the Standard Views toolbar, click the XY Top Plane View icon ( ).
3. From the main menu click Preferences > Meshing Options or Geometry Options.
4. For rotate angle =, specify a value of 90.
5. Click return to return to the main menu.
6. Click any of the rotate icons ( , , ).
Notice the model rotates by the new specified rotation angle, 90.
7. Change the view of the model to any view.
8. Use CTRL + left mouse button, or the rotate icons on the toolbar to rotate the model.
9. Use CTRL + middle mouse button, or the zoom icons on the toolbar to zoom into or out on the model.
10. Right click in the Model Browser and click Create > View.
11. Open the View folder to see the new view name.
12. Right click on the view and pick Rename.
13. Enter my_view for the new name.
14. Click XY Plane Top View icon ( ) to display a different view of the model.
15. Click my_view in the Model Browser to display the view.
Step 6: Control the display of components using the toolbar.

1. On the Visualization toolbar, click Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines, .
2. Notice the shell elements now have been shaded.
3. Right-click Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines, , and switch to Shaded Elements and Feature
Lines, .
4. Notice now the elements shading does not show any mesh lines. Only feature lines are displayed.
5. Right-click Shaded Elements and Feature Lines, , to access Shaded Elements, .
6. Notice now the feature lines are also removed from the display.
7. Click Wireframe Elements (Skin Only), , to return to the wireframe shading mode.
Step 7: Control the display of components using the Visual Attributes panel.
1. On the Visualization toolbar, click the arrow to open the Mesh Style ( ) icon list.
2. Click Shaded Elements .
All elements now appear shaded with no mesh lines.
3. Right-click in the Model Browser and click Columns > Show FE Style from the context menu.
A new column appears in the Model Browser.
4. Right click the icon next to the mid1 component in the FE Style column and select Wireframe
Elements Skin Only .
The display is changed for just that component.
5. Experiment with the other display modes.
Icon Display Mode
Wireframe Elements – Element edges are displayed with lines.
Wireframe Elements Skin Only – Element edges are displayed with lines for Shell elements
only.
Shaded Elements – The element is displayed as a filled polygon.
Shaded Elements with Mesh Lines – The element is displayed as a filled polygon with the
feature edges drawn in mesh line color.
Hidden Line with Feature Lines – The element as a filled polygon with the feature edges in
mesh line color.
Transparent – The element is displayed as a filled transparent polygon.

Step 8: Control the visibility of various entity categories using the Model Browser.
1. In the tab area, activate the Model tab.
2. Right-click anywhere in the white space of the Model Browser list and pick Expand All from the
context menu.
This will open all of the branches of the Model Browser.
3. At the top of the Model Browser, click Display none, .
The display of all entities in the model is turned off.
4. Click Display all, .
All entities in the model are now displayed.
5. In the browser list, left-click Component (5) to select it.
6. Click Display none, .
The display of component collectors is turned off, but all other entities remain displayed.
Display all, Display none, and Display reverse act globally (on all entities) if nothing in the browser
list is selected. If a folder is selected (highlighted), the action will be performed only on the entities
within that folder. If an individual entity is selected, the action will apply only to that entity.
7. Left-click in the white space of the browser list.
This deselects all entities in the browser list.
8. Click Display reverse, .
The display is reversed. Only the components are now shown instead of everything but components.
9. Click Component view, .
Only the component collectors are shown in the browser list.
10. Click the arrow for the elements and geometry filter to change it from Elements + Geometry, , to
Elements, .
Display all, Display none, and Display reverse will no longer affect the display of geometry in the
components.
11. Click Display none, .
Only geometry is now left in the display.
12. Switch the elements and geometry filter back to Elements + Geometry, .
13. Click Display reverse, .

Only elements are now displayed.
Step 9: Control the visibility of individual components using the Model Browser.
1. Click elements, , next to the mid2, end, and rigid components.
Only the components center and mid1 have their elements displayed now.
2. Press F on the keyboard.
The displayed components are fitted to the graphics area.
3. Click geometry, , next to the components mid2 and end.
4. Fit the displayed components to the graphics area (F).
The geometry in the components, mid2 and end, and the elements in the components, center and
mid1, are displayed.
A component collector has two ‘compartments’: one for elements and the other for geometry. The
display for elements and geometry in a component can be controlled separately.
Step 10: Control the display of entities using the Mask panel.
1. Click Mask to open the Mask panel
2. Go to the mask subpanel if not already there.
3. With the elems selector active, select elems >> by collector.
4. Select the component, mid1.
6. From the graphics area, manually select a few elements in the center (blue) component.
7. Click mask to mask the elements.
The elements in the mid1 component and the elements you selected from the graphics area are no
longer displayed.
8. In the Model Browser, notice that the elements ( ) for the components center and mid1 are still
displayed. Their display icons indicate that they are activated even though some or all of the elements in
these components are masked (hidden).
9. In the Mask panel, click unmask all, or on the Display toolbar click unmask all ( ).
All the elements in the components, center and mid1, are visible again.
Notice the elements in the other components are not displayed. This is because these components are
not active in the Display panel.
10. Click return to exit to the main menu.

Step 11: Control the display of entities using the Find panel.
1. Click find, in the Display toolbar to open the Find panel
2. Go to the find entities subpanel.
3. Select elems >> by collector, and select the component, end, from the components list.
4. Click find to find the elements.
The elements in the component, end, are displayed.
In the Model Browser, notice that the elements for the component, end, are now shown as active ( ).
This is because the collector containing the entities that are to be displayed (found) must be active.
5. Go to the find attached subpanel.
6. For attached to:, select elems >> displayed.
7. Click find to find the elements.
Some of the elements in the components, mid2 and rigid, are now displayed. These elements are
immediately adjacent and connected to the selected elements.
Again, notice that the elements for these components are now shown as active ( ). The components
were made active so that the elements could be displayed.
9. On the display toolbar, click Unmask All ( ).
All of the model’s elements are now displayed. This is because the Find panel finds the entities it is
supposed to find, activates (displays) the corresponding collectors, and masks the other entities in the
collectors it activated. In this case, the last find command displayed on the components, mid2 and rigid
, in the Model Browser.
Step 12: Change the display of entities using the Mask tab.
1. In the Model Browser, click in the white space of the browser list to make sure nothing is selected.
2. Click Display none ( ).
3. Click Display all ( ).
Performing these two steps makes sure that everything is displayed in the model.
4. Click the Mask tab.
5. Click the 1 in the Isolate column for Components.
Only the components in the model (elements, geometry, and connectors) are displayed. Everything else
is now masked.
6. Expand the Components branch to expose connectors, elements, and geometry.

7. Click the – in the Hide column for Elements.
The elements in the model are now masked, leaving only surfaces shown.
8. Expand the LoadCollectors branch to expose loads and equations.
9. Expand the Loads branch to expose constraints, forces, moments, etc.
10. Click the + in the Show column for Constraints.
Constraints are added to the display of the surfaces.
11. Expand the Elements branch to expose 0D/rigids, springs/gaps, 1D, 2D, and 3D.
12. Click the 1 in the Isolate column for 0D/Rigids.
Rigid elements are added to the display, while the surfaces are now masked. The constraints remain
displayed. This is because using isolate below the top level of the list will not mask anything outside of
the top level that entity belongs to. Rigids belong to components at the top level, so no entities in the
other top levels are masked.
13. Click the 1 in the Isolate column for Components.
All of the entities in the components are shown again, while the constraints are masked. This is
because using isolate at the top level of the list (components, groups, loadcollectors, morphing,
multibodies, and systemcollectors) will mask everything outside of the entity type being isolated.
Step 13: Change the color of components using the Model Browser.
1. Click the Model tab to go to the Model Browser.
2. Right-click the color ( ) next to mid1.
3. From the color pop-up, select a different color.
4. Observe the change in color of the elements in mid1.

Geometry


In this tutorial, you will:
Delete untrimmed surfaces
Close missing surfaces
Set the cleanup tolerance
Equivalence free edges
Delete duplicate surfaces
The benefits of importing and repairing CAD are:
Correcting any errors in the geometry from import
Creating the simplified part needed for the analysis
Meshing a part all at once
Ensuring proper connectivity of mesh
Obtaining a desirable mesh pattern and quality
Exercise: Importing and Repairing CAD Geometry Data
This exercise uses the model file, clip_repair.hm.

Step 1: Open and view the model file, clip_repair.hm.
Step 2: View the model in topology display toolbar and shaded mode to evaluate
its integrity.
1. Observe where the model has incorrect connectivity and missing or duplicate surfaces.
2. Click Geometry > Autocleanup to open the Auto Geometry Cleanup panel.
Note that the surface edges are now colored according to their topology status. This occurs because
Geometry Color is set to auto ( ).
3. Click Wireframe Geometry ( ) to display the model in Wire frame mode.
The toolbar contains icons that control the display of the surfaces and surface edges. Surfaces can be
shaded with or without edges or wireframe. Right-click the icons to access the drop-down menu for
additional options. Place your mouse over the cursor to view a description of the button’s functionality.
4. Click Visualization ( ) and navigate to the Topology tab.
Visualization controls the display of the surfaces and surface edges. Surfaces can be shaded or
wireframe. The check boxes within this menu turn the display of the different edge types and fixed points
(surface vertices) on or off.

5. Clear all the check boxes except the Free check box.
Only the free edges should be displayed at this point.
6. Observe the free edges and make note of where they are.
The free (red) edges show where there is incorrect connectivity or gaps.
7. Note the locations where there are closed loops of free edges. These are locations that probably have
missing surfaces.
Free edges indicating surface discontinuities of the clip geometry
8. Select only the Non-manifold check box.
9. Observe the non-manifold edges and make note of where they are.
The non-manifold edges show where there are more than two surfaces sharing an edge, which might
indicate incorrect connectivity. For this part, there are yellow edges completely surrounding two areas.
This indicates that there are probably duplicate surfaces in these locations.
10. Select all the check boxes.
11. Click the Close button to close the Visualization tab.
12. Click return to exit the panel
13. Click Shaded Geometry and Surface Edges ( )

The surfaces should now appear solid rather than having only their edges displayed.
14. Rotate, zoom, and pan to locate any errors in the geometry.
15. Make note of the areas to be worked on:
A surface that overhangs a round corner
A missing surface
Surface overhanging an edge and a missing surface
An edge that has apparently been collapsed

Area of collapsed edge
Step 3: Delete the surface that overhangs the round corner.

1. Enter the Delete panel in one of the following ways:
From the menu bar click Geometry > Delete > Surfaces.
Press F2
2. In the graphics area, select the overhanging surface shown in the previous figure.
3. Click delete entity to delete the selected entities.
Step 4: Create surfaces to fill large gaps in the model.

1. Click Geometry > Create > Surfaces > Spline/Filler to open the panel to create the surface.
2. Clear the Keep tangency check box.
The Keep tangency option examines surfaces attached to the selected edges and tries to create a
surface tangent to them. This helps to form a smooth transition to the surrounding surfaces.
3. Verify the entity type is set to lines.
4. Verify the Auto create (free edges) check box is selected.
The Auto create option simplifies the selection of the lines bounding the missing surface. Once a line is
selected, HyperMesh automatically selects the remaining free edges that form a closed loop, and then
create the filler surface.
5. Zoom into the area indicated in the following image.

Area of missing surfaces
6. Pick one of the red lines bounding one of the gaps (missing surfaces).
HyperMesh automatically creates a filler surface to close the hole.
7. Repeat sub-step 4.7 to create a filler surface in the other gap.
Step 5: Set the global geometry cleanup tolerance to .01.

1. Press O to go to the Options panel.
2. Go to the geometry subpanel.
3. In the cleanup tol = field, type 0.01 to stitch the surfaces with a gap less than 0.01.
Step 6: Combine multiple free edge pairs at one time with the equivalence tool.
1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Edit > Surface Edges > Equivalence.
2. Activate the equiv free edges only check box.
3. Select surfs >> all.
4. Verify that the cleanup tol= is set to 0.01, which is the global cleanup tolerance specified in the

Options panel.
5. Click the green equivalence button to combine any free edge pairs within the specified cleanup
tolerance.
Most of the red free edges are combined into green shared edges. The few remaining are caused by
gaps larger than the cleanup tolerance.
Step 7: Combine free edge pairs, one pair at a time, using the toggle.
1. Go to the toggle subpanel.
2. In the cleanup tol = field, type 0.1.
3. In the graphics area, click one of the free edges shown in the following image.
Rotate and zoom into the area if needed. When the edge is selected, it will change from red to green,
indicating that the free edge pair has been equivalenced.
Area w here free edges need to be toggled
4. Use toggle to equivalence the other edges shown in the image.
Step 8: Combine the remaining free edge pair using replace.

1. Go to the replace subpanel.
2. In the Model Browser, click next to the View2 saved view.
3. With the selector under moved edge: active, click the leftmost free edge in the graphics area.

Verify that the selector under retained edge: is now active.
4. Select the rightmost red edge.
5. In the cleanup tol = field, enter 0.1.
6. Click replace.
Once the line is selected, HyperMesh posts a message similar to:
"Gap = (.200018). Do you still wish to toggle?"
7. Click Yes to close the gap.
Edges to retain and move for replacement
Step 9: Find and delete all duplicate surfaces.

You should still be in the Geom Cleanup panel.
1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Defeature > Duplicates.
2. Click surfaces >> displayed.
3. In the cleanup tol = field, type 0.01.
4. Click find.

The status bar displays the following message, "2 surfaces are duplicated."
5. Click delete to remove any duplicate surfaces.
Step 10: Observe the model again to identify any remaining free edges, or missing
or duplicate surfaces.
1. Use the topology display and shaded modes to perform this task. All of the edges in the model should
be displayed as green shared edges, indicating that we have a completely enclosed thin solid part.

With the cleanup operations completed, save the model.

Create a midsurface
Visualize the midsurface by using shading options and transparency
This exercise uses CAD geometry data for a thin solid clip. Because of the small thickness of the part, it is
assumed that it will be modeled for FEA as shell elements. The elements will be created on the mid-plane of
the part.
Exercise: Generating a Midsurface
The surfaces in the model have no connectivity errors. This could be because the file was imported without
errors or because the errors were corrected using HyperMesh. In this case, errors in the topology were
repaired in the previous exercise (missing surfaces are re-created, duplicate surfaces are deleted, gaps are
closed, etc.). You can use either the file created from the previous exercise, or open the new,
c l i p_mi ds ur f ac e. hm, file. Either way, the geometry is at the point where you can use the Midsurface
panel to generate a midsurface.
Step 1: Retrieve and view the model file.

This exercise uses the model, clip_midsurface.hm.
1. On the Visualization toolbar, change the visualization to Shaded Geometry And Surface Edges (
).
2. On the Visualization toolbar, set the Geometry Color drop-down menu to Mixed ( ).
Notice how the surfaces represent a solid part. These visualization techniques will be necessary for
viewing the newly created midsurface.
Step 2: Generate a midsurface from midsurface panel.

1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Create > Midsurfaces > Auto.
2. Verify that the closed solid option and the yellow surfs selector are active.
3. Select one surface from the graphics area.
4. Click extract to start the midsurface generation.
The midsurface is created, and the surfaces are organized into a new Middle Surface component. Note
that when a midsurface is created, transparency is turned on for all the other components in the model
except the new Middle Surface component. The next step covers how to control surface transparency.
Step 3: Review the part’s midsurface.

1. From the Model Browser, turn off the display of geometry in the component named lvl10 to display only

the Middle Surface component.
The midsurfaces generated for the solid sections of the model using the auto-midsurface subpanel are
shown in the following image.
Midsurface generated from a volume of surfaces
2. Turn the geometry for lvl10 component back on from the Model Browser.
3. On the Visualization toolbar, access the Transparency panel ( ).
4. With the comps selector active, select a line or surface of the lvl10 component in the graphics region.
You may need to zoom in on the model to select a valid entity.

Since the entity selector is set to comps, selecting a line or surface in the component selects the entire
component.
5. In the panel, click the arrow button on the right under transparency several times.
You should see the surfaces in the lvl10 component becoming more and more transparent.
You can also drag the slider back and forth to control the level of transparency.
6. Rotate, zoom, and pan to visualize the midsurface.

Close-up of the midsurface w ith the lvl10 component set to full transparency

Now that the midsurface has been created, it is a good time to save the model.
Summary
You now have surfaces created on the mid-plane of the part. These surfaces can now be meshed or further
modifications can be made to their topology, depending on the requirements of the analysis.

Mesh the clip, review the mesh quality, and determine the features to be simplified
Remove surface fillets
Remove edge fillets
Remove pinholes
This exercise involves changing the shape of a part in order to simplify the geometry. Certain details of the
shape, such as small holes or blends, may simply not be necessary for the analysis being performed. When
these details are removed, the analysis can run more efficiently. Additionally, mesh quality is often improved
as well. Changing the geometry to match the desired shape can also allow a mesh to be created more
quickly.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, clip_defeature.hm. The model file has geometry that has been
midsurfaced. (Surfaces have been created on the mid-plane of the part.) The model will be meshed using an
element size of 2.5. You can assume a simple structural analysis will be run on the part, and thus does not
require much detail. There are unnecessary features in he model that can be removed.

Step 1: Open and view the model file, clip_defeature.hm.
Step 2: To easily work with the midsurface, turn off the display of the lvl10
component.
If the lvl10 component is displayed, it needs to be turned off so that you can easily work on the midsurface
geometry. (It may be on if you use the model you saved during the previous tutorial.)
1. Access the Model Browser.
2. Click for the lvl10 component to turn off the geometry display.
Step 3 (Optional): Mesh the clip to view mesh quality before defeaturing.
1. Click Shaded Geometry and Surface Edges ( ).
2. From the menu bar, click Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh.

3. Set the selector type to surfs.
4. In the element size = field, type 2.5.
5. For mesh type:, select mixed.
6. Switch the meshing mode from interactive to automatic.
7. Verify that the elems to surf comp toggle is set.
8. Click surfs >> displayed to select all displayed surfaces.
9. Click mesh to generate the mesh preview.
Initial mesh on the clip model
Step 4 (Optional): Review the quality of the mesh.

Take a minute to look over the mesh that was created. Note the areas that have irregular, poor quality mesh.
Also, use the Check Elems panel to evaluate the minimum length check of the elements.
Take a minute to rotate, zoom, and pan the model to review the mesh that was created. Note the locations
where the mesh was not created in neat rows and columns of quads.

1. From the menu bar, click Mesh > Check > Elements > Check Elements.
2. Access the 2-d subpanel.
3. In the length < field, type 1.
4. Click length to evaluate the minimum length.
Many of the elements failing the length test are located around the fillets of this model.
Elements failing the length check
Note: You may need to change the geometry display to wireframe for better visualization of element
quality. For this, click Wireframe Geometry ( ).
Step 5: Remove the four small pinholes.

Pinholes are closed free edge loops within a surface. Pinholes do not need to be circular.
1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Defeature > Pinholes to open the Defeature panel.
2. In the diameter < field, type 3.0.

3. Select surfs >> all.
4. Click find to identify the pinholes having a diameter of 3 or less.
Notice the xP symbol at the center of the four circular holes. These symbols are highlighted in white,
indicating they are pinholes identified by HyperMesh for removal.
Pinholes identified using a 3 mm diameter
5. Click delete to remove the selected pinholes in the model.
The selected pinholes are removed and replaced by fixed points located at the center of the original
pinholes. Notice that the mesh updates to follow the changes in the geometry.
Step 6: Remove all surface fillets in the clip.

1. Go to the surf fillets subpanel.
2. If the surfaces are not shaded, click Shaded Geometry and Surface Edges ( ).
3. For find fillets in selected, click surfs >> displayed.

4. In the min radius field, type 2.0.
5. Click find to identify all the surface fillets with radius of 2 or greater.
Surface fillets identified for removal
6. Click remove.
Step 7: Automatically identify and remove rounded corners of surfaces.

You should still be in the Defeature panel.
1. Go to the edge fillets subpanel.
2. Click surfs >> displayed.
3. In the min radius field, type 1.0.
4. Set the bottom switch to all to find all the fillets.
5. Click find.
The edge fillets that meet the filter criteria are identified on the screen with an F symbol and radial lines
marking the fillet beginning and end.

Edge fillets identified for removal
6. Notice that the selector moves down to the fillets entity selector.
7. Right-click on one of the F fillet markers on the screen to deselect the fillet.
8. Click remove to delete the selected edge fillets.
All the fillets are removed.

Now that the model has been simplified, it is a good time to save the model.
Summary
The model is now represented in a much simpler form that suits the analysis that will be performed. Holes,
surface fillets, and edge fillets were removed that were considered too small to be captured by the desired
element size of 2.5.

Mesh the part to determine poor element quality
Suppress small edges
Split surfaces
Remove interior fixed points
Replace closely placed fixed points
Create final mesh
Topological details of the geometry may affect the quality of the mesh created from the surfaces. Some of
these details may not reflect any major feature of the part’s shape, and can be removed without concern.
When modifying the topology affects the shape of the surfaces, a compromise must be made between the
part shape and the element quality necessary for the analysis. Other times, adding topological features that
do not change the shape of the part may actually help create a better quality mesh.
Exercise: Refining Topology to Achieve a Quality Mesh
Step 1: Open the model file, clip_refine.hm.

The model for this exercise is clip_refine.hm. Take a few moments to observe the model using the
different visual options available in HyperMesh (rotation, zooming, etc.).
Step 2: Create a preliminary mesh.

1. From the menu bar, click Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh to open the Automesh panel.
2. Set the selector type to surfs.
3. Go to the size and bias subpanel.
4. In the element size = field, type 2.5.
5. For mesh type:, select mixed.
6. Switch the meshing mode from interactive to automatic.
8. Click mesh to mesh the surfaces.

Initial mesh on the defeatured clip model
Step 3: Review the mesh quality.

1. Take a minute to rotate, zoom, and pan the model to review the mesh that was created. Note the
locations where the mesh was not created in rows and columns of quads.
2. From the menu bar, select Mesh > Check > Elements > Check Elements to open the Check
Elements panel.
3. Go to the 2-d subpanel.
5. Click the length button to evaluate the minimum length.
6. Note the elements that failed the check. The topology will be edited to correct of some of these, and the
others will be left as is.
8. Use the Model Browser to turn off the display of the elements in the Middle Surface component.
Step 4: Remove short edges by combining fixed points.

1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Edit > Fixed Points > Replace to open the panel.
2. Verify that the active selector is set to moved points.

3. Select the lower fixed point as indicated in the following image.
4. Once the point is selected, activate the retained point button.
5. Select the upper fixed point as indicated in the following image.
6. Once the second point is selected, click replace.
Selecting fixed points to be combined
Step 5: Remove the fixed points interior to all surfaces.

You should still be in the Points panel.
1. Go to the suppress subpanel and choose the at cursor option.
2. Select the four fixed points as shown in the following image.
Each fixed point will be deleted as you select it.
These fixed points are left over from a defeaturing operation where small holes (pinholes) were removed.
They could remain without greatly sacrificing the element quality, given the element size used for the
mesh, but the mesh should be better without them.

Fixed points to be removed
Step 6: Add edges to the surfaces to control the mesh pattern.

1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Edit > Surfaces > Trim with Nodes to open the panel.
2. Under node normal to edge, set the active selector to node.
3. Zoom into the area indicated below and select the indicated fixed point.
4. With the active selector now on lines, select the line shown in the following image.
Once both the point and line are selected, an edge will be created from the location of the fixed point
perpendicular to the line.

Select fixed point and line to split the surface.
5. Repeat sub-steps 6.2, 6.3, and 6.4 for the following point and line.


Select fixed point and line to split the surface
Step 7: Add edges to the surfaces to control the mesh pattern.

1. Go to the trim with surfs/planes subpanel.

2. In the with plane column, set the active selector to surfs.
3. Select the surfaces indicated in the following image.
Surfaces to be selected for splitting
4. If necessary, toggle the direction selector to N1, N2, and N3. Click N1 to make the selector active.
5. Press and hold your left mouse button, and then move it over the edge indicated in the following figure.
Once over the line, the cursor will change to a square with a dot in the center, . Release your mouse
button. Click two points anywhere along the edge. Do not click a third.
Nodes will be placed on the line for N1 and N2.
6. Press F4 on the keyboard to enter the Distance panel.
7. Go to the three nodes subpanel.
8. As in 7.6, press and hold your left mouse button, and then move it over the edge of the hole, as indicated
in the following image. Once over the line, the cursor will change to a square with a dot in the center.
Release your mouse button.

Select fixed point and line to split the surface
9. Click three points anywhere along the edge.
Temporary nodes will be placed on the line representing N1, N2, and N3.
Note that the technique used to create nodes to select where none existed before can be used in any
place where nodes need to be selected but don’t exist in the model. You can create nodes in this
manner on lines, surfaces and elements. For more details, see the HyperMesh online help. Pick the
index and type, Picking Nodes on Geometry or Elements.
10. Click circle center to create a node at the center of the hole.
11. Click return to return to the Surface Edit panel.
12. Click B to make it the active selector.
13. Select the node that was just created at the center of the hole.
14. Click trim.
15. Click return to exit the main menu.
The surfaces are trimmed through the center of the hole.
Step 8: Suppress shared edges causing a small edge.

1. Click Geometry > Edit > Surface Edges > (Un)Suppress to open the panel.
2. Select each of the lines in the image below using your left mouse button and click suppress.

Each line will become suppressed (blue) as you click suppress.
Surface edges to suppress by toggling
Step 9: Remesh the part.

Remesh the surfaces of the part, using the automatic mode, a size of 2.5, and the mixed mesh type.
1. Use the Model Browser to display the elements in the Middle Surface component.
2. Access the Automesh panel.
3. Verify that elem size = is set to 2.5 and the mesh type is set to mixed.
4. Click surfs >> displayed to select all displayed surfaces.
5. Click mesh.
Step 10: Review the mesh quality.

1. Take a minute to rotate, zoom, and pan the model to review the mesh that was created. Note that the
mesh now consists completely of rows and columns of quads.
2. Enter the Check Elements panel.
3. Go to the 2-d subpanel

5. Click the length button to evaluate the minimum length.
Note the elements that failed the check. There are only two elements that fail the check, and these fail
the check because of the shape of the part. However, they are not too small compared to the global
element size, so you can leave them as they are.
7. Go to the QI optimize subpanel.
8. Verify that elem size = is set to 2.5 and the mesh type is set to mixed.
9. Click edit criteria.
10. In the Target element size field, type 2.500.
11. Click Apply and OK.
12. Select surfs >> displayed to select all displayed surfaces.
13. Click mesh.
Note that the old mesh is replaced by the new mesh.
14. If there is a message saying, "There is a conflict between the user requested element size and quality
criteria ideal element size," click the button, Recompute quality criteria using size of 2.5.
15. Access the Quality Index panel by clicking Mesh > Check > Elements > Quality Index.
16. Go to pg1 and verify that the comp. QI is 0.01.
This low value indicates that the mesh is good quality. The higher the number, the lower the mesh
quality.

The part is now meshed and ready to be set up for an analysis. Save the model, if desired.

Create circle, arc, line, and tangent lines
Duplicate and translate lines
Edit lines by splitting and displaying their IDs
Delete redundant arcs and lines
Duplicate and reflect an arc
Create a surface square and two parallel lines on an X-Y plane
Create a fillet between two lines
Sometimes CAE users need to create models from sketches where there is no pre-existing geometry. The
tools in this tutorial will help you accomplish that task.
Exercise: Creating and Editing Line Data
This exercise teaches you how to create lines and surfaces.
Step 1: Create a component collector to geometry.

1. Access the Create Component dialog in one of the following ways:
Right click in the Model Browser and click Create > Component
From the menu bar, select Collectors > Create > Components.
2. For Name = type geometry.
3. Click the Color: swatch and choose yellow from the list of colors.
4. Click Create.
Step 2: Create nodes.
1. On the standard toolbar, click Isometric View, ( ).
2. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Create > Nodes > XYZ to access the Create Nodes panel in
the XYZ subpanel.
3. Create five nodes by entering the X, Y, and Z coordinates from the following table and click create node
for each of the nodes.
Node X Y Z
1 0 0 0

2 0 0 25
3 0 0 37
4 0 5 25
5 0 5 -2
4. Click return.
5. Press f to fit the model to the model to the screen.
Step 3: Display the node IDs.

1. Click Geometry > Check > Nodes > Numbers to access the Numbers panel.
2. Change the entity type to nodes.
3. Click nodes >> all to select all of the nodes.
4. Click on to display all the node IDs.
5. Click return.
Step 4: Create a circle.

1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Create > Lines > Circle Center and Radius to access the
Circles panel and the center & radius subpanel.
2. With the active selector set to node list, pick node 2 from the graphics area.
This will be the location of the circle’s center.
3. Switch ( ) the orientation vector to the x-axis.
4. For radius=, specify 5.
5. Click create.
6. Remain in the Circles: Center and Radius subpanel.
Step 5: Create an arc.
1. Click the Arc Center and Radius icon to access the center & radius subpanel.
2. With the active selector set to node list, pick node 2 from the graphics area.
This will be the center of the arc.
3. Verify that the orientation vector is set to x-axis.
4. Pick the node with ID number 2 again as the base for the axis of rotation.
5. For Angle = specify 180.

6. For Radius = specify 2.5.
7. For Offset = specify 90.
8. Click create to create an arc.
9. From the standard toolbar, click Rear ( ).
Step 6: Create a line.
1. Click the Linear Nodes icon to open the subpanel.
2. Pick the nodes with ID number 4 and node 5 in node list.
3. Click create to create a line between nodes 4 and 5.
4. Click return.
Step 7: Duplicate and translate lines.

1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Translate > Lines to access the Translate panel.
2. Change the entity type to lines.
3. Pick the line that was created between nodes 4 and 5.
4. Click lines >> duplicate >> current comp from the extended menu to copy the new line into the current
component (Geometry).
5. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select y-axis.

6. Click magnitude = and enter 10.0.
7. Click translate -.
8. Click return.
Step 8: Edit lines by splitting at a line.

1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Edit > Lines > Split at Line to access the Line Edit panel.
2. With the lines selector active, pick the circle.
3. Click cut line and pick the line between node 4 and node 5.
4. Click split.
The circle has one quarter split off from the rest.
5. Repeat this procedure, picking the remaining 3/4 arc of the circle and the other line that was just
translated.
6. Click return.
Step 9: Display the line IDs.

1. Go to the Numbers panel.
3. Click lines >> all to select all lines.
4. Click on to display all the line IDs.

5. Click return.
Step 10: Delete a redundant arc.

1. Access the Delete panel in one of the following ways:
From the Collectors toolbar, click Delete ( )
Press F2 on the keyboard.
3. Select the lower semi-circle (line IDs 5 and 10) from the graphics area.
4. Click delete entity to delete the redundant arc.
5. Click return.
Step 11: Duplicate and reflect an arc.

1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Reflect > Lines to access the Reflect panel
3. Choose the arc (line ID 2) from the graphics area.
4. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select z-axis.
5. Pick node 2 as the base node.
6. Click lines >> duplicate, then original comp from the extended entity selection menu to copy the new
line into the current component (Geometry).
7. Click reflect to create the lower arc.
8. Click return.

Step 12: Create two tangent lines.
1. Lines panel, at tangents subpanel (Geometry > Create > Lines > Tangent).
2. Select the node with ID number 3.
3. Click the line selector to make it active.
4. Select the semi-circular line with ID number 8.
Note: Line ID may be different, depending on whether you needed to perform the split/delete/duplicate
tasks more than once.

5. Click create.
There are two tangent lines on the screen.
6. Pick one of the tangents.
7. Repeat steps 4-5.
8. Select the other tangent.
9. Click return to exit the tangent subpanel.
Step 13: Redisplay the line IDs.

1. Go to the Numbers panel.
3. Click lines, then all from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Click on to display all the line IDs.
Step 14: Split curves by tangent line and delete redundant line.
1. Go to the Line Edit panel and enter split at line subpanel (Geometry > Edit > Lines > Split at Line).
2. Pick semi-circular line 8 for lines and tangent line 12 for cut line.
Note: Line ID may be different.
3. Click split to split line 8 with line 12.
4. Repeat steps 3-5 in order to cut curved line 8 with tangent line 13 in Line Edit panel.
5. Press the F2 key to jump into Delete panel from Line Edit panel.
6. Select the curved lines between tangent lines 12 and 13.
7. Click delete entity to delete the curves.
8. Click return twice to exit the panels.

Step 15: Create a component collector for surfaces.
1. Right click in the Model Browser and click Create > Component.
2. Click Name: and enter surfaces.
3. Click the Color: and select purple from the list of swatches.
4. Click Create.
Step 16: Create a surface square on an X-Y plane.

1. From the main menu, select the 2D page, then select planes to open the Planes panel.
2. Go to the square subpanel.
3. Set the orientation vector to z-axis.
4. For base node, choose the node with ID number 1 to be the base reference node.
5. Switch from mesh, keep surf to surface only.
6. For size = enter 30.
7. Click create to create a square surface.
Step 17: Create a line that connects two parallel lines on an X-Y plane.
1. Click Geometry > Create > Lines > Intersect.
2. Select z-axis (located at the bottom-center of the panel, shared between the controls for elements with
plane and lines with plane) to represent the intersection plane.
The reason for choosing the z-axis is that you want to create the line on the X-Y plane.
3. For base, choose the node with ID number 1 to be the base node.
4. For line list, choose the two straight lines that are perpendicular to the X-Y plane.
A bold line displayed on the screen represents the result.
Step 18: Switch the current working component surfaces to geometry.

1. In the Model Browser right-click the geometry component and click Make Current.
From this point onwards any element or geometry created will be placed in the geometry component
collector.
Step 19: Extend a line to a surface edge.
1. Click the Isometric View icon.
2. Click Geometry > Edit > Lines > Extend to open the panel.
3. Toggle from distance = to to:.
4. Change the entity type from node to line.

5. Activate the top line selector and pick the line created in step 17--the line that passes through node 1--
as the line to be extended.
A red V marks the beginning of the line to be extended.
6. Activate the lower line selector and--with the view still in iso1--select the lower-right edge of the purple
plane.
7. Click extend -.
You can see the line is extended to reach one surface edge.
The result should resemble the following image.

Step 20: Create a fillet between two lines.
1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Create > Lines > Fillet to access the Lines panel.
You will use the create option.
2. Check Trim original lines.
3. For Radius=, enter 5.
4. For 1st line, pick the vertical line through which the line extended in step 19 passes.
5. For 2nd line, pick the extended line from step 19.
"Please select fillet quadrant" displays in the status bar. HyperMesh is asking you to select a reference
location for the fillet.
6. Pick the upper-right X for the fillet quadrant, as shown in the image.
HyperMesh immediately creates a fillet on the screen.
7. Click return to exit the Lines panel.

Step 21: Trim a line by plane and delete a redundant line segment.
1. Click Geometry > Edit > Lines > Split at Plane.
2. Go to the split at plane subpanel.
3. With the lines selector active, select the vertical line that does not have a fillet.
4. Set the orientation vector to z-axis.
5. Choose node 1 as the base node.
6. Click split to split line 4 by the X-Y plane.

7. Press the F2 key to access the Delete panel.
8. Switch the entity type to lines.
9. Choose the small line segment under the X-Y plane, and click delete entity to remove the line segment.
10. Click return twice to exit the panels.
Step 22: Remove all temp nodes.

1. From the menu bar, click Mesh > Delete > Nodes to access the Temp Nodes panel.
2. Click clear all to remove all temp nodes.
3. Click return to return to exit the panel.
Step 23: Change the rendering mode.
1. On the Visualization toolbar, click Shaded Geometry ( ).
The plane (purple) becomes shaded instead of wire frame.

Step 24: Export all geometry as an IGES file.
1. Click File > Export > Geometry to open the Export tab.
2. Click Export geometry ( ) on the Export tab.
3. Click File type: Iges.
4. Enter a name in the File: field.
5. Click Export to save your file.
The IGES file you have generate can be shared with other CAD packages such as UG, Catia, and ProE.


In this tutorial, you will learn:
What solid geometry is
What topology is
What 3-D topology looks like
Solids are geometric entities that define a three-dimensional volume. Geometric entities are defined as
follows:
Point: 0 dimensional; has only x, y, and z coordinates
Line: one-dimensional; has length, can be curved through three-dimensional space
Surface: two-dimensional; has an area
Solid: three-dimensional; has a volume
The use of solid geometry is helpful when dividing a part into multiple volumes--for example, to divide a part
into simple, mappable regions for hex meshing.
Exercise: Creating and editing solid geometry
This exercise uses the model file, solid_geom.hm.
Step 1: Retrieve model file, solid_geom.hm.

1. From the menu bar click File > Open > Model.

2. Select solid_geom.hm and click Open.
Step 2: Create solid geometry from the bounding surfaces.

1. From the menu bar click Geometry > Create > Solids > Bounding Surfaces.
2. Verify that the Auto select solid surfaces option is checked.
3. Select one surface on the part.
All of the surfaces should automatically be selected.
4. Click create to create the solid.
The status bar indicates that a solid has been created. The solids are identified by thicker lines than
surfaces.
Step 3: Create a solid geometry cylinder using primitives.

1. From the menu bar click Geometry > Create > Solids > Cylinder Full.
2. Click bottom center and select one of the temporary nodes (see following image).
The cursor automatically advances to the normal vector button.
3. Select the remaining temporary node shown in the image.
4. For Base radius= enter 1.5.
5. For Height= enter 25.

6. Click create.
A solid cylinder is created in the middle of the first solid that was created.
Step 4: Subtract the cylinder’s volume from the rest of the part.
1. From the menu bar click Geometry > Edit > Solids > Boolean to open the Edit Solids panel.
2. Verify that operation type: is set to simple (combine all).
3. Set operation: to A-B (remove B from A).
4. With the solids entity selector for A: active, select the original solid.
Verify that the cursor advances to solids next to B:.
5. Select the solid cylinder created in step 3.
6. Click calculate.
7. To confirm the material has been removed, click shaded geometry with edges, , and rotate the
model to inspect the part.
Step 5: Split the solid geometry using bounding lines.

You should still be in the Solid Edit panel.
1. Go to the trim with lines subpanel.

2. Under with bounding lines:, activate the solids entity selector, and click anywhere on the model to
select it.
3. Activate the lines entity selector and, in the graphics area, select the lines shown in the following image.
4. Click trim to trim the model.
A plane was trimmed. Note that two solids now intersect.
Step 6: Split the solid geometry using a cut line.

You should still be in the Solid Edit panel, trim with lines subpanel.

1. Under with cut line:, activate the solids entity selector, and select the small, tetrahedral shaped solid
created in step 5.
2. In the Model Browser click the next to the View1 view in the Views folder.
3. Click drag a cut line.
4. Pick two locations on screen such that they define the end points of a line that roughly divides the
tetrahedral solid in half, as shown, following.
5. Click the middle-mouse button to split the solid.
6. Select the half of the original tetrahedral solid as shown in the following image.

7. Use with cut line: to split the solid as shown in the following image.
8. Select the solid shown in the following image.

9. In the Model Browser click the next to View2 to set the view.
10. Use with cut line: to split the solid as shown in the following image.
Step 7: Merge solids together.

1. Go to the merge subpanel.
2. With the solids entity selector under to be merged: active, select the three solids shown in the
following image.

3. Click merge to merge the solids.
The resulting solids in the tetrahedral area should look like the following image. There should be two solid
entities, with one of them being hexahedral in shape in the corner.
Step 8: Split the solid geometry with a user-defined plane.

1. Go to the trim with plane/surf subpanel.
2. In the Model Browser click the next to the View3 to restore the view.
3. With the solids entity selector under with plane: active, select the large solid representing the majority
of the part.

4. Set the plane selector to N1, N2, N3.
5. With N1 active, press and hold the left mouse button, and move the mouse cursor over one of the two
edges shown in the following image.
The edge should highlight.
6. Release the mouse button, and left-click in the middle of the edge.
A green temp node appears at the location to indicate the selection for N1.The plane selector is
advanced to the N2 selection.
7. In the same manner, highlight the other line shown in the image and select two nodes along its length.
Your selection should look similar to the following image.

8. Click trim to trim the solid.
Step 9: Split the solid geometry with a swept line.

1. Go to the trim with lines subpanel.
2. With the solids entity selector under with sweep lines: active, select the solid with the cylinder
removed.
3. Activate the line list entity selector and select the edges used in step 8 to define N1, N2, and N3.

4. Under sweep to:, switch the plane selector from N1, N2, N3 to x-axis.
5. Verify that the panel is set to sweep all below the plane selector.
Step 10: Split the solid geometry with a principal plane.

1. Go to the trim with plane/surf subpanel.
2. With the solids entity selector under with plane: active, select the solid with the cylinder removed.
3. Switch the plane selector from N1, N2, N3 to z-axis.
4. Press and hold the left mouse button, and move the mouse cursor over the edge shown in the following
image.
The edge should highlight.

5. Release the mouse button, and left-click anywhere along the edge.
6. A purple temp node appears at the location to indicate the selection for the base node.
Step 11: Split the solid geometry by creating surfaces inside the solids.
1. From the menu bar click Geometry > Create > Surfaces > Spline/Filler to open the Surfaces panel.
2. Deactivate the Auto create (free edges only) and keep tangency options.
3. Select the five lines shown in the following image:

4. Click create to create the surface.
6. Click Geometry > Edit > Solids > Trim with Plane/Surfaces to open the Solid Edit panel.
7. Under with surfs:, with the solid entity selector active, select the solid in the graphics area.
8. Under with surfs:, with the surfs entity selector active, select the surface in the graphics area that was
just created.
9. Click trim.
10. Click return.
11. Click Geometry > Create > Surfaces > Spline/Filler to open the Surface panel.
12. Select the four lines shown in the following image.

13. Click create.
14. Click return.
15. Click Geometry > Edit > Solids > Trim with Plane/Surface to open the Solid Edit panel.
16. Under with surfs: activate solids and click the solid in the graphics area.
17. Under with surfs:, with the surfs entity selector active, select the surface in the graphics area that was
just created.
18. Uncheck the Extend Trimmer box.
19. Click trim.
Step 12: Suppress extraneous edges on the part.

1. Click Geometry > Edit >Surface Edge >(Un)Suppress to open the Edge Edit panel.
3. Select lines >> by geoms.
4. With the solids entity selector active, select the four solids shown in the following image.

5. Click add to selection.
6. Set breakangle = to 45.
7. Click suppress to suppress the edges.

This tutorial will explore the geometry and mesh editing functions available in the Quick Edit panel.
The Quick Edit panel provides easy access to a number of geometry editing mesh editing tools. More than a
dozen functions are presented in this single panel. Many of the functions can be found in other HyperMesh
panels. These tools may be used before creating the surface mesh to simplify geometry, correct geometry
errors, or add additional geometric features to control the mesh generation. Additionally, if a mesh already
exists on the geometry, you have the option of automatically remeshing the geometry as you modify it.
This tutorial uses the model called base_bracket.hm.
Step 1: Load the model and create a baseline mesh.

1. Open the model base_bracket.hm.
2. From the menu bar, click Mesh > Create > 2D Automesh to open the Automesh panel.
3. Verify that the size and bias subpanel is selected.
4. Set element size = to 0.1.
5. Set mesh type: to mixed.
6. Verify that elements to surf comp is selected.
7. Click surfs >> displayed to select the displayed surfaces.
8. Click mesh.
9. Click return twice to exit the panel.

Next, you will start refining the geometry and improving the mesh quality. HyperMesh has the ability to
automatically remesh a surface if any topology changes are made to the geometry. This is controlled by a
setting in the Preferences / Meshing Options panel under topology revision. The default option is to
remesh the surface; however, one can opt to keep or delete the mesh instead.
For the base component, your focus will be to improve the mesh quality around the large holes in the side
surface and the mounting holes on the flanges. The oblong holes will be removed. On the top surface, the
mesh quality around the five small holes will be improved by trimming in a "washer" surface around the holes.
Step 2: Simplify the geometry by removing unnecessary holes.

1. From the menu bar, click Mesh > Quick Edit.
2. For unsplit surf:, activate line(s).
3. Pick each of the six oblong holes (under the large circular holes) to remove them and re-generate the
mesh.

Model after removing 6 oblong holes.
Step 3: Modify geometry around remaining small holes.

1. Adjust your view to zoom in to the notched area of the top surface.
2. For the split surf-line function, activate node.
3. Pick the node and line as indicated in the image to trim the surface.

4. Repeat this step to create four more trim lines in the locations depicted in the following image. The end
result is that each of the four small holes is isolated in its own rectangular surface patch.
Surface trim lines isolating small holes onto individual surfaces. Note that element display has been turned off for clarity.
Step 4: Trim a washer layer into the surface around each of the four holes.
1. In the offset value field next to washer split, enter 0.05.
2. For the washer split function, activate the line(s) selector.

3. Pick each of the free surface edges around the four small holes.
4. For the adjust/set density function, activate the left line(s) selector.
This activates the adjust edge density option.
5. Click the surface edge segment to adjust the densities as shown in the image:
6. Activate the right line(s) selector.
This activates the set edge density option.
7. Left-click one of the adjusted outer washer edges (one where the density has been changed from 7 to 8
in the last step).
8. Right-click the remaining outer washer edges to set the element densities to 8 elements.
9. Use either the adjust or set edge density functions to make the remaining mesh adjustments, as
indicated in the following image.

10. Use a similar process to trim a washer around the remaining hole in the top surface. Once the washer is
trimmed, adjust the element density to match nodes on the inner and outer washer edges.
Step 5: Adjust the mesh around the large holes on the side surfaces.
The approach used around the large holes is to trim the surfaces into individual patches to which a mapped
meshing algorithm can be applied. Use the split surf-line function to make the following surface trims. Note
that only one side is shown and the element display has been turned off for clarity.
The mapped meshing algorithms apply a mesh pattern template to a surface, and then map that pattern to
the specific surface size and shape. For this method to be applied certain criteria must be met, including

element type (quads only mesh) surface shape (three, four or five edges) and specific mesh density settings.
In step 5, the surfaces around the large holes were trimmed into faces that can be meshed with the map as
pentagon algorithm, provided the mesh type and density settings are correct.
Step 6: Remesh the newly trimmed surfaces.

2. Select the 12 surface patches around the three holes on one side of the model.
3. Verify that you are working in the size and bias subpanel.
4. Verify that the meshing mode is set to interactive.
5. Set mesh type: to quads.
6. Click mesh to enter the interactive meshing module.
7. On the density subpanel, adjust the density on the six edges across the center of the holes from 1 to 2.
8. On the mesh style subpanel, set the mesh method to map as pentagon, then click set all.
9. Click mesh to regenerate the mesh.
10. Click return to accept the mesh and go back to the Automesh panel.
This completes this tutorial. For more practice using these methods, use the other components in the
model.

Open geometry in solidThinking Inspired
Modify geometry inside solidThinking Inspired
Export modified geometry
Import geometry inside HyperWorks Desktop
The benefit of using solidThinking is that you can apply quick geometry fixes without going back to the CAD
software.
Exercise: Modify model using solidThinking

This exercise uses the model file, rail_extrusion.hm.
Step 1: Open and view the model file, rail_extrusion.hm.

1. Launch solidThinking Inspired.
2. Go to File > Open
3. In the file dialog switch, set the drop-down to Inspired All Types.
4. Browse to the tutorial files and select rail_extrusion.hm.
Step 2: Edit geometry

1. Select the Push/Pull faces tool.
2. Click on one end of the rail and push to reduce its length.
3. Click on the bottom of the rail and pull to increase its height.
Your modified geometry might look something like the example below. It is now ready to be transferred into
HyperWorks Desktop.

Step 3: Export geometry from solidThinking Inpired.
1. Go to File > Save as…
2. From the drop-down menu select STEP (*.stp).
3. Choose a name and click Save.
4. Exit solidThinking Inspired.
Step 4: Import geometry in HyperWorks Desktop.

1. Open HyperMesh Desktop.
2. Go to File > Import > Geometry.
3. In the Import tab, browse to the STEP file you previously saved.
4. Click Import.
You can now see your modified geometry in HyperMesh.

Save the model as a HyperMesh database.

In this tutorial you will learn how to create and edit dimensions on geometry using the Dimensioning panel.
The Dimensioning panel is used to change one or more dimensions of existing geometry, thus changing the
basic shape of solids and other enclosed volumes. The dimensioning tool allows a user to select dimensions
of or between surfaces, and modify those dimensions as required. This is accomplished by the use of
dimension manipulators.
Step 1: Open the model 2_holes.hm.
Step 2: Create a dimension for the thickness of the part.
1. Click Geometry > Edit > Surfaces > Dimensioning to open the Dimensioning panel.
2. Click the point in the image for point1.
3. Click the point in the image for point2.

A dimension manipulator with a value of 0.375 is created between the points, which represents the
thickness of the part.
Step 3: Change the dimension value.

1. Click the dimension text (0.375) for the dimension manipulator created in the previous step.
2. Enter 0.25 for the value and press enter.

Notice the part thickness changes.
3. Click 0.25 and enter 0.5 and press enter.

Step 4: Modify the dimension manipulator direction.
1. Click Geometry > Create > Nodes > Extract on Lines.
2. Select the line shown in the image.
3. Enter 2 for the Number of nodes field.
4. Click create to create the nodes. These nodes will be used to show the starting position of the
thickness during future modifications.

6. Click Geometry > Edit > Surfaces > Dimensioning.
7. Click the 0.5 thickness value and enter 1.0 and press enter.

Notice the dimension changed equally about the midpoint between the original locations.
8. Click reject to reject the change.
9. Click the handle at the bottom of the dimension manipulator as shown in the image. Notice the bottom
arrow changes to a line, indicating that the bottom end will remain fixed.

10. Change the value of the dimension to 1.

Notice the bottom stays fixed.
12. Click the handle at the top of the dimension manipulator as shown in the image. Notice the top arrow
changes to a line, indicating that the top end will remain fixed. Also notice that the bottom is now an
arrow, as only one end can remain fixed.

13. Change the value to 1.0.

Notice top of the part stays fixed.
Step 5: Create and modify the diameter dimensions on the holes.

1. Select the two points shown in the image below for point1 and point2.
2. Click the value and change it to 0.25.

3. Click the value and change it to 0.5.
4. Create a dimension on the other hole.
5. Change the value of the dimension to 1.0.

Step 6: Delete a manipulator.

1. Click the 0.75 diameter hole dimension.
2. Clear the value from the manipulator and press enter.
Notice the dimension manipulator has been removed from the hole.
Step 7: Mesh the part.

1. Click Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh.

2. Enter 0.1 for the Element Size field.
4. Click the toggle to change to automatic if not already there.
5. Click mesh to mesh the part.
Step 8: Modify the dimensions with automatic remeshing enabled.

1. Press o to open the Options panel.
2. Click the mesh subpanel.
3. Change the topology revision switch to either remesh or advanced remesh.
5. Open the Dimensioning panel.
6. Click the thickness value as shown in the image and enter 1.

Notice the part is remeshed for the dimension change.
7. Click the diameter value of the hole and enter 0.25.
Notice the part remeshes with the change in hole diameter.

Meshing
1-D Elements
2-D Elements
3-D Elements

1-D Elements

In this tutorial, you will learn how to build 1-D elements.
Exercise: Creating 1-D Elements
This exercise uses the model file, 1d_elements.hm.
Step 1: Retrieve the model file.

1. Open the HyperMesh file, 1d_elements.hm.
2. From the menu bar, select Preferences > User Profiles.
3. Select Default (HyperMesh).
4. Click OK to load the user profile.
Step 2: Create 1-D bar elements.

1. Access the Bars panel using the menu bar by selecting Mesh > Create > 1D Elements > Bars.
2. Go to the bar2 subpanel.
3. Click ax = and enter the value 0.
4. Click ay = and enter the value 0.
5. Click az = and enter the value 0.

These are the values for the bar offset.
6. Click property = and select property1.
A property is now assigned to the element.
7. Click pins a = and enter the value 0.
8. Click pins b = and enter the value 0.
These are the values for the degrees of freedom.
9. Click the switch below update and select components from the pop-up menu.
10. After x comp =, enter the value 1.
11. After y comp =, enter the value 1.
12. After z comp =, enter the value 1.
The local y-axis is now specified.
13. Click node A and select the lower node in the graphics area.
14. Click node B and select the upper node in the graphics area.
The two-noded bar element is created.
15. Click return to access the main menu.
Bar 2 element created
Step 3: Create 1-D elements along a line.

1. Go to the Line Mesh panel by selecting Mesh > Create > Line Mesh from the menu bar.
2. Verify that the entity selector is set to lines.
3. Select a line on the model.
4. Verify that the segment is whole line option is set.
5. Set element config: to rigid.
6. Click mesh.
The Element Density panel now appears.
7. Click set segment to make it the active selector.
8. In the elem density = field, enter 20.
9. Click set all.
10. Click return twice to access the main menu.
Rigids created in the Line Mesh panel
Step 4: Create 1-D elements from the feature in the model.

1. Use the Model Browser to turn off all of the geometry in the model.
2. Use Model Browser to turn on only the elements in the feature_elements component.
3. Access the Features panel from the menu bar by selecting Mesh > Check > Components > Features.
4. Click the comps button and pick the feature_elements component.

6. In the feature angle = field, enter 30.
7. Select the ignore normals check box.
8. Verify that create: is set to plot elements.
9. Click features.
The plot elements are created.

2-D Elements

Learn how to mesh all the surfaces at once specifying different element sizes and element types
Practice changing the element density along surface edges
Practice checking element quality and changing the mesh pattern by changing the mesh algorithm
Learn how to preview the mesh on all the unmeshed surfaces
Practice changing the element type and node spacing (biasing) along surface edges
Learn how to remesh surfaces
The optimal starting point for creating a shell mesh for a part is to have geometry surfaces defining the part.
The most efficient method for creating a mesh representing the part includes using the Automesh panel and
creating a mesh directly on the part’s surfaces.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, channel.hm.
Step 1: Open and view the model file, channel.hm.

Take a few moments to observe the model using the different visual options available in HyperMesh (rotation,
zooming, etc.).

Step 2: Mesh all the part’s surfaces at once using an element size of 5 and the
mixed element type (quads and trias).
1. Access the Automesh panel in one of the following ways:
On the menu bar, select Mesh, then Create, and then click 2D AutoMesh
From the main menu, select the 2D page, and then select automesh
3. Select surfs >> displayed.
4. For element size=, specify 5.
5. Set the mesh type: to mixed.
6. On the panel’s bottom-left corner, set interactive as the active mesh mode (it may currently be on
automatic).
7. Check the status bar at the bottom and verify that the current component collector is Middle Surface.
8. Ensure that the elements to surf comp/elements to current comp toggle is set to elems to current
comp.
9. Click mesh to enter the meshing module.
Notice that you are in the density subpanel of the meshing module. There is node seeding and a
number on each surface edge. The number is the number of elements that were created along the edge.
10. Click return to accept the mesh as the final mesh.
At this point, you could be done using the Automesh panel to mesh the part. The mesh quality is very
good. However, you will remain in the meshing module to perform the next steps, which demonstrate
how to use various subpanels to interactively control the creation of the mesh.
Step 3: Delete the mesh.

1. Access the Delete panel in one of the following ways:
On the Collectors toolbar, select Delete ( )
Press F2 on the keyboard
3. Select elems >> all.
5. Click return to go back to the Automesh panel.
Step 4: Mesh the surface having three fixed points interior to its surface.

You should still be in the Automesh panel, size and bias subpanel.
1. Leave all options in the menu panel as they are.
2. Select the surface that has three fixed points interior to its surface.
4. Preview the mesh generated.
Step 5: Fit only the surface being meshed to the graphics area.
Fit the surface to the graphics area in one of the following ways.
On the density subpanel, click f.
Click local view and pick fill.
Step 6: From the graphics area, specify a new element density along surface
edges.
1. From the density subpanel, click the selector, adjust : edge to make it active.
2. From the graphics area, left-click an edge’s element density number to increase it by one.
3. Right-click an edge’s number to decrease it by one.
4. Click and hold the mouse pointer on an edge’s number and drag the mouse up or down to increase or
decrease the number.
5. Click mesh to update the preview mesh based on the change.
Step 7: From the menu panel, specify a new element density along surface edges.
You should still be in the density subpanel.
1. For elem density=, enter 10.
2. Activate the selector set : edge .
3. Click an edge’s number to change its value to 10.
4. Update the mesh by clicking mesh to preview the change.
5. Change all edge densities to 10 by clicking set all to.
6. Click mesh to preview the change.
Step 8: From the menu panel, specify a new element size to adjust element
densities along surface edges.
You should still be in the density subpanel.

1. For elem size=, enter 7.
2. Click calculate: edge to make it the active selector.
3. Click an edge’s number to calculate it based on an element size of 7.
The new number is calculated to create elements as close to a size of 7 as possible.
5. Click recalc all to base all edge densities on an element size of 7.
Step 9: Change all edge element densities to reflect the initial element size of 5.
1. For elem size=, specify 5.
2. Click recalc all.
4. Return to accept the mesh and go back to the size and bias subpanel.
Step 10: Preview a mesh of the channel’s rib.

1. With the surfs selector active, select the rib surface in the middle of the part.
2. Leave all options in the menu panel set they are.
5. Click local view and pick the rear view to display the rib’s surface in this position, filled to the graphics
area.
Step 11: Check the quality of the rib’s preview mesh.

1. Go to the checks subpanel.
2. Click aspect to identify all elements having an aspect ratio greater than 5.
3. Notice that no elements fail this check. In the status bar, the highest aspect ratio value reported is 1.67.
4. For jacobian specify 0.8.
5. Click jacobian to identify all elements having a jacobian less than 0.8.
6. Notice that several elements fail this check and are outlined red. The status bar reports the smallest
jacobian value to be 0.71.
7. Change the jacobian check value back to 0.7.

8. Verify that no elements have a jacobian less than 0.7. (Click jacobian.)
9. Check for quad elements having a min angle less than 45.
10. Smallest angle is _____.
11. Check for quad elements having a max angle greater than 135.
12. Largest angle is _____.
Step 12: Change the rib’s mesh pattern by changing the mesh method used for its
surface.
1. Go to the mesh style subpanel.
2. Notice that the edges’ element density numbers disappear. Interior to the rib’s surface is a small icon. It
indicates the free (unmapped) mesh method is currently being used to mesh the surface.
Mesh on rib using the free (unmapped) mesh algorithm
3. Under mesh method: set the option to map as rectangle (autodecide is default).
4. Click set all found under mesh method.
5. Notice that the icon changes to reflect the new mesh method.

Mesh on rib using the map as rectangle mesh algorithm
Step 13: Check the quality of the rib’s preview mesh again.
1. Go the checks subpanel.
2. Check for elements having an aspect ratio greater than 5.
Highest value reported is _____.
3. Check for elements having a jacobian less than 0.7.
Lowest value reported is _____.
4. Check for quad elements having a min angle less than 45.
Smallest value reported is _____.
5. Check for quad elements having a max angle greater than 135.
Highest value reported is _____.
6. Notice that in this case, the free (unmapped) mesh has better jacobian than the map as rectangle
mesh.
Step 14: Change the rib’s mesh method back to free (unmapped).
2. Under mesh method: set the option to free (unmapped).

3. Click set all found under mesh method.
5. Click return to accept the mesh as final and go back to the Automesh panel.
Step 15: Preview a mesh of all displayed, unmeshed surfaces.

1. Press V on the keyboard, and then select iso 1.
2. Move your mouse off the pop-up menu to return to the Automesh panel.
3. Accept all the default values.
4. On the menu panel’s bottom-right side, click failed surfs.
The status bar displays the following message: "There are no surfaces with meshing errors". This is
correct; all surfaces you selected to mesh so far have a mesh on them.
5. Click unmeshed surfs to identify and select all displayed unmeshed surfaces.
Step 16: Change the element type for some surfaces to trias.
2. Click toggle surf found under elem type.
Notice that interior to each surface is a blue icon. It indicates the mixed element type (quads and trias)
is currently being used to mesh the surface.
3. Under element type: select the menu trias.
4. Under element type: activate the selector set surf. (Click set surf.)
5. Left-click the blue icon twice in each of the channel’s bottom two surfaces to set their element type to
trias.

Preview of mesh w ith trias element type for the bottom tw o surfaces
Step 17: Adjust the node spacing on surface edge (biasing).

1. Go to the biasing subpanel.
2. Notice the bias intensity number (default 0.000) on each surface edge.
3. Leave the bias style set to linear.
This style corresponds to the positive slope of a straight line over the interval [0,1] of the real line. For a
positive bias intensity, smaller elements are at the start of the edge.
4. Verify that the selector adjust: edge is active.
5. Left- or right-click the edge biasing intensity number as indicated in the following image to increase or
decrease its value by 0.1.

Preview mesh in the biasing subpanel
6. Click and hold the mouse pointer on the same edge biasing intensity number and drag the mouse up to
increase its value to 3.0.
8. For intensity= enter 10.
9. Activate the calculate: edge selector.
10. Click the same edge’s bias intensity value to change it to 10.
12. Switch bias style: to bellcurve.
This style distributes nodes along the edge in a pattern that is symmetric across the midpoint of the
edge. For a positive biasing intensity, the smaller elements are at the start and end of the edge.
13. Activate the selector set: edge, to make it active.
14. Click the same edge’s blue icon to change it from linear bias style to the bellcurve bias style.
16. Click return to accept the final mesh and go back to the Automesh panel.
Step 18: Remesh the channel’s bottom two surfaces.


1. On the panel’s bottom-left side, switch the mesh mode from interactive to automatic.
This mode is not interactive; it does not take you to the meshing module. Rather, it meshes surfaces
using only the basic parameters of the automesh panel. Interactive mode can be used to remesh the
surfaces if you require the different options to control the created mesh.
2. With the surfs selector active, select the channel’s bottom two surfaces (having the tria mesh).
3. Set element size = to 10.
4. Click mesh to delete the existing mesh on the surfaces and create a new mesh.
5. Observe the resulting quad mesh on the remeshed surfaces.
Note that connectivity was maintained with the surrounding, smaller mesh. This is because the break
connectivity option was not used.
6. Click return to go to the main menu.
Remeshed surfaces w ith element edge densities

Meshing of the channel part is complete. Now is a good time to save the model.

In this tutorial, you will learn the basic concepts of surfaceless meshing and how to mesh a bracket.
Surfaceless meshing is defined as the creation of mesh using points, lines, and nodes rather than surfaces.
Some parts may have missing surfaces and some parts may not have any surfaces at all and are instead
defined by line data. Either way, a mesh still must be created. HyperMesh has a number of panels that
allow you to create a mesh based on geometry other than surfaces.
Exercise: Meshing a Bracket
This exercise uses the model file, bracket.hm. The model consists of only line data; no surfaces are
present.

Take a few moments to observe the model using the different visual options available in HyperMesh (rotation,
zooming, etc.).
Step 2: Create a concentric circle around a hole on the top face using the scale
panel.
There are three circles on the upper region of the bracket representing three holes in the bracket. Two of the
holes have concentric circles around them. This configuration allows you to create a radial mesh pattern
around the holes. The following steps will show you how to create a concentric circle around the third hole.
1. Go to the Scale panel by doing one of the following:
From the menu bar, select Geometry, then Scale, and then Lines

On the main menu, select the Tool page and go to the Scale panel
2. Click uniform and enter 2.0 for the scale factor.
3. Press F4 to go to the Distance panel.
5. Verify that the node selector N1 is active.
6. Move the mouse pointer to the graphics area. While keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag the
mouse pointer over the circle representing the hole. When the mouse pointer changes to a square and
the circle is highlighted, release the mouse button. The circle remains highlighted. Left-click the
highlighted circle to create a node for N1. Click twice more at different locations on the line to create
nodes N2 and N3.
7. Click circle center.
A node is created at the circle’s center. This node will be selected as the origin node when the circle is
duplicated and scaled.
8. Click return to go back to the Scale panel.
9. Switch the entity type to lines.
10. In the graphics area, select the circle.
11. Click lines >> duplicate >> original comp.
12. Click the origin: node selector to make it active.
13. Select the temporary node you created at the circle’s center.
14. Click scale +.
A new circle is created, which is concentric with the original.
15. Click return.
Step 3: Create a radial mesh between each of the concentric circles using the
spline panel.
1. Go to the Spline panel by doing one of the following:
From the menu bar, select Mesh, then Create, then 2D Elements, and then click Spline
On the main menu, select the 2D page and go to the Spline panel.
2. With the entity type set to lines, select all six circular lines.
3. Switch from mesh, keep surf to mesh, dele surf.
This option creates surfaces based on the selected entities, uses the surfaces to create a mesh, and
then deletes the surfaces.
4. Make sure the keep tangency checkbox is unselected.
5. Click create.

The meshing module appears. Element edge density numbers appear on the selected lines. The
numbers on a pair of concentric circular lines must be identical in order to achieve a radial mesh.
6. In the density subpanel, specify 8 for elem density.
7. Click set all to.
All of the circular lines now have an element edge density of 8.
8. Click mesh.
9. Click return.
10. Remain in the Spline panel.
Preview of mesh betw een pairs concentric circular lines
Step 4: Mesh the rest of the top face using the spline panel.
1. With the entity type set to lines, select the four lines defining the perimeter of the top face and the three
circular lines defining the outside perimeter of the three radial meshes.
2. Click create.
The meshing module appears.
3. In the density subpanel, click mesh to preview the mesh.
4. Click return to accept the mesh and go back to the main menu.

Final mesh on the top face of the bracket
Step 5: Mesh the back face of the bracket using the line drag panel.
1. To go to the Line Drag panel, do one of the following:
From the menu bar, select Mesh, then Create, then 2D Elements, and then click Line Drag
On the main menu, select the 2D page and enter the Line Drag panel
2. Go to the drag geoms subpanel.
3. Switch the drag: entity type from node list to line list.
4. Select the line that is on the perimeter of the existing mesh and adjacent to the bracket’s back face.
5. Click the along: line list selector to make it active.
6. Select one of the two lines defining the back face that are perpendicular to the selected line to drag.
7. Leave the toggle set to use default vector.
8. Leave the creation method set to mesh, w/o surf.
9. Click drag.
10. In the density subpanel, click mesh to preview the mesh.
11. Click return twice to accept the mesh and go back to the main menu.

Mesh of top and back faces
Step 6: Mesh the bottom face of the bracket using the ruled panel.
1. To go to the Ruled panel, do one of the following:
From the menu bar, select Mesh, then Create, then 2D Elements, and then click Ruled
On the main menu, select the 2D page and enter the Ruled panel
2. Make sure the upper entity type is set to node list.
3. Click node list and select by path.
The entity selector changes to node path.
4. Select the end nodes located on the back face edge that borders the bottom face, as indicated in the
following image.
All the nodes between the two selected nodes are automatically selected.

5. Click node path and select show node order.
The nodes are highlighted and numbered to show the order in which they have been selected.
6. Switch the lower entity type to line list.
7. Select the line defining the opposite edge of the bottom face.
8. Switch the creation method from mesh, keep surf to mesh, w/o surf.
9. Select the auto reverse check box.
When elements are generated, the edges used to create them can be ordered in different directions. The
order of the edges is determined by the order in which the nodes are selected or the direction of the
selected line(s). If the direction is different for each selection, then a mesh that crosses itself, similar to a
bow tie, will be created. To prevent this, the auto reverse option ensures elements are generated with a
similar order on each side of the mesh.
10. Click create.
11. Click mesh to preview the mesh.

12. Click return twice to accept the mesh and go back to the main menu.
Mesh of top, back, and bottom faces of bracket
Step 7: Mesh the rib using the skin panel.

1. To go to the Skin panel, do one of the following:
From the menu bar, select Mesh, then Create, then 2D Elements, and then click Skin
On the main menu, select the 2D page and enter the Skin panel
2. With the line list selector active, select any two of the three lines defining the rib.
3. Switch the creation method from mesh, keep surf to mesh, dele surf.
4. Leave the toggle set to auto reverse.
5. Click create.

Mesh of rib

Create a mesh based only on element size
Mesh a set of surfaces using the maximum deviation parameter
Reduce the maximum angle perimeter
Increase the maximum element size parameter
Chordal deviation is a meshing algorithm that allows HyperMesh to automatically vary node densities and
biasing along curved surface edges to gain a more accurate representation of the surface being meshed.
Exercise: Controlling the 2-D Mesh Concentration in Curved Areas
This exercise uses the model file, chordal_dev.hm.
Step 1: Open the model file, chordal_dev.hm.
In this section, create a mesh using only element size, not the chordal deviation meshing parameters.
Step 2: Set the mesh parameters and create the mesh.

From the menu bar, select Mesh, then Create, then select 2D AutoMesh

On the main menu, select the 2D page, then select automesh
2. Set the mesh mode to automatic (it may be currently set to interactive).
3. In min elem size = field, type 15.000.
4. Set mesh type: to quads.
5. Set the toggle to elems to surf comp.
6. Select surfs >> by collector >> use size from the extended entity selection menu.
7. Click select.
8. Click mesh to create the mesh.
9. Click return.
The Maximum Deviation Parameter
In this section, mesh a set of surfaces using the maximum deviation parameter to control the element
densities and biasing.
Step 3: Set the chordal deviation parameters.

2. Access the edge deviation subpanel.
3. Click min elem size = and type 1.000.
Cycle through the parameter settings by pressing the TAB key after typing in a value.
4. Set max elem size = to 15.000.
5. Set max deviation = to 0.500.
6. Set max angle = to 90.000 for the maximum angle parameter to be neglected.

7. Set the mesh type: to quads.
Step 4: Create the mesh.

1. Select surfs >> by collector >> deviation ctrl from the extended entity selection menu.
2. Click select.
View of the completed mesh for this exercise.
The Maximum Angle Parameter

In this section, use the same chordal deviation settings from the previous section, but reduce the maximum
angle parameter to compare the effects.
Step 5: Set the chordal deviation parameters and create the mesh.
1. Set max angle = to 20.000.
2. Select surfs >> by collector >> angle ctrl.
3. Click select.
4. Click mesh to create the mesh on the surfaces.

The Maximum Element Size Parameter

In this section, use the same chordal deviation parameters from the previous section except for the maximum
element size parameter. The maximum element size parameter is increased to allow the algorithm to create
larger and fewer elements along planer and less curved surface edges.
Step 6: Set the chordal deviation parameters and create the mesh.
1. Set max elem size = to 30.000.
2. Select surfs >> by collector >> max size ctrl.
3. Click select.


In this tutorial, you will learn how to create and optimize a 2-D mesh based on user-defined quality criteria.
HyperMesh has a new set of features designed to help you achieve good element quality more efficiently.
These features use settings from the qualityindex panel to generate or modify a mesh. This allows
HyperMesh to give results that account for your preferences for which element quality checks are more or
less important than others. The new quality index (Q.I.) optimization features are found in the Automesh,
Smooth, and Qualityindex panels. These functionalities can be used separately or in unison.
Exercise 1: Creating and Optimizing a 2-D Mesh Based on User-Defined Quality

Criteria
This exercise uses the model file, planar.hm.
Step 1: Open the model file, planar.hm.
Step 2: Working with node and element quality optimization.

Within the Qualityindex panel, there are functions that allow the user to select individual nodes or elements,
and then alter the position or shape of the node/element to optimize the element quality for the surrounding
elements. The element qualities are optimized according to the settings in the qualityindex panel. These
features are very useful for improving element qualities in local areas of the mesh.
1. Access the Qualityindex panel by doing one of the following:
From the menu bar, select Mesh, then Check, then Elements, then Quality Index
On the main menu, select the 2D page, then select qualityindex
On the right-hand side of the panel, note the value for comp. Q.I.=. Currently, it should read 71.09.

Keep this number in mind so that you can judge how much progress you make in improving the element
quality.
2. Experiment with the node optimize function.
The button labeled node optimize should already be highlighted. Selecting a node while this button
is highlighted optimizes the location of the node to improve the quality of the surrounding elements.
Try selecting some of the nodes on the mesh. In particular, select nodes of elements that are
highlighted red, since these have the worst quality. You should see each node move as it is
selected, improving the surrounding mesh quality.
Notice what happens to the value of the comp. Q.I. It should improve as you select more nodes.
3. Experiment with the element optimize function.
Click the button labeled element optimize. Selecting an element while this button is highlighted
optimizes the location of the element’s nodes to improve the quality of the element. It also
considers the quality of the surrounding elements.
Try selecting some of the elements on the mesh. In particular, select elements that are highlighted
red, since these have the worst quality. You should usually see the shape of the element change as
it is selected, improving the surrounding mesh quality.
Notice what happens to the value of the comp. Q.I. It should improve as you select more elements.
Step 3: Resetting the part by remeshing.

At this point, you need to regenerate the original mesh so you can try fixing the element quality using a
different method. The new method is to use the Smooth panel. Regenerating the original mesh allows you
to compare the smooth functionality to the node and element optimization used in the previous section.
From the menu bar, select Mesh, then Create, then 2D AutoMesh
On the main menu, select the 2D page, then Automesh
3. Select the surface in the graphics area.
4. Make sure the panel has the following settings:
The check-box for previous settings is activated.
The meshing mode is set to automatic.
5. Click the mesh button.
The mesh should be regenerated.
6. Click return to exit from the AutoMesh panel.

Step 4: Using QI optimization smoothing.
The Smooth panel also has quality index optimization features. Using this allows you to adjust the element
quality according to the settings in the Qualityindex panel for an entire group of selected elements.
1. Access the Smooth panel in one of the following ways:
From the menu bar, select Mesh, then Cleanup Elements, then Smooth
On the main menu, select 2D page, then select smooth
2. Go to the plates subpanel.
3. Select elems >> displayed.
4. Switch the algorithm to QI optimization. (By default, the button should be set to autodecide.)
5. There are several optional controls you should understand, but are not needed for this tutorial:
Controls Function
target quality index The value you would like the quality index to be after the smoothing
operation. This value is not guaranteed from smoothing. The smooth
operation will attempt to hit this target.
time limit The check box for can be activated or not. If working with a large models,
activate this box to ensure the smoothing routine does not take more time
than you want to allow.
feature angle The Smooth panel evaluates the angle between the normals of two adjacent
elements. If this angle is equal to or greater than the value specified in this
field, it will not allow the nodes shared by the elements to move.
use current criteria Allows you to select and use a criteria file for your Q.I. settings. If a criteria
file is specified, leave this option blank.
recursive optimization The other toggle option is single optimization step. Using the recursive
procedure optimization procedure allows the automesher to take more than one
pass in generating the best quality mesh it can. However, this can take
longer than single optimization step, so you might want to use single
optimization step for larger models.
6. Click smooth.
Before HyperMesh has run the routine, you should see a message asking to recompute using a new QI
mesh size value.
7. Click continue.
Note that the status bar displays a message that the “approximate quality index=0.10.” Compare this
value to 71.09, which is the quality index value you had after creating the original mesh. In this case you
should see that it is significantly lower, which indicates that the element quality is much better.

8. Click return.
Step 5: Using the QI settings in the Automesh panel.

The AutoMesh panel is capable of using quality index settings to automatically decide what pattern of mesh
it should generate.
1. Access the AutoMesh panel.
2. Go to the QI Optimize subpanel.
3. Select the surface in the graphics area.
4. Make sure the panel has the following settings:
The elem size= field has a value of 18.
The mesh type: is set to quads.
Like the Smooth panel, the QI optimize meshing mode of the AutoMesh panel has some controls of
which you should be aware. They are, however, not needed in this tutorial.
Controls Function
use current criteria in QI Allows you to select and use a criteria file for your Q.I. settings. If a
panel criteria file is specified, leave this option blank.
Smooth across common Determines whether nodes generated on a surface edge can be
edges moved off the surface edge when the algorithm smoothes the mesh.
feature angle The Smooth panel evaluates the angle between the normals of two
adjacent elements. If this angle is equal to or greater than the value
specified in this field, it will not allow the nodes shared by the
elements to move.
Break connectivity Allows Mesher to mesh without affecting surrounding mesh.
5. Click mesh.
The mesh should be regenerated.
6. Click return.
7. Use the Qualityindex panel to check the quality index of the mesh to compare it to the previous mesh:
Go to the Qualityindex panel.
Look at the value for the comp. Q.I.= field. It should be 0.10, which is much lower that the 71.09
value of the mesh you originally generated.

Define a configuration for the batch mesh
Edit the criteria and parameter files
Setup a simple user procedure for a post-batch mesh run
Batch Mesher is a tool that can perform geometry cleanup and automeshing (in batch mode) for given CAD
files. Batch Mesher performs a variety of geometry cleanup operations to improve the quality of the mesh
created for the selected element size and type. Cleanup operations include: equivalencing of "red" free
edges, fixing small surfaces (relative to the element size), and detecting features.
Batch Mesher also performs specified surface editing/defeaturing operations such as: removal of pinholes
(less than specified size), removal of edge fillets, and addition of a layer of washer elements around holes.
All user-defined criteria determine the quality index (QI) of a model. The QI value is used to assess the
potential of each geometry cleanup and meshing tool, and apply them accordingly. QI optimized meshing
and node placement optimization are performed to obtain the best quality meshing. Final results are stored
in a HyperMesh database file.
Tools
To start Batch Mesher on Windows:
On the Start menu, point to Programs, point to Altair HyperWorks 11.0, and click Batch Mesher.
Or
Type hw_batchmesh with the full path (~altairhome\hm\batchmesh\hw_batchmesh).
To start Batch Mesher on UNIX:
Type the hw_batchmesh command to invoke the user interface or hw_batchmesh -nogui… to
perform the batch mesh without a user interface.

Exercise
Step 1: Open Batch Mesher.

1. Click Start, point to Programs, point to Altair HyperWorks 11.0, and click Batch Mesher.
2. In the Input Model Directory field, click folder ( ) to browse to the appropriate directory.
(In this exercise, you will use files located in the <installation_directory>\tutorials\hm
directory.)
3. In the Output Directory, click folder ( ) to browse to the appropriate directory if different from the input
model directory. If desired, you may request the .hm files be returned to the input model directory.
4. Click select files, .
5. For Type of Geometry, select the appropriate CAD data type. For this exercise, you will use geometry
already loaded into HyperMesh, so pick HyperMesh.
A filter will help select applicable models for batch meshing to HyperMesh.
6. Locate and select the following model files, (use the CTRL key to select multiple files): part1.hm,
part2.hm and bm_housing.hm.
7. Click Select.
Step 2: Define a configuration for the batch mesh run.

1. Click the Configurations tab. (Note there are several common configurations already available)
2. Click Add Entry, .
3. In the Mesh Type field, type a name for the mesh type.
4. Select the Criteria File field, and click Find Criteria Param File, .
5. Select the file bm_housing.criteria. (If necessary, browse to and locate the file in the
<installation_directory>\tutorials\hm directory.)
6. Select the Parameter File field, and click Find Criteria Param File, .
7. Select the file bm_housing.param. (If necessary, browse to and locate the file in the
A new mesh type is now available for selection on the Run Setup tab.
Step 3: On the User Procedures tab, set up a simple script to perform a tetramesh
on the housing.
1. Click Add Entry,
2. Select the TCL File field, and click Find TCL File, .
3. Select the file bm_housing.tcl. (If necessary, browse to and locate the file in the

4. In the TCL Procedure field, select the procedure tet_all.
5. In the Name field, give the procedure a name (for example, tetmesh).
A new post-batch meshing script is now available for selection on the Run Setup tab.
Step 4: On the Run Setup tab, begin defining a configuration for the batch mesh
run.
1. In the Mesh Type field, select a predefined mesh type for each of the parts as follows:
bm_housing.hm: use the mesh type you defined in Step 2.
part1.hm: use 8mm auto.
part2.hm: use 8mm auto.
2. From the Post-Mesh drop-down list for bm_housing.hm, select the procedure created in Step 3 (
tetmesh).
This will run the tetramesher on all available shell elements after batch meshing.

3. Click Submit to initiate the run.
or
Click Submit At to submit the job at a specified time.
The application automatically switches to the Run Status tab. As the parts run, the status changes
from Working to Pending to Done.
4. Once the part is at the Working state, select the part and select Details.
A detailed summary appears with the status of the model through its Batch Mesher steps, the overall
failed elements, and quality index.
5. Once the part is at the Done state, click Load Mesh to load the mesh into HyperMesh for model
interrogation.
6. Once all parts have been meshed, select Run Details to obtain an overall run status.
Any file can be paused or canceled. If the file is paused, it can be resumed immediately or at a specific
time.
Once the Batch Mesher session has been setup with file directories and mesh types, it can be saved as
a config file that can be loaded at a future time.
It is also possible to load an entire set of models that has already been batch meshed in order to take
advantage of the Load Mesh option in the Run Status tab.
If you choose to make modifications to your criteria or parameter files, the run can be submitted again.
The new files will be placed in a separate sub-directory.

Step 5 (Optional): Edit the criteria and parameter files.
1. Go to the Configurations tab.
2. Click an entity in the Mesh Type column.
3. Click Edit File.
The Criteria and Parameter Editor window appears.

On the Criteria tab, you can set the target element size, element criteria, and the method that is used to
calculate the values. An advanced criteria option can be enabled to give more control over the
intermediate QI values, but is usually not necessary in order to obtain a good quality mesh.
A timestep calculator is also available for explicit solver models. If this option is selected, the overall
minimum element size will be set by this option and will gray out at the top of the element checks.
The Parameters tab sets all of the meshing control over various geometric features.


In this tutorial you will learn how to:
Mesh a component using the loose shell shrink wrap.
Mesh a component using the tight shell shrink wrap.
Mesh a component using the tight solid shrink wrap.

The Shrink Wrap tool can be used to generate an enclosed volume or solid mesh, and is typically used to
approximate and simplify an existing model.
Exercise: Meshing a Model Using Shrink Wrap
You can shrink wrap elements, components, surfaces, or solids.
The shrink wrap allows for wrapping of multiple components if they are selected.
The selection provides the option to wrap all elements, components, surfaces or solids, or only a
certain portion of the model if desired. The input to the shrink wrap (that is, the model parts that you
wish to wrap) can consist of 2-D or 3-D elements along with surfaces or solids.
The shrink wrap is able to stitch over very bad geometry to generate an enclosed volume mesh for tetra-
meshing. The shrink wrap tool can work from elements (whether 2-D or 3-D) or geometry. Thus, in the case
of an "unclean" geometry model with many released (free) edges, you can either generate any arbitrary mesh
on the unclean geometry using the automesh functionality beforehand and then create shrink wrap or you
can simply select the surface or solid without meshing the geometry first; either of these steps will yield
good output mesh. (The key in such cases is to ensure that the element size used for the shrink wrap is
large enough to stitch over the unclean surface edge splits so that an enclosed volume can be created.)
The element size affects the ability of the shrink wrap to follow the geometry of the model. The larger the
element size, the more simplified the model will appear. With a smaller element size the shrink wrap will
more closely follow the model. The jacobian value for the solid mesh follows the same type of pattern. As
the jacobian value gets smaller the shrink wrap more closely follows the profile of the model. Note that the
smaller the jacobian value, the longer it takes to generate the mesh.
Shrink wrap mesh can be generated as a surface mesh, or as a full-volume hex mesh, by use of the Shrink
Wrap panel. The distinction between surface or volume mesh is an option labeled generate solid mesh.
This tutorial uses the model called shrinkwrap.hm in the

<installation_directory>\tutorials\hm folder.
Step 1: Open the model shrinkwrap.hm.

Step 2: Create a loose shell shrink wrap mesh in the loose_gap component.
1. Click Shaded Geometry and Surface Edges if the model is not shaded already.
2. Review the surface geometry on the screen. Notice the gap in the geometry.
3. Click the Mesh menu, then Create, then Shrink Wrap Mesh.
4. Make sure the loose subpanel is active.
5. Select the component in the graphics area.
6. For element size, enter 4.
7. Click mesh to create the shrink wrap.
8. Expand the Component folder in the Model browser.
9. Hide the surfaces component in the Model browser.

Step 3: Review the solid geometry.
1. Show the block component in the Model browser.
2. Review the model to see the features.
3. Hide the block component in the Model browser.
Step 4: Create a loose shell shrink wrap mesh in the loose component.
1. Hide the loose_gap component in the Model browser.
2. Right-click the loose component and click Make Current.
3. From the Mesh menu, click Create, then Shrink Wrap Mesh.
4. Activate the loose subpanel if not already done.
5. Click comps and select block from the component list.
6. For the element size, enter 10.

8. Click reject to reject the mesh.
9. Change the element size to 5.

11. Change the element size to 3.

The shrink w rap mesh w ith the geometry hidden
Step 5: Create a tight shell shrink wrap in the tight_shell component.

1. Hide the loose component using the Model browser.
2. Right-click tight_shell and click Make Current.
3. Activate the tight subpanel in the Shrink Wrap panel.
4. Click comps and select the block component.
5. Make sure the element size is set to 3.
Note how the tight mesh conforms much more closely to the model's geometry than the loose mesh did,
even at the same element size.

Step 6: Create a tight solid shrink wrap in the tight_solid component
1. Hide the tight_shell component in the Model browser.
2. Right-click the tight_solid component in the Model browser and click Make Current.
3. Activate the generate solid mesh option.
4. Click comps and select the block component.
5. Change the minimum jacobian to 1.
Note that the resulting mesh is very blocky, due to the high Jacobian value.

8. Change the minimum jacobian to 0.7.
9. Click mesh to create the shrinkwrap.
This time, the mesh is smoother than it was when Jacobian was set at 1.0.

10. Click to open the Mask panel.
11. If not already set, set the panel collector to elems.
12. Use SHIFT + left mouse button to select a group of elements.
Rotate the model to verify that the mesh generation was a solid mesh, with 3D elements throughout the
model.

The 3D mesh fills the model's volume, rather than only covering its outer surfaces.
Step 7 (Optional): Change the minimum jacobian to 0.3 for optimized mesh.
1. Delete the elements on the displayed portion of the model in the graphics area.
2. Click comps and select the block component form the list.
3. For the minimum jacobian, enter 0.3.
4. Click mesh to generate the mesh. Note the difference in smoothness of the mesh compared to the
mesh that was created with higher Jacobian values.


3-D Elements

In this tutorial, you will learn about:
Volume tetra mesher
Standard tetra mesher
Checking tetra element quality
Remeshing tetra elements
HyperMesh provides two methods of generating a tetrahedral element mesh. The volume tetra mesher works
directly with surface or solid geometry to automatically generate a tetrahedral mesh without further
interaction from the user. Even with complex geometry, this method can often generate a high quality tetra
mesh quickly and easily.
The standard tetra mesher requires a surface mesh of tria or quad elements as input, then provides you with
a number of options to control the resulting tetrahedral mesh. This offers a great deal of control over the
tetrahedral mesh, and provides the means to generate a tetrahedral mesh for even the most complex models.
The Tetramesh panel allows you to fill an enclosed volume with first or second order tetrahedral elements.
A region is considered enclosed if it is entirely bounded by a shell mesh (tria or quad elements) where each
element has material on one side and open space on the other.
Exercise

The model for this exercise is housing.hm. Take a few moments to observe the model using the different
visual options available in HyperMesh (rotation, zooming, etc.).
Only the geometry in the component cover is currently displayed. The file contains two parts defined by a
volume of surfaces. The geometry has been cleaned such that surface connectivity is proper and surface
edges that would cause sliver elements are suppressed.
Step 2: Use the volume tetra mesher and equilateral triangles to create a tetra
mesh for the cover.
1. Access the Tetramesh panel from the menu bar by selecting Mesh > Create > Tetra Mesh
2. Go to the Volume tetra subpanel.
3. Set the entity selector to surfs and select one of the surfaces in the model.
The connected surfaces are selected automatically.
4. Verify that 2D type: is set to trias and 3D type: is set to tetras.
These control the type of element that will be created for the surface mesh and solid mesh of the part.
5. Select Elems to Current Comp to place the newly created elements in the current component collector.

6. Verify that the Use curvature and Use proximity options are not active.
7. For element size= specify 10.
8. Click mesh to create the tetra mesh.
9. From the toolbar, click Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines ( ).
10. Take a moment to inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created.
Tetra mesh from the volum e tetra subpanel and equilateral triangles (2D: trias)
The mesh is deleted.
Step 3: Use the volume tetra mesher and right triangles to create a tetra mesh for
the cover.
You should still be in the Tetramesh / Volume tetra subpanel.
1. Select one of the surfaces in the model.
2. Switch 2D type: to R-trias.
4. Inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created.
5. Compare it to the first mesh you created and note the differences. The 2D type: R-trias setting tends to
create tetra elements with triangular faces that are right triangles (90-45-45 angles) while the 2D type:
trias setting tends to create equilateral triangles (60-60-60 angles).

Tetra mesh from the volum e tetra subpanel and right triangles (2D type: R-trias)
Step 4: Use the volume tetra mesher to create a tetra mesh with more elements
along curved surfaces.
You should still be in the Volume tetra subpanel.
2. Activate the option, use curvature.
Additional parameters appear. The option, Use curvature, causes more elements to be created along
areas of high surface curvature. Thus, curved areas such as fillets will have more and smaller elements,
which capture those features with higher resolution.
3. For Min element size = specify 1.0.
4. Verify that Feature angle = is set to 30.
6. Shade the tetrahedral elements.
7. Inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created.
8. Compare it to the previous meshes you created and note the differences. More elements are created
around the fillets.

Tetra mesh from the volum e tetra sub-panel and the option use curvature active
Step 5: Use the volume tetra mesher to create a tetra mesh with more elements
around small features.
You should still be in the Volume tetra subpanel.
2. Activate the Use proximity option.
The Use proximity option causes the mesh to be refined in areas where surfaces are smaller. The result
is a nice transition from small elements on small surfaces to larger elements on larger, adjacent
surfaces.
4. Shade the elements.
5. Inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created. Compare it to the previous meshes you
created and note the differences. More elements were created around surfaces with small angles as
indicated in the following image.

Tetra mesh from the volum e tetra subpanel w ith options Use curvature and Use proximity
Step 6: Prepare the display to tetra mesh the hub component using the standard
tetra mesher.
1. Use the HyperMesh Model Browser to turn off the display of geometry for all components.
2. Turn on the display of the geometry for the hub component.
3. Use the HyperMesh Model Browser to turn off the display of elements for all components.
4. Turn on the display for the hub and tetras components for elements.
There are tria shell elements in the hub component. Currently, there are no elements in the tetras
component.
Step 7 (Optional): Review the connectivity and quality of the tria mesh to validate
its integrity for the standard tetra mesher.
Use the Edges and Check Elems panels to make sure that there are no free edges or very small angles in
the tria shell mesh.
1. Access the Edges panel from the menu bar by selecting Mesh > Check > Components > Edges.
2. With the comps selector active, pick any tria element on the hub component.
3. Click find edges.
A message in the status bar should state, "No edges found. Selected elements may enclose a volume."
This is desired as the tetra mesher requires a closed volume of shell elements.

5. Access the Check Elements panel from the menu bar by selecting Mesh > Check > Elements >
Check Elements.
6. Verify that you are in the 2-d subpanel.
7. Identify elements having an aspect ratio greater than 5.
Aspect ratio is the ratio of the longest edge of an element to its shortest edge. This check helps you to
identify sliver elements.
All of the hub’s shell elements pass the check; all of the elements have an aspect ratio less than 5.
8. Identify tria elements having an angle less than 20. (trias: min angle)
This check also helps you to identify sliver elements.
All the hub’s shell elements pass the check; all the elements have angles greater than 20.
The surface mesh is suitable for creating a tetra mesh.
Step 8: Create a tetra mesh for the hub using the standard tetra mesher.
1. Use the HyperMesh Model Browser to set the current component to tetras.
2. Access the Tetramesh panel from the menu bar by selecting Mesh > Create > Tetra Mesh.
3. Enter the Tetra mesh subpanel.
4. With the comps selector active under Float trias/quads to tetra mesh, select one of the hub shell
elements from the graphics area.
Using this option, HyperMesh will swap the diagonal for any pair of surface trias that will result in a better
tetra mesh quality. If you would rather keep the diagonal, see sub-step 5
5. (Optional) To keep the diagonal as is, select the comps selector under Fixed trias/quads to tetra
mesh.
6. Click mesh to generate the tetrahedral elements.

Cut-aw ay view of tetrahedral elements
Step 9: Check the quality of the hub’s tetra elements.

1. Use the HyperMesh Model Browser to display only the elements in the tetras component.
2. Access the Check Elements panel.
4. Identify the smallest element length among the displayed elements.
If the minimum length is acceptable for a target element size of 5.0, then no further action is necessary.
5. Identify the smallest angle (tria faces: min angle) among the displayed elements.
If the minimum tria face angle is no less than 10°, then the mesh quality should be acceptable.
6. Identify elements having a tet collapse smaller than 0.2.
The tet collapse criteria is a normalized volume check for tetrahedral elements. A value of 1 indicates a
perfectly formed element with maximum possible volume. A value of 0 indicates a completely collapsed
element with no volume.
The message bar indicates that one element has a tetra collapse smaller than 0.2.
Step 10: Isolate the element with the tetra collapse smaller than 0.2 and find the
elements surrounding it.

You should still be in the Check Elements panel.
1. With 0.2 still specified for tet collapse, click tet collapse again.
2. Click save failed.
The element that failed the tetra collapse check is saved in the user mark, and can be retrieved in any
panel using the extended selection menu.
4. Access the Mask panel from the Display toolbar by selecting Mask ( ).
You can also press F5 on your keyboard to enter the Mask panel.
5. Set the entity selector to elems and select elems >> retrieve.
The element that was saved in the Check Elements panel is retrieved.
6. Select elems >> reverse.
Only the one tetra element that failed the tetra collapse check should be displayed.
9. On the Display toolbar, click Unmask Adjacent ( ).
The layer of elements that is attached to the one displayed element is identified and displayed.
10. Click Unmask Adjacent two more times.
The layer of elements that is attached to the displayed elements is identified and displayed. The
functionality of unmask adjacent can be duplicated using the Find panel, find attached subpanel on
the Tool page.
Step 11: Remesh the hub’s displayed tetra elements to improve their tetra
collapse.
1. Access the Tetramesh panel.
2. Go to the Tetra remesh subpanel.
3. For 3D elements, select elems >> displayed.
4. Click remesh to regenerate this area of the mesh.
Note that the re-meshing operation works on only one group of elements (one volume) at a time.
6. Access the Check Elements panel.
7. Click tet collapse to find out if the tetra collapse has improved for the displayed elements.

The message in the status bar should indicate that the minimum tetra collapse is larger than the value
reported before the tetra elements were remeshed.

Now that the tetra mesh is complete, it is a good time to save the model.
Summary
A tetra mesh has been created for both parts in the file. Different procedures for tetra meshing were used.
Either method can be used to mesh parts, depending on the needs of the analysis. Also, the tetra remesh
function was used to show how to quickly fix the quality of tetra elements.

Create solids using different functions
Check and fix improper model connectivity
For some analyses, it is desirable to use a mesh of hexahedral and pentahedral elements. This is especially
true for parts which have a large thickness compared to the element size being used, or for parts that have
many features and/or changes in thickness. Castings or forgings are good examples.
Exercise: Creating a Hex-Penta Mesh using Surfaces
This exercise uses the model file, arm_bracket.hm. This exercise introduces you to a number of
HyperMesh functions that are used to create hexa-penta meshes. The model is organized into four IGES
layers, consisting of 1) the base, 2) the first section of the arm, with a constant cross section and curvature,
3) the second section of the arm, with a tapered cross section, and 4) the boss.
Step 1: Retrieve and review model file.

Open the arm_bracket.hm file.
Step 2: Mesh the top surface of the base, including the L-shaped surface.
1. Set the active component collector to base using the HyperMesh Model Browser. In the Model
Browser right-click base and select Make Current.
2. While in the HyperMesh Model Browser, hide all components except the base component.
3. Access the Automesh panel from the menu bar by selecting Mesh > Create > 2D Automesh.

4. Select the surfaces on the top of the base, including the L-shaped surface at the intersection of the base
and the arm.
For this part of the exercise it might be easier to view the geometry in a shaded mode by clicking
Shaded Geometry and Surface Edges ( ).
5. Select the size and bias subpanel.
6. Set the meshing mode to automatic.
7. For element size = specify 10.
8. For element type specify quads only.
Resulting quad mesh on base surfaces

You can now change back to an unshaded view for the geometry.
Step 3: Create layers of hex elements for the base.

1. Go to the Elem Offset panel by selecting Mesh > Create > 3D Elements > Element Offset from the
menu bar.
2. Select the solid layers subpanel.
3. With the elems selector active under elems to offset, select the elements on the base.
4. For number of layers = specify 5.
5. For total thickness = specify 25.
6. Click offset+.
The hexa mesh is created.

Hex mesh on base
Step 4: Prepare the display for meshing the arm’s curved segment.
1. Turn on the display of the arm_curve component using the HyperMesh Model Browser.
2. Press the F5 key to go to the Mask panel.
3. Select elements >> by config, and select the hex8 configuration.
All of the elements with a configuration of hex8 in the model are selected.
Step 5: Create a node at the center of the arm radius.

The first segment of the arm can be meshed using the Spin panel. This requires a node to be selected as
the center point of rotation. The node you create in this step will be used as that center point. To create the
center node, you will use the distance / 3 nodes subpanel.
1. Press the F4 key to enter the Distance panel.
3. With the N1 selector active, create the temporary nodes on one of the curved lines of the arm as
described below:
Press and hold the left mouse button.
Move the cursor over a curved line.
Once over the line, the cursor will change to a square with a dot in the center, , and the line will

be highlighted. Release your mouse button.
4. Click three locations along the selected line. The active selector advances from N1 to N2 to N3, and the
locations will be selected as though there was a node there.
5. Click circle center to create the node at the center.
This node will be used in the next step when you mesh the arm.
Three nodes to create a center node
Step 6: Create hexa elements in the curved portion of the arm using spin.
1. Set arm_curve as the current component using the HyperMesh Model Browser.
2. Go to the Spin panel by selecting Mesh > Create > 3D Elements > Spin from the menu bar.
3. Select the spin elems subpanel.
4. Using elems >> by window, select the plate elements within the L-shaped cross section of the arm.

Elements to select for spin function
6. For angle = specify 90 degrees.
7. For the direction, select the x-axis (Y-Z plane).
8. For the base node (B), click the center node created in step 5.
9. For on spin = specify 24.
24 layers of hex elements will be created when the plate elements are spun.
10. Click spin -.

spin panel results
Step 7: Create faces on the hex elements.

1. Go to the Faces panel by selecting Mesh > Check > Compenents > Faces from the menu bar.
2. With the entity selector set to comps, select the arm_curve component.
3. Click find faces.
2-D shell elements are created on the free faces of every 3-D solid element in the component. They are
placed in a new component named ^faces.
The ^faces component is created with its visualization set to wireframe, so you will not be able to see
the new elements right away if the arm_curve component is displayed and in shaded mode.
4. On the toolbar click Shaded Elements & Mesh Lines ( ) to shade the elements.
You will now see the elements in the ^faces component.
Step 8: Prepare the display for meshing the second arm segment.
1. Use the Model Browser to turn on the display for the arm_straight and ^faces components.
Step 9: Mesh the L-shaped set of surfaces between the arm_straight and boss
components.
1. Set the current component collector to arm_straight.
2. Go to the Automesh panel.
3. Select the three surfaces lying on the intersection between the arm_straight and boss components.

These surfaces are in the arm_straight component.
4. Set the meshing mode to interactive.
5. Click mesh to go to the meshing module.
6. From the Density subpanel, adjust the densities to obtain a mesh that matches the following image.
This mesh pattern matches the mesh pattern at the intersection of the two arm segments. This is
necessary for the next step.
Densities to correspond to the mesh on the end face
7. Click mesh to update the mesh density.
8. Click return to create the elements and go back to the Automesh panel.
Step 10: Use linear solid to build the mesh between the two sets of shell elements.
1. Access the Linear Solid panel through the menu bar by selecting Mesh > Create > 3D Elements >
Linear 3D.
2. With the from: elems selector active, select the ^faces elements lying on the intersection between the
first and second arm segments.
You can select one of the elements and then select elems >> by face to select the rest of the
necessary elements.
3. Click the to: elems selector to make it active. Then select the shell elements between the arm and

boss, which you created using the Automesh panel in the last step.
4. Click the from: alignment: N1 selector to make it active. Then select three nodes on one of the "from
elements" you selected in sub-step 10.2.
5. Click the to: alignment: N1 selector to make it active. Then select three nodes on the "to element"
corresponding to the "from element" with the three "from nodes" you selected in sub-step 10.4. Refer to
the following image.
Example selection for alignment nodes
6. For density = specify 12.
7. Click solids to create the mesh.

Linear solid mesh
8. Click return to the main menu.
Step 11: Prepare the display for meshing the boss.

1. Use the HyperMesh Model Browser to show the boss component.
Step 12: Create a shell mesh on the bottom of the boss.

1. Set the current component collector to boss.
3. Select the five surfaces on the bottom face of the boss.
4. Click mesh to go to the meshing module.
5. Adjust the densities to match the following image:

Mesh densities on the bottom of the boss
6. Click mesh to update the mesh density.
7. Click return twice to return to the main menu.
Step 13: Project a node to the bottom face of the boss.

1. Go to the Project panel by selecting Mesh > Project > Nodes from the menu bar.
2. Select the to line subpanel.
3. Select the node on the rightmost top vertex, as per the following image.
4. Click nodes >> duplicate.
5. For the to line select the line on the boss’ top face. Refer to the following image.

Projecting a node to a line
6. Select along vector: x- axis.
7. Click project to project the node to the line.
Step 14: Generate hexas for the boss using the Solid Map panel.
1. Go to the Solid Map panel by selecting Mesh > Create > Solid Map Mesh from the menu bar.
2. Go to the general subpanel.
3. Select source geom: (none).
4. Select dest geom: surf and select the top surface of the boss.
5. Select along geom: mixed.
6. Under along geom: mixed, click lines to make it the active selector.
7. Select the line indicated in the following image.
8. Click node path to make it the active selector.
9. Select nodes to define the exact location of the solid element layers, as indicated in the following image.
A total of 13 nodes should be selected, starting at the boss mesh, and then using all of the nodes along
the edge of the arm_straight component, ending with the node projected to the top of the boss.

Along nodes for solid map
10. For elems to drag:, select elems >> by collector and select the boss component.
11. Click mesh.
The elements are created and the mesh on this part is completed.

Completed mesh of the arm bracket
Step 15 (optional): Check the connectivity of the model.

1. Go to the Faces panel.
2. Click comps to go to a list of components.
3. Select every component from the list, or select comps >> all.
4. Click Select complete the selection and go back to the Faces panel.
5. Click find faces.
6. Turn off the geometry display of all components via the Model Browser.
7. Turn off the element display of all components except ^faces.
8. Click return to exit the the panel.
9. On the Post page go to the Hidden Line panel.
10. Activate the xz plane and trim plane options.
11. Click show plot.
The faces are now displayed with a plane cutting the model in half. This is so that the interior of the
model can be viewed.

12. Click near the cutting plane. Holding the left mouse button down, move the mouse back and forth.
The cutting plane moves through the model, allowing you to see if any face elements exist on the interior
of the model.
You should see that there are face elements interior to the model, between the boss and arm. You need
to perform some corrections on the connectivity.
Hidden line view of faces
Step 16 (Optional): Correct the connectivity of the model.

1. Display elements for all components except for the ^faces component.
2. Display the elements of the solidmap component as transparent.
3. Go to the Faces panel.
5. Click preview equiv.
Coincident nodes on the intersection between the arm and the boss are highlighted.
6. Specify a slightly larger value for tolerance =, and click preview equiv to identify more coincident nodes
on the intersection.
7. Repeat sub-step 16.6 until all 60 coincident nodes have been found.

8. Click equivalence.
The nodes are replaced to the location of the lowest node ID.
9. Switch all the components to the shaded visual mode.
Step 17 (Optional): Recheck the connectivity of the model.

Repeat Step 15 to make sure the model is now equivalenced. If you find errors, repeat Step 16.

The 3-D solid mesh has now been completed. Save the model if desired.

In this tutorial, you will learn:
What solid geometry is
What topology is
What 3-D topology looks like
Solids are geometric entities that define a three-dimensional volume. The use of solid geometry is helpful
when dividing a part into multiple volumes. For example, divide a part into simple, mappable regions to hex
mesh the part.
Exercise: Hex-meshing Solid Geometry
This exercise uses the model file, solid_map.hm.
Step 1: Retrieve model file, solid_map.hm.
Step 2: Mesh the 1/8th sphere-shaped region.

1. On the toolbar, click Shaded Geometry and Surface Edges ( ).
2. Enter the Solid Map through the menu bar by selecting Mesh > Create > Solid Map Mesh.
3. Go to the one volume subpanel.

4. Under along parameters:, set elem size= to 1.
5. With the solid entity selector under volume to mesh active, select the small cube-shaped solid, as
shown in the following image.
6. Click mesh.
7. On the toolbar, click Shaded Elements with Mesh Lines ( ).
8. Select the solid indicated in the following image.

9. Click mesh.
Step 3: Create a shell mesh with the automesh panel to control a mesh pattern.
1. Enter the Automesh panel through the menu bar by selecting Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh.
2. Select the surface indicated in the following image.
3. Verify that the meshing method is set to size and bias and interactive.
4. Set the element size = to 1.000.
5. Verify that mesh type: is set to mixed.
6. Click mesh.
7. In the elem density = field, enter 4.
8. Click set all to.
All the densities are set to 4.
9. Click mesh.
Step 4: Mesh the solid volume on which the surface mesh was created in Step 3.
1. Enter the Solid Map panel by clicking Mesh > Create > Solid Map Mesh.
2. Go to the one volume subpanel.

3. Select the volume shown in the following image.
4. Under along parameters:, toggle elem size= to density= and then enter 10.
5. Click mesh.
6. Rotate the part and note how the mesh pattern created with the automesh panel has been used for the
solid elements.
Step 5: Mesh the remaining solid volumes.

You should still be in the solid map panel.

1. Select one of the remaining unmeshed solid volumes.
Make sure to select a solid adjacent to one that has already been meshed so that connectivity is
maintained.
2. For source shells: select mixed.
3. Under along parameters:, toggle density= to elem size= and enter 1.5.
4. Click mesh.
5. Repeat until all solid volumes are meshed.

With this section of the exercise completed, you can save the model if desired.
Automated Solid Map Meshing
The capability to automate the solid map meshing process is now available. Using the “Mappable”
visualization mode in conjunction with the multi-solids feature will inform you that the solid(s) are ready for
solid meshing. Using the multi-solids feature will allow for all solids within the model to be meshed in one
step provided that they are mappable.
In this section of the tutorial we will delete all the elements from the previous section. Use the Mappable
visualization mode and solid mesh the part using multi-solids.
Step 7: Delete the elements within the model.

1. Press F2 to access the Delete panel.
2. Select all the elements.
Step 8: Use the mappable visualization mode.

1. On the toolbar, click Shaded Geometry and Surfaces ( ).
2. From the Geometry Visualization pull-down, select Mappable ( ).
You will notice that each solid is color coded, the color of the solid represents its mappable state. The
goal is to ensure that each solid is either 1-directional or 3-directional mappable.
The color of the mappable state can be found (and adjusted if necessary) within the Preferences > Color
GUI within the Geometry tab.

By mappable display control (solids)
ignored map Default visualization for solids that require partitioning to become
mappable.
not mappable Visualization for solids that have been edited, but still require further
partitioning to create mappable solids.
1 dir. map Visualization for solids that can be mapped (for 3-D meshing) in one
direction.
3 dir. map Visualization for solids that can be mapped (for 3-D meshing) in three
directions.

Once in the mappable visualization mode it is clear that there is one 3-directional mappable solid and the
rest are 1-directional mappable.
Step 9: Use the multi-solid feature to mesh the part.

1. From the menu bar, click Mesh > Create > Solid Map Mesh to open the Solid Map panel.
2. Select the multi solids subpanel.
3. Select all the all solids.
4. For source shells, select mixed and set elem size: to 1.
5. Click Mesh.
This will bring you to an interactive mesh mode.
6. Select mesh again to accept the shell elements and create the solid elements.
The solids will be sequentially solid meshed. Once complete inspect the model and note that the mesh
within all of the solids is correctly equivalenced.

7. Select return to accept the solid element mesh and return to the Solid Map panel.

With this exercise completed, you can save the model if desired.

In this tutorial, you will learn about using the TetraMesh Process Manager to:
Import geometry or a HyperMesh File
Clean up the geometry
Organize the model (holes and features)
Establish mesh size and pattern for the organized geometry
Create a 2-D Mesh
Clean up the 2-D mesh
Create a 3-D TetraMesh
The Process Manager is a step-by-step tool providing a checklist of procedures to allow the user to quickly
organize and tetramesh a geometric model. Each step is provided in a hierarchal list providing the order in
which the process needs to be performed and providing specialized tools at each step to simplify the
process. These steps, while they can be done manually, can be performed in the TetraMesh Process
Manager template in a much reduced timeframe.
Exercise
Step 1: Initiate the Process Manager.

1. From the menu bar, select Mesh > Create > TetraMesh Process > Create New to access the Process
Manager.
2. Enter a session name or leave it as my_session.
Note: Creating a session name and saving the session allows the user to stop the process before
completion and then load it again at a later time, picking up the process at the point it was left off.
3. Select a working folder.
4. Click Create.
Step 2: Import geometry.

At this point the TetraMesh Process tab will open in the Tab area and will automatically assemble the
TetraMesh Process Flow. The first step, Geometry Import, is highlighted and the panel area has been
configured with specific panels for aiding the Tetramesh Process Manager template. You can access the
HyperMesh panels by undocking the Process Manager panels using the icon in the upper right corner of
the panel area. This will separate the Process Manager panels so that you can also access the HyperMesh
standard panels. To re-dock the Process Manager panel, simply click on in the upper right corner of the
Process Manager panel.

1. In the panel area, change the Import Type to HM Model.
2. On the toolbar, click Open .hm File ( ) and select the file tetmesh_pm.hm from
<installation_directory>\tutorials\hm\.
3. Click Import.
The model will import and a green check will appear next to Geometry Import in the Process Manager
indicating that step is now complete.
Step 3: Clean up the geometry.
1. From the Geometry Color Mode selector ( ) pick By Topo, then click Shaded Geometry and
surface edges ( ).
2. In the panel area, select the Edge Tools tab.
3. Click Isolate.
This will isolate the surfaces with free edges on them.
Isolated Surfaces w ith free edges.
4. Select the Free Edges tab and click Equivalence.
This will fix all the free edges. If this did not correct all of the free edges, the Tolerance value could be
increased until all free edges are equivalenced.
5. Select the Edge Tools tab and click Isolate again.
A window should appear with the message, “No edges found…” This confirms all edges have been fixed.
6. Click Display All.
7. Click ACCEPT.
The Geometry Cleanup step has been completed and should have a green checkmark by it.

Step 4: Organize and Clean up holes.
This step will allow you to organize the surfaces that form holes in the model. The TetraMesh Process
Manager can automatically sort and organize holes into separate component collectors based upon their
diameter. This will allow you to specify mesh type, circumference element count, and longitudinal element
size for different hole groups.
1. In the panel area, click the "+" button.
This will add a third line to the table.
2. On the first line, enter 3.3 into the D< field.
This will organize all holes with a diameter between 0 and 3.3 units, as indicated by the Range field, into
a collector.
3. Enter 5 into the second row and 10 into the third.
This will allow HyperMesh to organize the holes into three collectors that will include holes ranging from
0 - 3.3 units, 3.3 - 5 units and 5 - 10 units collectively.
4. Click Auto Organize.
All of the holes in the model less than 10 units will now be organized into three component collectors,
each with a different color.
5. Click the HyperMesh Model Browser tab and expand the folder for Components.
You will see three new component collectors with the name solidholes followed by the numerical
average of the diameter range of the holes organized.

Transparent view of model show ing all holes and bores organized
6. Return to the TetraMesh Process Manager tab.
7. In the Num Circumference Elems field enter 12 for each row.
8. In the Longitudinal Elem Size field enter 1 for each row.
The Num Circumference Elems field governs the number of elements that will be meshed around the
hole while the Longitudinal Elem Size field dictates the unit size of the elements through the length of
the hole.
9. Click ACCEPT.
The Organize & Cleanup Holes step is now complete should now have a green checkmark next to it.
Step 5: Mesh holes.

1. In the panel area you will notice that each hole diameter row has a Mesh Type field with a pull-down
providing the options of R-tria regular and R-tria union jack. Verify that all are set for R-tria regular
and click Mesh All. (The R-tria union jack mesh pattern will be discussed in a later step.)
You will notice this process provides a perfectly straight tria mesh down the length of the hole with no
twisting.

2. Click ACCEPT.
The checkmark in the Mesh Holes step will now turn green.
Step 6: Organize and clean up features.

This step allows you to highlight and organize features that require specific mesh controls beyond the overall
mesh pattern that will be applied to the remainder of the part in a later step. This organizational tool will
place the required surfaces into their own collector or collectors and allow you to set mesh size and pattern
requirements for each.
1. In the panel area, click the "+" button.
2. In the Define New window that opens, type Faces and click OK.
3. Select all five of the flat faces around the circumference of the part as shown in the following image.
4. Click proceed.

Faces that need to be picked
The panel will switch to the Organize panel with your surfaces pre-selected to move into a new
component called grp_Faces.
5. Click move, then return.
6. Click the "+" button again.
7. In the Define New window that opens, type TopHole and click OK.
8. Rotate the model so you are looking at it from underneath into the center, and select the surfaces shown
in the following image.

Note: With this tool you need only select one of the two surfaces that make up a cylinder; when you
click proceed HyperMesh will automatically select the other surfaces.
9. Click proceed.
10. In the Organize panel, click move, then return.
Your model should then look similar to the following image, with the faces in one collector and the top
hole in another. Your colors may vary slightly.
11. Click ACCEPT.

Step 7: Organize and clean up filets.
Often a better mesh can be achieved if your fillets are split down the center. The step will allow you to
automatically split your fillets based on minimum and maximum radius criteria.
1. Click Components.
2. Select the part in an area that has not been organized into a new component so that the large purple part
is selected.
3. Click proceed.
4. Leave the Min Radius at 0 and the Max Radius at 5 and make sure the Suppress Fillet Tangent
Edges option is active.
5. Click Cleanup.
You will notice that many of the fillets now have an edge running down the center and the original edges
are suppressed.
6. Click ACCEPT.
Step 8: Mesh features.

In this step you will mesh the features that you organized in Step 6. The panel area will show a table with
your organized features in it and will give you the option of selecting a mesh type and size for each feature.
1. For the Faces feature, click the pull-down under Mesh Type and pick trias.
2. In the field under Elem Size, enter 0.5.
3. For the TopHole feature, select R-tria union jack for the Mesh Type.
4. For Elem Size, enter 0.5.
5. Click Mesh All.

6. Note the distinctive Union Jack mesh pattern ( ) in the top hole area and the connectivity of the
mesh to the previously meshed holes.
7. Click ACCEPT.
Step 9: Organize and clean up.

This step allows the user to organize and clean up the remaining portion of the model that will then fall under
the global meshing parameters. As the remaining surfaces are already in the component you wish them to
be in, there is no need for further organization.
1. Click ACCEPT.
Step 10: Mesh/remesh.

This step is where the remaining model will be globally meshed. Element size and type can be set for all
remaining components that remain unmeshed.
1. In the Element Size field, enter 1.
2. Set Mesh Type to trias.
3. Click Mesh.
4. Click ACCEPT.

Step 11: Clean up elements.
At this point the model should be entirely surface meshed. Proper adherence to the previous steps ensures
a surface mesh that is properly connected and controlled by the previously entered values. This step will
now allow the user to verify a proper mesh and clean up any issues that are found.
1. In the panel area, click Components.
2. Select all of the components and click proceed.
3. Leave all of the values at their default (Min Size – 0.25, Max FeatureAngle – 60.0, Normals Angle –
150.0) and click AutoCleanup.
The following message should appear.
This indicates that all failed elements have been fixed and there are no further errors in the model.
4. (Optional) The Manual tab allows the user to manually check the model for free edges and t-junctions
and fix any that are found. There is also the option to display normals. Use these options to find and fix
any errors.
5. Click ACCEPT.
Note: The Tetramesh Process Manager will automatically place any elements that fail this AutoCleanup
procedure in the user mark. This will allow for easy retrieval of problem elements and the user can
employ the tools from the standard HyperMesh panels to fix these remaining elements.
Step 12: Tetra mesh.

This is the final step in the TetraMesh Process Manager Template and will be the point where the model is
Tetra meshed. The Process Manager will automatically open the TetraMesh panel and pre-select all of the
float and fixed elements.
1. Click elems under select trias/quads to tetra mesh.
The surface elements will be selected under the general mesh selection option. This will define them as
“floatable” elements, meaning that the diagonals of the underlying tetra elements can be flipped from the
generated shell elements if HyperMesh determines a better element quality will result.
2. Click elems under fixed trias/quads.
The elements that represent the interior of holes and bores will be selected under this option. The will be

defined as “fixed” elements meaning HyperMesh will always adhere to the shell mesh pattern with
generating the tetra elements.
3. Click mesh.
4. Click the Model tab in the Tab area.
5. Expand the Components list if necessary.
6. Right-click the tetmesh component.
7. Select Isolate Only.
The tetra mesh will be displayed.
8. Click the Mask button ( ).
9. Hold the < SHIFT> key down and while holding the left mouse button down, drag a box to include roughly
half of the model.
10. Click mask.
Your tetra mesh should look similar to the following image.

You can now save your model if you wish.

Quality


Identify shell element connectivity problems
Correct shell element connectivity problems
Review the model’s shell elements to ensure connectivity problems were corrected
Remesh the elements along the rib
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, cover.hm.
Step 1: Retrieve and view the HyperMesh model file.

Open the file cover.hm located in the <installation folder>\tutorials\hm directory.
Step 2: Review the model’s free edges to identify shell element connectivity
problems.
1. Access the Edges panel in the following ways:

From the menu bar, select Mesh > Check > Components > Edges.
From the main menu, select the Tool page, and then click edges
Press the SHIFT+F3 keys
2. With the comps selector active, click any element in the graphics area.
The component containing the element is selected.
Red, 1-D elements are displayed. They are organized into the new component named ^edges. A red 1-
D element is created along each shell element edge that is free; one or more of the element edge’s
nodes is not shared by the adjacent elements.
Note: For a component name whose first character is ^, the component and its contents is not written
to the input file when the model is exported.
4. Click Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines ( ).
5. Observe the red, 1-D elements (free edges).
6. Try to identify gaps in the continuity of the mesh.
Hint: Look closely at free edges interior to the model.
7. In the Model Browser, turn the display on and off for the component shells to continue to identify which
red, free edges do not belong.
8. Turn on the display for the component, shells.
Step 3: Correct the shell element connectivity problems using the Edges panel.
1. In the tolerance= field, type 0.01.
2. Select an element in the graphics area to select the component.

The status bar displays the following message: "81 nodes were found."
A sphere, , is created on nodes having a distance between each other equal to or less than the
specified tolerance.
4. Notice that for this exercise’s model, a sphere is not created on every node along all of the red, free
edges, which do not belong. A larger tolerance must be specified to identify the rest of the nodes.
5. For tolerance =, increase its value until all 96 nodes are identified as shown in the following image.
Be careful not to increase the tolerance value to too much. Although the 96 nodes will be identified, an
excessively large tolerance value may collapse elements when the identified nodes are equivalenced. To
find out the maximum value that can be safely used for tolerance without collapsing the elements, press
the F10 key to go to the check elems panel, go to 2-d subpanel and click length. The status bar will
display ‘… The min length is 1.49.’ A tolerance value < 1.49 can safely be used, without causing any
elements to collapse when identified nodes are equivalenced. Click return to go back to Edges panel.
The nodes identified w ith preview equivalence
6. Click equivalence.
The 96 coincident nodes are equivalenced.
7. Rotate and observe the model to see that the mesh still looks as it should and no elements are
collapsed.
8. Click delete edges.
The red, free edges and their component, ^edges, are deleted.
Note: Remain in the Edges panel.

Step 4: Review the model’s free edges again to confirm that all of the shell element
connectivity problems have been corrected.
Observe the red, 1-D elements (free edges).
Are there any red, free edges that should not belong if the mesh was continuous or if all of the elements
were connected?
Hint: Only red, free edges should exist on the perimeter of the part and on periphery of internal holes.
2. Use the Model Browser to turn the display off and on for the component, shells, to observe that all of
the free, red edges belong.
3. After verifying that the model has correct red, free edges, click delete edges.
Red, free edges that belong
Step 5: Display the element normals and adjust them to point in the same
direction.
1. Go to the Normals panel. The Normals panel can be accessed in the following ways:
From the menu bar, select Mesh > Check > Elements > Normals
From the main menu, select the Tool page, then click normals
Press the SHIFT+F10 keys
2. Choose the elements subpanel and set toggle to vector display normals.
3. With the comps selector active, select one element from the graphics area to select the component.

4. Click display normals.
Arrows (vectors) are drawn from the element centroids and show the direction of the element normals.
Notice the arrows do not all point from the same side of the part. For some analyses, the element
normals should point from the same side.
5. Click size = and enter the size which the normal should be in model units and select display normals
again.
When size = is set to 0, the vector will be 10% of the screen.
6. Toggle vector display normals to color display normals.
7. Click display normals.
The element normals are displayed using colors. The red side of the elements is the positive normal
direction, while the blue side is the negative normal direction.
8. Notice each side of the part shows red and blue.
9. Click the orientation: elem selector to make it active.
10. Select an element from the graphics area.
11. Click adjust normals.
All elements on either side of the part are the same color, red or blue.
The status bar displays the following message: "[X] elements have been adjusted."
If after adjusting the normals, there are still elements on one side of the part which are of different color,
change to elems from comps for the entity selector, choose these elements and click reverse normals.
12. Click return.
Step 6: Review the quality of the elements using the check elems panel.
1. Access the check elems panel in one of the following ways:
From the menu bar, select Mesh > Check > Elements > Check Elements
From the main menu, select the Tool page, then click check elems
Press the F10 key
3. Verify that jacobian < field is set to 0.7.
4. Click jacobian to determine if any elements have a jacobian of less than 0.7.
Elements having a jacobian of less than 0.7 are highlighted.
5. Notice that several elements on the triangular rib and around the smaller of the two holes have a jacobian
of less than 0.7.

The status bar displays a message indicating how many elements failed this check.
6. In the graphics area, click an element.
A window appears that lists each quality check result for the element.
7. Click the right or left mouse button to close the pop-up window.
8. On the right side of the panel menu, switch from standard to assign plot.
9. Click jacobian to review again.
A legend for jacobian values appears and each element is colored accordingly. The red elements have a
jacobian less than the threshold, 0.7.
10. Verify that quads: min angle < is set to 45.
11. Click min angle to determine if any quad elements have an angle of less than 45.
12. Notice that a couple of elements on the rib have an angle of less than 45.
13. Verify that the max angle > field is set to 135.
14. Click max angle to determine if any quad elements have an angle greater than 135.
15. Notice that several elements on the rib have an angle greater than 135.
16. Click return.
Step 7: Remesh the elements on the rib using the automesh panel.
From the menu bar, select Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh
From the main menu, select the 2D page, then click automesh
Press the F12 key
2. Verify that you are in the size and bias subpanel.
4. Toggle to interactive.
5. For element size=, type 3.5.
6. Select one rib element from the graphics area.
7. Select one element on the plane of elements perpendicular to the rib and in the same plane as the rib’s
shortest edge as shown in the following image.

Example of elements to select
8. Select elems >> by face to complete the selection of elements as shown in the following image.
Elements selected using by face
9. Click mesh.

10. In the density subpanel, change the element density on the rib’s hypotenuse edge to 9.
11. Change the element density on the rib’s shortest edge to 5.
12. Keep all other element edge densities the same.
Adjusting element edge densities
13. Access the mesh style subpanel.
14. Under mesh method, set the last option to free (unmapped).
15. Under mesh method, select set all.
17. Go to the checks subpanel, and check the jacobian, quads: min angle, and quads: max angle.
18. Notice that no elements fail the minimum and maximum angle checks.
Only a couple of elements have a jacobian of less than 0.7. The smallest jacobian is 0.68, which can still
be considered good quality.
Step 8: Use the smooth panel to adjust the node placement on the rectangular
plane of remeshed elements.
1. Click Mesh > Cleanup Elements > Smooth to open the Smooth panel.
2. Go to the plates subpanel.

3. With the smooth: elems selector active, select an element on the rectangular plane of re-meshed
elements.
4. Select elems >> by face.
5. For iterations = specify 10.
6. Switch the smoothing algorithm from autodecide to shape corrected.
7. Click smooth.
8. Click return.
Step 9: Remove tria elements from another area of the model using the edit
element panel, split and combine subpanels.
1. On the 2D page, enter the edit element panel.
2. Go to the split subpanel.
3. With the splitting line: points selector active, click four screen points as shown the following image.
Temporary line segments are drawn to connect the points.
4. You can right-click to undo the last line segment drawn or you can click delete line to start over with
selecting points.
5. Click split.
Elements that have the line pass through them are split. The resulting mesh should look like the mesh in
the following image. There are two pairs of adjacent tria elements.

6. Go to the combine subpanel and set the toggle to combine to quad.
7. Select two adjacent tria elements as indicated in the following image.
8. Click combine.
9. Repeat 11.7 and 11.8 for the other two adjacent tria elements.
10. Remain in the edit element subpanel.
Trias to select Combining trias into quads
Step 10: Dynamically move nodes on the mesh area modified in the previous step
to improve element quality.
1. Go to the cleanup subpanel and ensure it is set to displayed elems.
2. Click cleanup.
The element cleanup menu appears. It allows you to select various combinations of quality checks,
specify a warning/unacceptable range for each check, and dynamically move nodes around to place

them where you desire.
Elements are colored as follows:
No color, appearing blank: element passes quality checks
Yellow: one or more quality check results falls into warning/unacceptable range
Red: one or more quality check results are beyond unacceptable
Among the group of elements you modified in the last step, Step 11, two quad elements are red and one
quad element is yellow.
3. Clear the warpage and jacobian check boxes, so that just the max angle is checked.
4. The model has three elements that are colored red.
5. With the node selector active, click an interior node of a red element and drag the node around until the
element is no longer red.
6. Repeat 12.4 for the other red elements.
7. Click return.
Step 11: For the same area of elements you focused on in the previous step,
optimize element quality by clicking nodes and elements.
1. On the 2D page, go to the qualityindex panel.
2. With the node optimize selector active, click a few nodes of the mesh area you modified.
When a node is clicked, it is repositioned so that the elements attached to it have the best possible
quality based on the criteria specified in the qualityindex panel.
3. Click the selector element optimize to make it active.
4. Click yellow and red elements in the same mesh area.
When an element is clicked, it is adjusted to have the best quality possible based on the criteria
specified in the qualityindex panel.
When you click a red element, it may become yellow or the background color (no color assigned). When
you click a yellow element, it may become the background color (no color assigned).
5. Click return.
Step 12: Add a ring of radial elements around the smaller of the two holes.
1. Click the Utility tab. If the Utility Menu is not displayed in the HyperMesh session, go to View menu
and check Utility Menu.
2. On the Geom/Mesh page, click Add Washer.
3. With the nodes selector active, select one node on the edge of the smaller hole as indicated in the
following image.

Example node to select
4. Click proceed.
A pop-up window for Add Washer along a Circular Hole utility appears.
5. Toggle to Width, and for Value specify 3.0.
6. Select the Minimum number of nodes around the hole check box.
7. In the Density: field, enter 12.
Add Washer along a Circular Hole dialog

8. Click Add.
9. Click Close.
The mesh around the hole should look like the mesh in the following image.
Resulting mesh around the smaller hole

With this exercise completed, you can save the model if desired.

Run the penetration check
Review the intersection results
Fix the intersection results
Interrogate the penetration results
Fix the penetration results
Tools
The Penetration feature can be accessed in one of the following ways:
From the menu bar, click Mesh, then Check, then Components, then Penetration
From the Tool page, go to the penetration panel
The Penetration panel allows you to check the integrity of your model, visualize problem areas, and fix the
problem areas. The three entities that can be checked are elements, components and groups. Typically,
the group check would be for checking contact definitions (for example, Abaqus/LS-DYNA).
This panel allows you to check components for element penetration and intersection. More importantly, you
can correct your model. Penetration and intersection can be used individually or collectively. Penetration is
defined as the overlap of the material thickness of shell elements, while intersection is defined as elements
passing completely through one another.
Example of penetration

Example of intersection
Strategy
Use the following guidelines for conducting checks on models:
Checks can be run on both 2-D and 3-D elements, 2-D elements only, or 3-D elements only.
The include self interference option includes components that bend and pass through themselves.
This occurs rarely and is expensive when running the check. By default, this option is off.
By default the check is set to all interfaces, meaning both intersection and penetration. The
intersections only option and the penetrations only option are available.
The allowable interference depth option allows certain penetrations and intersections to be ignored
if less than the value specified.
An additional option, uniform thickness, allows you to assign a global thickness to all
components.
An additional option, thickness multiplier, allows you to multiply the existing thicknesses in the
model.
When the penetration check is invoked, a new penetration tab is invoked in the browser area.

The results are displayed in a tree format for ease of display and are split into intersections and penetrations
with the number of components that are clashing in brackets. In the example above, two components are
intersecting and eleven components have material penetration. Expanding each tree will provide more detail
as to which components have failed. The columns (ID, Elems, Depth, Comps) provide valuable information
on which components' IDs are involved, the number of failed elements, the depth of penetration (not
applicable for intersections), and number of components affected in the penetration/intersection. Each of the
columns can be sorted by clicking the column header. At the bottom of the tab area there is a message bar
which will detail the status of the check, the number of failed elements, and any warnings and errors as the
checks are invoked.

You can also click the right mouse button to access all of the options and tools within the penetration and
intersection check. The context menu will invoke and will provide the option to fix either penetrations or
intersections, depending on whether the penetration parent/child folder or intersection folder has been
highlighted.

The options button allows for the configuration of the display, automatic fixing (intersections and
penetrations), and depenetration vector and configuration of the tree display.

The fixing of penetrations and intersections falls into two categories: automatic and manual. These
capabilities will be discussed in more detail in the tutorial.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, penetration_check.hm.

Step 1: Retrieve the model file, penetration_check.hm.
1. From the menu bar, click File > Open > Model.
2. Browse to the file, penetration_check.hm and click Open.
3. From the menu bar, click Preferences > User Profile.
4. Select LsDyna.
This model is an LS-DYNA model, therefore, it is important to chose the appropriate user profile so that
HyperMesh can access the actual thickness values of the shell components. The thickness values are
required for material penetration check.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines ( ) if not already done.

Step 2: Run the penetration check.
1. From the menu bar click Mesh > Check > Components > Penetration.
2. To invoke the penetration check, select all the components by clicking comps.
3. Click comps >> all, and click select.
4. Click check.
Once the check has completed, the Penetration tab populates. In this example, there are two
intersections and 11 penetrations. Expanding the tree the results will display the following:

The tree is populated by a parent/child or master/slave relationship. As an example looking at the
intersections, the top line shows the component, Rocker Fwd Top Panel RH (parent), and then below is
component, Rocker Inner Panel RH (child). It is important to understand that there is always a
reciprocal relationship; the second entry is Rocker Inner Panel RH (parent) and then the component,
Rocker Fwd Top Panel RH (child). In this case there is a one-to-one relationship. It is especially
important to understand this when there is a one-to-many relationship (for example, Rocker Inner Panel
RH under penetrations). Clicking the parent component will always show that component plus all the
components below (children). Clicking a child component will show that component with the parent
component only.
Step 3: Review the intersection results.

1. In the Penetration tab, click the Intersections heading to view all the intersections.
Based on which mode is chosen, certain components are displayed on the screen.

Mode Description
Fit View to Failed Elements
Display All Elements
Display Components with Failed Elements
Display Only Failed Elements
2. Ensure that Display Components with Failed Elements and Fit View to Failed Elements are
selected.
3. Under Intersections, click the component Rocker Inner Panel RH. The screen will automatically fit to
the failed intersecting elements.
4. Click Review Failed Elements ( ) to review the other visualization modes. The contour and vector
displays are only applicable to intersections. The intersecting elements display as follows:

Step 4: Fix the intersection results.
HyperMesh includes two methods of fixing penetrations: manual and automatic. To fix intersections
manually:
1. Under Intersections, click the component, Rocker Fwd Top Panel RH.
2. Click Manual Fix Tools ( ) to ensure that the intersecting entities can be fixed.
Additional buttons populate for intersection fixing.
3. Ensure Elements from Tree Selection is selected – you will not pick any additional elements.
4. Ensure Move in Normal Direction is selected for the direction of movement.
5. For distance value, enter 2.
6. Click the left arrow button twice and notice the selected elements moving in the chosen direction.
After the elements have been moved by a value of 4, they no longer intersect.
7. Click Recheck ( ) and notice there are no intersections. Only 11 penetrations remain.

Important
A dialog box displays that states: "Current results will be lost by recheck ing the model. Would you lik e to
continue?" Click Yes. The penetration tab needs to be refreshed.
Alternatively, you can use the automatic fixing tools:
1. Load the file, penetration_check.hm, again.
2. Go to the Penetration panel.
3. To invoke the penetration check, select all the components by clicking comps.
4. Click comps >> all, and click select.
5. Run the check on all components
6. Highlight the Intersections directory in the Penetration browser.
Notice that there are currently two intersections.
7. Right-click to invoke the context-sensitive menu. Choose Automatic Recursive Intersection Fix –
the wrenches will turn green indicating that the fix was successful. The Automatic Recursive
Intersection Fix will run through all passes automatically, the Automatic Intersection Fix will run
through one pass at a time (most fixes will require multiple passes).
8. Click Yes on the dialog box that appears.
Step 5: Interrogate the penetration results.

1. Expand the Penetrations tree.
2. Click component, C-Pillar Bot Inner Panel RH.
The penetration results will look as follows:

3. Click the visualization options, , to view the different types of results display for the
penetration.
Remember that the columns can be sorted. For example, if you were only interested in the worst
offending penetrations then sorting by the depth column will reorganize the tree structure (while still
retaining the parent/child relationship).
In this particular example, for component C-Pillar Bot Inner Panel RH, there are 18 elements that have
failed (parent and child), the maximum penetration depth is 0.159, and there is only one component
penetrating.
Step 6: Fix the penetration results.

Within the checking tool there is an automatic penetration fix that will remove the penetrations within the
model. This works by physically moving the failed nodes to new locations to remove the material penetration.
There are two options: automatic penetration fix and automatic recursive penetration fix. Both will do
the same thing, but the automatic option often requires you to use it several times successively to eliminate
all penetrations, while the automatic recursive completes the fix in one click. However, the iterative option
will take longer to complete, because it is essentially automatically repeating the automatic fix until it
reaches a point at which no further improvements can be made. You also have the option to either fix
individual penetrations by clicking on a single parent branch of the tree, or fix all penetrations at once by
clicking and highlighting the complete Penetrations tree.
In some circumstances, there may be the need to lock or freeze a component that cannot be adjusted or
moved by the fixing tool. This can be achieved by right-clicking and selecting Lock Component. Once a
component is locked, a symbol will appear by the folder indicating that the component is locked.

In the previous example, component C-Pillar Bot Inner Panel RH was locked, notice how the lock symbol
appears multiple times to correspond with the multiple references to the same component. To unlock, right-
click again and select Unlock Component. For the purpose of this tutorial you will not be using the lock
functionality.
To fix the penetrations in the model we will use the Iterative Fix:
1. Click Penetrations at the top of the tree. See the following image.
2. Right-click to bring up the menu and then click Automatic Recursive Penetration Fix.
Important:
A dialog box states, "Model changes to specific tree items are not possible once process is
initiated. The Penetration tab will appear and disappear repeatedly during the process. Would you
lik e to continue?" Click Yes.
After the process has finished, note that the majority of the penetrations have been fixed. Three
penetrations remain which require manual editing to fix.

Assembly


Weld the two front trusses to each other by creating connectors at pre-defined weld points
Weld the two front trusses to the reinforcement plate by creating connectors between shell elements
Weld the right rails to each other and to the front trusses by creating connectors from a master
connectors file
Update weld type of NASTRAN/OPTISTRUCT ACM (area contact method) welds, which already
connect the rear trusses to each other, by first creating connectors from these welds and then
realizing the connectors into two-noded weld elements.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly.hm. Weld the two front trusses by creating
connectors between geometry surfaces at pre-defined weld points.

1. Open the model file, frame_assembly.hm.
2. Take a few moments to observe the model using various visual options available in HyperMesh (rotation,
zooming, etc.).
4. Select RADIOSS, then Bulk Data.
Step 2: Display only the assembly assem_1 for elements and geometry.
1. Select Model view ( ) in the Model browser and expand the Assembly Hierarchy tree.
2. Verify that the entity selection is set to Elements and Geometry ( ).
This turns on/off both elements and geometry when performing right-click operations in the Model
Browser.
3. Right-click on assem_1 and select Isolate.
This will only display the components that are in the assem_1 assembly.
Step 3: Load the Connector Browser.

1. Using the menu bar select View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Connector.
2. Review the layout of the Connector Browser.
The Connector Browser allows users to view and manage the connectors in their model. The top
portion of the browser is called the Link Entity Browser and displays information for the linked entities
in the model. The lower portion is called the connector window and it contains a list of the connectors in
the model. The connectors will be grouped based on the type of connection.
Currently there are no components or connectors listed because there are no connectors in the model.

Step 4: Create welds between the geometry for the two front trusses at the pre-
defined weld points.
There are two methods for creating connectors: automatic and manual. The automatic approach creates and
realizes connectors automatically. The manual approach allows you to create the connector manually, and
then realize the connector manually. Realization is the process in which the connector creates the weld
entity.
To create connectors automatically, access the spot, bolt, seam, and area panels within the Connectors
Browser module. To create connectors manually, go to the create and realize subpanels.
1. Access the Spot panel: right-click in the Connector Browser in the connector window and select
Create > Spot.
2. Access the spot subpanel.
3. Verify that the current component is Con_Frt_Truss.
4. Switch the location: entity selector to points.
5. Select the six pre-defined weld points by selecting points >> by collector and selecting the component

Con_Frt_Truss.
6. Click select.
7. For connect what:, click comps and select the components Front_Truss_1 and Front_Truss_2.
8. Click select.
9. For connect what:, toggle elems to geom.
10. For tolerance = specify 5. The connector will connect any selected entities within this distance of
itself.
11. For type=, select weld.
12. Click create.
13. Click return.
The six connectors are automatically created and realized (notice the message in the status bar). The green
connectors indicate that the creation of the weld entity was successful. The connectors are organized as
geometry (not elements) in the current component collector, Con_Frt_Truss.

There are three states of connectors: realized (green ), unrealized (yellow ), and failed (red ). The
color of the connectors change from yellow to green (if created manually), indicating they are realized into
weld elements. As mentioned before, if created automatically they will be green immediately as there is no
interim unrealized (yellow) state.
Fixed points were added to the surfaces at the ends of the weld elements to guarantee connectivity between
the weld elements and the shell mesh that will be created on the surfaces.
Weld element w ith fixed points created on the surfaces
Step 5: Review the Connector Browser.

1. In the connector window in the Connector Browser, click the + next to RBAR.
This contains a listing of the six connectors just created. They are all grouped under RBAR because
that is the type of connector created. Notice the ID of the connector under Entities, the Links of the
connector, and the State of the connector. You may need to increase the size of the tab area to the
right to see the State column.

2. In the Link Entity Browser in the Connector Browser, right-click Front_Truss_1 and select Find.
This isolates this component in the graphics area. It also highlights the six connectors in the connector
window to indicate that these connectors have Front_Truss_1 as a link.
3. Right-click Front_Truss_1 again, and this time select Find Attached.
This will find the components that are attached to Front_Truss_1 through connectors. Notice that
Front_Truss_1 and Front_Truss_2 are now both highlighted in the Link Entity Browser to indicate that
they have been displayed in the graphics area.
Step 6: Create a shell mesh on the two front truss components.

1. Press F12 to go to the Automesh panel.
2. Access the size and bias subpanel.
3. Select the mesh mode automatic. (It currently may be interactive.)
4. Select surfs >> displayed.
5. For elem size =, specify 10.
6. For mesh type, select mixed.
7. Verify that the toggle is set to elems to surf comp. (It currently may be elems to current comp.)
9. Zoom into the area with a connector and see how the fixed point created from the weld has ensured the
mesh seeding passes through the weld.

Weld the two front trusses to the reinforcement plate by creating connectors between shell elements at pre-
defined weld points.
1. Within the Model Browser, verify that Elements and Geometry is the current selection type.
Weld the tw o front trusses to the reinforcement plate.
Step 8: Create connectors between the shell mesh for the front trusses and the
reinforcement plate at pre-defined points.
Perform the following steps to create and realize the connectors manually.
1. Use the Model Browser to set the current component to Con_Truss_Plate.
2. Go to the Connector Browser.
3. Right-click in the connector window and select Create >>Spot.
4. Access the create subpanel.
5. For location:, select points.
6. Select points >> by collector and select the component Con_Truss_Plate.
7. Click select.
8. For connect what:, select the following components:
Front_Truss_1

Front_Truss_2
Reinf_Plate
9. Click select.
10. For connect what:, toggle geom to elems.
11. Verify that num layers is set to total 2.
12. Verify that connect when: is set to now.
13. Click create to create connectors at the selected weld points.
Notice that the status bar says "8 spot connectors created with comps and link s." The connectors are
organized into the current component collector, Con_Truss_Plate.
14. Notice in the Connector Browser that these eight connectors are currently grouped as undefined and
that the color of the connectors is yellow to indicate they are unrealized.
15. Click the + next to undefined and notice the status of the eight connectors is unrealized. In the next
step, you will realize the connectors and assign a connector type.
Step 9: Realize the connectors in the component Con_Truss_Plate into weld

elements.
1. Go to the realize subpanel.
2. Zoom into the Reinf_Plate and select the 4 connectors along the top.
3. For type=, select weld.
4. For tolerance =, enter 7.
5. Verify the selection is set to mesh dependent from mesh independent.
When the option mesh dependent is active, if the realized finite element of the connector is coincident
to a node of the shell mesh it is being connected to, the nodes are equivalenced. If there are no suitable
nodes present, this option will partition the mesh accordingly to ensure the mesh seeding passes
through the weld point.
6. There are two options available for mesh dependent. Verify that adjust realization has been selected
7. Click realize to realize the selected connectors into weld elements. Notice how the mesh hasn’t been
remeshed to connect the two components.
8. Make the connectors selector active and select the 4 connectors along the bottom on the plate.
9. Under mesh dependent, set the toggle to adjust mesh.
10. The two options under adjust mesh are remesh and quad transition. Select remesh.
11. Click realize to realize the selected connectors. This time the mesh has been remeshed to connect the
two components.

The tw o front trusses w elded to the reinforcement plate w ith w eld elements at the connectors
2. Right-click assem_3 and select Isolate.

Weld the tw o right rails to each other and to the tw o front trusses by creating connectors from a master connectors file.
Step 11: Create connectors to connect the right rails to each other and to the front
trusses by importing a master connectors file.
1. From the menu bar select File > Import > Connectors.
2. Click the open file ( ) next to File and and import the file, rails_frt_truss.mwf.
3. Click Import.
It will take a few seconds for the connectors to be imported. The connectors are automatically created
and are organized into the new component, CE_Locations.
4. Click Close to close the Import tab.
Step 12: Realize the connectors in the component CE_Locations into weld
elements.
1. Use the Model Browser to set the current component collector to CE_Locations.

2. Enter the Connector Browser.
3. Right-click in the connector window and select Create >> Spot.
4. Access the realize subpanel.
5. Select connectors >> displayed.
6. Verify that type= is set to weld.
7. Verify that tolerance = is set to 7.
8. Verify that mesh dependant and adjust realization are selected.
9. Click realize to realize the selected connectors into weld elements.
Right rails w elded to each other and to the front trusses w ith w eld elements at the connectors

1. Within the Model Browser, verify that Elements and Geomtry is the current selection type.
Weld to the tw o front trusses by duplicating and reflecting selected connectors created from the master connectors file
Step 14: Create a new component collector to hold new connectors.

1. Right click in the Model Browser and select Create > Component
2. For Name: enter CE_Locations_Dup.
3. Select a color for the component.
4. Click create to create the component.
Step 15: Duplicate the connectors created from the master connectors file and
reflect them.
1. Enter the Reflect panel from the menu bar by selecting Connectors > Reflect > Connectors
2. Verify the entity selector is set to connectors.
3. Using the Model Browser, turn on and display the component, CE_Locations.
4. Select connectors >> by collector and select CE_Locations.
5. Click connectors >> duplicate >> current comp.
The displayed connectors are duplicated and the duplicates are organized into the current component,
CE_Locations_Dup.
6. Set the plane selector to x-axis.

This is the axis normal to the plane of interest.
7. Click B twice to specify a base node to reflect about.
8. Click x=.
The fields for x=, y=, and z= are activated. By default, their value is 0.000, which is the base point you
want to reflect about.
9. Click return to return to the reflect panel.
10. Click reflect to reflect the connectors.
Notice the connectors are unrealized (yellow).
Step 16: Update the connectors for the left rails to link them to the left rail
components.
1. Enter the Connector Browser.
2. Expand the folder for RBAR in the connector window.
3. Click State to sort the connectors by their state.
You may need to increase the size of the tab area to the right to see the State column. Notice how all
the realized connectors are now at the top of the list.
4. Click State again so that all the unrealized connectors are at the top of the list.
5. Left-click the first connector in the list under the Entities column. Scroll down to the last unrealized
connector in the list. While holding the SHIFT button, left-click the last unrealized connector in the list.
This will select all the unrealized connectors in the list. Verify that this is the case.
6. Right-click under Entities and select Update Link. This brings up the update window under the
connector window in the Connector Browser.

7. Review the entries in the Link1 and Link2 columns.
8. Notice that the connectors have the links comp Right_Rail_1 and comp Right_Rail_2. This data is from
the master connectors file that you imported. These links need to be updated to reflect the two left rails.
9. Set Link Type to comps under Search in the update window.
10. Click in Link Select under Search. This brings up a component selector in the panel area.
11. Click component and select the component, Right_Rail_1.
12. Click proceed. This updates the Connector Browser so now the Link Select is set to Right_Rail_1
under Search.

13. Set Link Type to comps under Replace.
14. Click in Link Select under Replace. This brings up a component selector in the panel area.
15. Click component and select the component, Left_Rail_1.
16. Click proceed. This updates the Connector Browser so now the Link Select is set to Left_Rail_1
under Replace.
17. Click Update to update the connectors' links.
18. Repeat 16.9 through 16.19, except search for the Right_Rail_2 component and replace it with the
Left_Rail_2 component.
19. Scroll through the list of unrealized connectors to make sure that no connector is linked to the right rail
components.
20. Click the X next to Update to close the update window.
Step 17: Realize the connectors in the component CE_Locations_Dup into weld
elements.
1. Go to the spot: realize subpanel.
2. Select connectors >> by collector and select the component, CE_Locations_Dup.
3. Verify type= is set to weld.
4. Verify tolerance = is set to 7.
5. Ensure that the mesh dependent option is active.
6. Click realize to realize the selected connectors into weld elements.
Step 18: Verify that all connectors are realized and identify the pairs of adjacent
connectors.
1. In the connector window of the Connector Browser, verify that the RBAR folder is expanded.
2. Scroll through all the connectors. Note that the State column indicates that all of the connectors are

realized.
3. Zoom into one of the two areas where the front trusses are connected to the rail components.
Note that at these two areas, there are pairs of adjacent connectors.
4. Click Visualization Options ( ) from the Visualization toolbar.
5. Click on the Connectors icon, , and under the Color by: option select Layer.
6. While still in the Visualization tab, notice under Layers that 2t (two thickness) is purple.
The connectors are now colored purple. This means each of these connectors link two components.
Because the pairs of connectors create a series of two weld elements, you can combine each pair into a
single connector, which links the three components together.
7. Click Close to close the Visualization tab.
Step 19: Isolate the pairs of adjacent 2t connectors identified in the previous step.
1. From the Model Browser, turn off the display for all geometry components.
2. Return to the Connector Browser.
3. In the top portion of the Connector Browser, hold down the Ctrl key and select Front_Truss_1,
Front_Truss_2, Right_Rail_1, and Left_Rail_1.
4. Right click and select Find Between.
This finds and displays the 12 connectors between 4 components selected.

Step 20: Unrealize the displayed connectors.
1. Access the Unrealize panel from the menu bar by selecting Connectors > Unrealize.
Notice the status bar displays "12connectors added by 'displayed'. Total selected 12."
3. Click unrealize to unrealize the connectors.
The weld elements associated to these connectors are deleted.
Step 21: Combine the pairs of adjacent 2t connectors into 3t connectors.

1. Enter the Connector Quality from the menu bar by selecting Connectors, > Check > Connector
Quality:
2. In the connectors (unrealized) subpanel, select connectors >> displayed.
3. For tolerance = specify 7.
4. Click preview combine.
The status bar displays the message, "12 connector(s) found that need to be combined."
5. Click combine to combine the connectors.
The status bar displays the message, "6 connectors deleted." Also notice that the connectors have now
turned a dark blue color to indicate that they have 3 layers. If you cannot see the connectors, use the
Connector Browser to Show the unrealized connectors.
Step 22: Realize the 3t connectors in the component Con_Frt_Truss into weld
elements.
1. Set the current component to Con_Frt_Truss.
2. Enter the spot: realize subpanel.
4. Verify element config: is set to weld.
5. Set tolerance = to 10.
6. Toggle the mesh dependent option to be active.
7. Click realize to realize the connectors.
8. Click in the Connector Browser. Scroll down through the list in the connector window to see that there
are now three links for the six connectors we just updated.

10. Click Visualization Options ( ) from the visualization toolbar.
11. On the Connectors page, select State for the Color by: option.
2. At the top of the browser window, verify that Elements and Geometry ( ) is the current selection
type.
Step 24: Create connectors from existing ACM welds.

Use the Fe Absorb panel to obtain connectors from the existing ACM welds (elements) in the component,
Con_Rear_Truss.
1. Enter the Automated Connector Creation and FE Absorption dialog from the menu bar by selecting
Connectors > Fe Absorb.

2. Set FE Configs: to custom.
3. Set FE Type: to optistruct 69-71 acm.
4. Toggle Elem filter: from All to Select.
5. Click the Elem filter: Elements selector twice.
A HyperMesh panel menu with an elems selector appears.
6. Select elems >> by collector and select the component, Con_Rear_Truss.
7. Click proceed to return to the dialog.
8. Activate the Move connectors to FE component option.
9. Click Absorb to absorb the elements into connectors.
Connectors are generated at the locations of the ACM welds. They are realized and are 2t connectors.

Also, the connectors are organized into the Con_Rear_Truss, the same component to which the ACMs
belong.
10. Click Close to close the dialog.

Apply an adhesive connection to the left rails.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly_1.hm. Area connectors must be meshed in order to
work properly. When the connector’s location is existing FE mesh elems, the connector automatically gets
meshed to match the elements chosen. However, after creating an area connector on surfs, lines, or along
nodes, you must then use the automesh options (which display when you select one of these locations
types) to create a mesh on the connector area.
area Create and realize bolt connectors in a single process.
create Create, but do not realize, area connectors.
realize Create FE representations of previously-created area connectors.

1. Open the model file, frame_assembly_1.hm.
zooming, etc.).
3. Go to the Preferences menu, click User Profiles....
4. Select RADIOSS, then Bulk Data.
Step 2: Load the Connector browser.

1. Go to the menu bar select View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Connector.
portion of the browser is called the Link Entity Browser and it contains a listing of the components
being connected with the connectors. The lower portion is called the connector entity browser and it
contains a list of the connectors in the model. The connectors will be grouped based on the type of
connection.
Step 3: Create an adhesive connection between component Left_Rail_1 and

Left_Rail_2 on the top flange.
1. From the Model Browser, display only the elements for components, Left_Rail_1 and Left_Rail_2.

2. Zoom into an area displaying the two flanges and inspect the elements to be joined.
3. Create a new component by right-clicking in the Model Browser and select Create > Component.
4. Name the new component Left_Rail_Adhesive.
Ensure the new component is the current component.
5. Right-click in the Connector Browser in the connector window and select Create > Area
6. Verify that location: is set to elems.
7. Pick one element on the top flange of Left_Rail_1.
The element should be highlighted.
8. Click elems and select the by face option – the whole flange should be highlighted.
9. For connect what:, select comps and pick Left_Rail_1 and Left_Rail_2.
10. Click select.
11. Set tolerance= 10. The connector will connect any selected entities within this distance of itself.
12. Click type= and select adhesives.

13. Verify that the adhesive type is set to shell gap – this option projects directly to the shell component
and takes no account of the thickness of the shell components.
14. Click create.
15. Inspect the new adhesive, note that an area connector has been created, and then click return.
16. Access the Unrealize panel from the menu bar by selecting Connectors > Unrealize.
17 Select the previously created connector.
18 Click unrealize.
19 Click return.
20. Access the Area panel, realize subpanel.
21 Click connectors and select the unrealized, yellow connector.
22. Verify that the adhesive type is set to (T1+T2)/2 (instead of shell gap) and increase the density= 3.
This type takes into account the thickness of each shell part and increases the number of hexas through
thickness from 1 to 3.
23. Click realize.

For the other set of flanges you w ill manually create an area connector and mesh it accordingly.
Step 4: Create an adhesive connection between component Left_Rail_1 and

Left_Rail_2 on the bottom flange.
1. Verify that you are still in the Area panel.
2. Access the area subpanel.
3. Select nodes for the location.
4. Click node list and select by path.
5. Select the row of nodes on the outer flange on part, Left_Rail_1 by first selecting the left most node on
the bottom flange of Left_Rail_1 and then selecting the right-most node on the bottom flange.
5. Define width = 10.
6. Define offset = 3.
7. Select comps Left_Rail_1 and Left_Rail_2.
8. Click select.
9. Click create.
The default mesh size for these mesh independent area connectors (when choosing by nodes/lines/
surfs) is 10. However, you can specify a different elem size if needed.
10. Go to the edit subpanel.

11. Select the newly created area connector.
12. Select the element size= 3.
13. Click mesh.
Note the connector unrealizes if there is a pre-exising mesh.
15. Select the connector.
16. Change the type from (T1+T2)/2 to const_thickness and enter 0.3.
17. Click realize.
Inspect the new adhesive created. Note when creating area connectors from elements it will automatically
mesh the area connector using the current mesh. If the area connector is created from nodes, lines, or
surfaces then a manual mesh can be applied if the default is unsuitable from the area subpanel.

18. Return to the main menu.

Apply a bolted connection to the two rear trusses.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly_2.hm. The bolt panel creates connectors based on
holes within the connected components, using spiders or washers at each end of an RBE connector. When
the bolt panel is active, only bolt-type connectors display in the graphics area; graphics for other connector
types are suppressed until you exit the panel. The bolt panel contains three subpanels:
bolt Create and realize bolt connectors in a single process.
create Create, but do not realize, bolt connectors.
realize Create FE representations of previously-created bolt connectors.

1. Retrieve the model file, frame_assembly_2.hm.
zooming, etc.).
3. Go to the Preferences menu and click User Profiles.
4. Select RADIOSS, then Bulk_Data.
Create a bolted connection betw een the tw o rear truss parts.

1. Turn on the display of the Model Browser by selecting View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Model.
2. Select the Model View ( ) in the Model Browser and expand the Assembly Hierarchy tree.
3. Verify the entity selection is set to Elements and Geometry ( ).
This will only display the components that are in the assem_5 assembly.
5. Set Con_Rear_Truss to be the current component by right-clicking on it in the Model Browser and
selecting Make Current.

1. From the menu bar select View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Connector.
connection.
Currently there are no components or connectors listed because there are no connectors in your model.
Step 4: Create a bolt connector.

1. Access the Bolt panel by right clicking in the Connector Browser in the connector window and
selecting Create > Bolt.
2. Verify that location is set to nodes and select the node on the edge of the hole in the component,
Rear_Truss_1.

3. For connect what: click on comps and select Rear_Truss_1 and Rear_Truss_2.
4. Click select.
5. In the tolerance= field, type 50.
The connector will connect any selected entities within this distance of itself.
6. Set type= to bolt (general).
Re-realizing the connector will allow you to see the different bolt types.
7. In the hole diameter: max= field, type to 60 to ensure that the diameter of the picked hole will be
captured.
8. Click create. Ensure the display of the current component is turned on.

Bolted connection
9. Click return to access the main menu.

Replace the rear truss component, Rear_Truss_1, with a new, similar part and then update the
affected connectors.
Export the connector information
Export the FE deck and view the connector information in the deck
After the modeling of the assembly is complete, a design change might be made to any one of the parts.
When this occurs, you must replace the current part(s) in the model with the new, similar one(s) and update
the affected connections (welds).
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly_3.hm. A new part is needed in the assembly. This
exercise will illustrate how to delete the original component, import the new part, and update the
connections. You will also export the connector information to a single file. Then you will also export the
entire FE input deck and observe how the connector information is preserved.

1. Open the model file, frame_assembly_3.hm.
zooming, etc.).
4. Select RADIOSS, then BulkData.
5. Click OK to set the user profile.

1. From the menu bar select View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Connector Browser.
connection.
Step 3: Import rear_truss_1_new.hm to set up the link update.

1. From the Model Browser, isolate the component Rear_Truss_1.

2. From the menu bar select File > Import > Model.
3. At the top of the browser window, select Import HM model.
4. Under File selection, click the file open icon ( ), and import the file, rear_truss_1_new.hm.
5. Click Import.
The rear_truss_1_new is on top of the rear_truss_1.
Step 4: Using the Connector browser, update the connector links to the new
component.
1. In the Link Entity Browser in the Connector Browser, right-click Rear_Truss_1 and then click Find
Attached.
2. Right-click any of the highlighted connector names in the Connector Browser and click Update Link.
3. Click the field in the Search column for Link Select.

4. Click component and select Rear_Truss_1.
5. Click proceed to select the component.
6. Click the field in the Replace column for Link Select.
7. Click component and select Rear_Truss_1.1.
8. Click proceed to select the component.
9. Click Update to update the connector links.
Step 5: Realize the connectors in the component Con_Rear_Truss.

1. Set the current component to Con_Rear_Truss.
2. Enter the Spot panel by right clicking in the connector window and selecting Create > Spot.
5. Verify that type=: is set to weld.
6. Verify that tolerance = is set to 10.
7. Toggle the mesh dependent option and verify that adjust realization is selected.
8. Click realize to realize the connectors.

Step 6: Save the connector information to an XML file.
1. At the bottom of the Connector Browser, click Export connectors (XML) ( ).
2. A dialog opens. Select the location where you would like to save the XML file and click Save.
3. Open the XML file in a text editor. Inspect the file and observe how the connector information has been
saved. In the future, you can use the XML file to import connectors.
Step 7: Export the finite element deck and observe how the connector information
is preserved.
1. From the menu bar select File > Export > Solver Deck:
3. Set File type to RADIOSS.
4. For Template, select Bulk Data standard format.
5. Click the file open icon ( ) next to File and select a name and location for the file to be saved to. Be
sure to use the .fem extension.
6. Click next to Export Options to view the additional export options.
7. Make sure the option for Include connectors is checked.
8. Click Export.
9. Open the .fem file you just saved in a text editor. Scroll to the very bottom. This is where all the
connector information has been saved. The information has been saved as comment cards so that when
you run the analysis, the connector information is not read. But when the input deck is importing back
into HyperMesh, the connector information is read.

Morphing
HM-3520: Sculpting

Exercise: Translating Nodes to Increase the Length of a Propeller Blade
In this tutorial, you will increase the length of a propeller blade by 100 units, using freehand morphing.
Figure 1: Original blade
Figure 2: Blade after morphing
Step 1: Load the model.

Open the HyperMesh file, propeller.hm.
Step 2: Morph the blade.

1. Click the Morphing > Free Hand, then select the move nodes subpanel.

2. Verify that the morphing method is set to translate.
3. For the translate value, key in z= -100.
4. Open the Views folder in the Model Browser.
5. Click next to View1 to set the view.
6. For moving nodes and fixed nodes select the nodes as displayed in Figure 3.
Figure 3: Node and element selections.
7. For affected elements select the elements that lie between fixed nodes and moving nodes.
8. For mv bias and fx bias keep the default value (1.00).
9. Click morph to alter the blade of the propeller.
Summary
The length of the propeller blade has increased by 100. The fixed nodes do not move. The affected
elements were stretched evenly to maintain element quality. The stretching of the elements takes place
between the moving nodes and the fixed nodes.

HM-3520: Sculpting
Exercise: Conforming a Seat to a Dummy Profile
The objective of this exercise is to take a dummy pelvis profile and imprint it onto a seat.
Figure 1: Seat before and after sculpting
Step 1: Load and review the model.

Open the HyperMesh file, dummy_position_solid.hm.
Step 2: Morph the seat.

1. Click Morphing > Free Hand, then select the sculpting subpanel.
2. Change the sculpting tool to mesh.
3. For the sculpting tool:, choose the elements in the collector dummy (Figure 2).
4. For affected elements: choose the elements in the collector seat (Figure 2).
5. For the base point as well as the node list, chose a node on the dummy (Figure 2).
6. Define a sculpt direction for your seat using N1 N2 (Figure 2).
7. Set your taper angle to 85 (degrees).
8. Verify that mesh compression is set to compress by factor.
9. Set mesh compr= to 0.5.

Figure 2: Setting up the model for morphing
10. Click move+ to complete the morphing operation.
Figure 3: Seat after sculpting
11. Review the obtained mesh quality.

Summary
Using just a few steps you have been able to take a fairly complicated profile and impose it on to another
mesh.

Exercise: Changing the Curvature of a Bumper to a Curved Line
In this exercise, you will use the line difference approach to morph a bumper to conform to a new section
line.
Figure 1: Bumper before and after morphing

Open the HyperMesh file, bumper_morphing.hm.
Step 2: Morph the bumper.

1. Click Morphing > Map to Geometry to open the Map to Geom panel
2. Change the geometry selector to line difference.
3. Select the from line (Line A) and the to line (Line B) as shown in figure 2.
4. Toggle the morphing entity (2nd column) from map domains to map nodes.
5. Select nodes >> displayed.
6. Use no fixed nodes (2nd column, 2nd row).
7. Use map by line axis morphing with a 1.0 mvbias and fxbias (column 3).

Figure 2: The from line and the to line
8. Click map.
Summary
The profile of the bumper is changed to follow the new section line.

Exercise: Changing the Profile of the Roof of a Car
In this tutorial, you will use map to sections to change the profile of the car roof.
Figure 1: Car model.

Open the HyperMesh file, car_section.hm.
Step 2: Morph the roof.

1. Click Morphing > Map to Geometry to access the Map to geom panel.
2. Change the mapping section type to map to sections.
3. Under map to sections, toggle lines to line list.
4. Switch map domains to map elements (2nd column).
5. Toggle no fixed nodes to fixed nodes (2nd column).
6. Keep blend all option selected.
7. Keep rotate nodes active.
8. Keep the 3rd column selector set to map by line normal.
9. Click first line list button and select Line A and Line B on the model.

10. Under to: click the second line list button and select Line A’ and Line B’ on the model.
Lines should be selected in the same order.
11. Under map to elements click the elems button and select elements by collector.
12. Pick collector Roof. (This may be located on the second page of collectors)
13. Click select.
14. Click the Right XZ Plane View ( ) icon to set the view
15. For fixed nodes use Shift + Left Mouse Button to select all the nodes as shown in figure 2
Figure 2: Selection for fixed nodes
16. Click map.
Summary
The roof of the car has been morphed while the mesh quality has been maintained.

Exercise: Changing the Shape of the B-pillar with the Help of Morph Volume
This exercise shows how to smoothly change the shape of a B-pillar via morph volumes.
Figure 1: B-Pillar before and after morphing

Open the HyperMesh file, body_side.hm.
Step 2: Create morph volumes.

1. Click the Morphing menu in the menu bar and pick Create > Morph Volumes
2. Switch the creation method to pick on screen.
3. For handle placement, select corners only.
4. Keep the auto-tangent check box selected.
5. Draw a window by clicking at the four places shown in Figure 2.

Figure 2: Points for creating the morph volume
Note: A morph volume is created, enclosing the area.
Step 3: Split the morph volumes.

1. Click the split/combine subpanel in the Morphing panel.
2. Verify the split toggle is set to split mvols : by edges
3. Select an edge of the morph volume close to location 1 (Figure 3).
Figure 3: Locations to split the morph volume
The green colored cross moves to the location of the black dot.
4. Click split.
The morph volume is split into two. Follow the same steps to create another split at location2.

Step 4: Change the profile of the b-pillar.
1. Click the Morphing menu and pick Morph. Click the move handles subpanel if not already open.
2. Set the morphing method to translate.
3. For direction use along xyz.
4. Key in the following values:
x val = 0
y val = 100.00
z val = 0
5. Select the eight handles by window as shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4: Select handles for morphing
6. Click morph.
Rotate the model to observe that the b-pillar is morphed.
Summary
The b-pillar is morphed in a smooth fashion with minimum distortion to the elements.

Exercise: Using Domains and Handles
In this exercise you will create domains and handles, and morph the model.

Open and review the HyperMesh model morphing_1.hm.
Step 2: Auto generate 2-D domains and handles.

1. Click the Morphing menu in the menu bar and pick Create > Domains.
2. Change the create method to auto functions.
3. Click generate.
Based on the model’s geometric features, all of the model’s elements are organized into various domains
and local handles are created and associated with the domains.
Step 3: Move elements into a new 2-D domain.

1. Set the selector to 2D domains. Toggle to the elems selector if not already there.
2. Click to clear the elements that were already selected.
3. Using elems >> by window, select the elements indicated in figure 1.
Figure 1: Elements to select to move into a new domain

5. Verify that partition 2D domains is active.
6. Click create to create the domain.
Local handles are created for the new domain. You should now have two local domains. Elements can
only belong to one domain at a time. Thus, the elements you selected were moved into the new domain.
This functionality makes it very easy to group elements into different domains.
Step 4: Split the edge domain of the radius to have more control when morphing.
1. Click the edit edges subpanel in the Morphing panel.
2. Verify that the split option is selected.
3. With the domain selector active, select the edge domain of the part’s radius as indicated in the Figure
2.
The node selector automatically becomes active once the edge domain is selected. Click the domain
selector to make it active and see that you selected the desired edge domain.
Figure 2: Edge domain to select
4. Click the node selector to make it active.
5. Select the node on the positive Y-axis end of the radius, as indicated in the image Figure 3.

Figure 3: Node selection to split the edge domain of the radius
6. Click split to split the edge domain at the node.
7. Repeat the above process to further split the edge domain of the radius, this time at the node indicated in
the Figure 4.
Figure 4: Node selection to further split the edge domain of the radius
8. When complete, click return to exit the panel.
Step 5: Add local handles to the 2-D domain on the part’s left side.
1. Click the Morphing menu, and pick Create > Handles.
2. For name=, enter local.

3. Click the attached to: domain selector to make it active.
4. Select the 2-D domain on the part’s left side by selecting its red icon, as indicated in the following
image.
Figure 5: Adding handles to a 2-D domain
5. Click the by nodes: nodes selector to make it active.
6. Select the two nodes as indicated in the previous image.
7. Click create to create the handles and add them to the 2-D domain.
Step 6: Perform basic morphing to understand how domains and handles interact
with each other and the mesh.
1. Click the Morphing menu, and pick Morph.
2. Select the move handles subpanel if not already there.
3. Change the mode to interactive if not already set.
4. With the handles selector active, select the two handles on the right-hand end of the part, as indicated
in figure 6.
If you select one or more handle, those handles follow the handle you drag (in Step 6.10, following).
5. Switch from on domains to on plane.
6. Click the N1 selector to make it active.
7. For N1, N2, and N3, select any three nodes on the model to define a plane.
8. Click morph.
The message, “pick handles and move to new location” appears in the status bar.

9. Click on and drag one of the selected handles to morph the part.
As you drag the handle, the mesh’s size and shape is adjusted. Notice that the following occurs as the
selected local handle is moved:
The handles selected in step 6.2 above follow the handle you are dragging.
All of the elements belonging to the selected local handle’s 2-D domain are affected by moving that
local handle.
The 2-D domain’s non-selected local handles act like anchors (they do not move).
The nodes on the edge domains and between any two non-selected local domains do not move.
None of the elements in the other 2-D domain are affected.
10. Release the mouse button to complete the morphing operation.
Figure 6: Example result of morphing the model
11. Click undo.
The HyperMorph module allows for multiple levels of undo and redo for all morphing operations. This
functionality is available for any particular HyperMesh session and its current model as long as the
session and its model remain open.
12. Click to clear the selected handles.
13. With the handles selector active, select one or more global handles.
14. Click morph.
15. Click on and drag any global handle to morph the part.
Summary
The following occurs as the selected global handle is moved:

The handles selected in Step 6.2 above follow the handle you are dragging.
The non-selected global handles act like anchors (they do not move).
All of the elements, local handles and edge domains are affected.

Exercise: Increasing the Gauge Thickness of the Spring Wire
In this tutorial, you will use domains and handles to increase the gauge thickness.
Figure 1: Before and after morphing

Open the HyperMesh file, spring.hm.
Step 2: Change the gauge thickness.

1. Click the Morphing menu and pick Create > Domains.
2. Switch domain type to 2D domains.
3. Verify elements toggle is set to all elements.
4. Verify that only the partition 2D domains option is active.
5. Click create.
6. Click the Morphing menu and pick Morph. Enter the alter dimensions subpanel if not already there.
7. Change the morphing method to radius.

8. Change the center calculation to by normals.
9. Keep all the other settings.
10. For domains (under edge and 2D) select the 2D domain and the two edge domains as shown in
Figure 2.
Figure 2: Domains to select for altering the gauge radius
When the circular edge domain is selected, the radius box populates with the current radius value.
11. In the radius field, type 12.
12. Click morph.
Summary
The gauge thickness of the spring wire is changed from 7.5 to 12.0.

Exercise: Changing the Radius of the Spring Coil
In this exercise, you will increase the radius of the spring coil.

Open the HyperMesh file, spring.hm.
Step 2: Change the coil radius.

2. Switch domain type to 2D domains.
3. Verify that the elements toggle is set to all elements.
4. Verify that only the partition 2D domains option is active.
5. Click create.
6. Click the Morphing menu and pick Morph. Enter the alter dimensions subpanel if not already there.

7. Change the morphing method to radius.
8. Change the center calculation to by axis.
9. Change the axis to the z-axis.
Figure 2: Domains and base node to select for altering the coil radius
10. For domains (under edge and 2D) select the 2-D domain and the two edge domains.
11. For the base node for the z-axis select the node as shown in Figure 2.
12. Keep the default settings for the remaining options.
13. Activate add to current.
14. In the radius field, type 20.
15. Click morph.
Summary
Twenty units are added to the coil radius.

Objective
Use morphing to change the thickness of the middle layers of a four-layered solid, while maintaining the
thickness of the outer layers.
Tools
Domains will be created using 3D domains > by component. Thickness will be altered using alter
dimensions.

Step 1: Open the file.
1. Open the file, Morph_Adhesive_Layers.hm.
Step 2: Create domains and handles.

2. Switch the domain type to 3D domains.
3. Toggle the element selector to all elements.
4. Activate the divide by comps and partition 2D domains options. The panel should appear as in the
following image:
5. Click create to create the domains.
6. Click return to exit the Domains panel.
Step 3: Display only the morph faces of interest.

1. Using the Model Browser, hide all the components except ^morphface.
2. Mask all ^morphface elements except those on the outer layer and the layer between the Outer comp
and the Adhesive_Outer to leave all the elements shown in the following image.
HINT: Select a couple of elements on the face you want to keep. Select elements >> by face, and then
select elements >> reverse. This will reverse the selection to the elements you do not want and will
allow you to mask those elements with the mask button.

3. To reduce the number of domains and handles shown on the screen, click the Mask tab.
4. Click the + next to Morphing to expand it.
5. Click the + in the Show column for Local Domains/Handles to display the domains and handles for
only the displayed elements.
6. Hide the ^morphface component in the Model Browser.
Step 4: Increase the thickness of the outer adhesive layer by 5 units.

1. Click the Morphing menu and pick Morph to open the Morph panel.
2. Open the alter dimensions subpanel.
3. Change the dimension type to radius.
4. Activate the add to current checkbox.
5. For domains, select the curved edge domains as well as the 2-D domains representing the curved

surfaces as seen in the following image.
6. Set the center calculation to by axis.
7. For the axis, use the z-axis.
8. For B select the temp node that represents the center of the cylinder.
9. In radius= box, change value to 5 units.
10. Click morph.
11. Go to the save shape subpanel.
12. For name= enter sh1.
13. Switch to as node perturbations.
14. Click save.
15. Click undo all to revert back to the original model configuration.
16. Show all components except the ^morphface component.
17. Go to the apply shapes subpanel.
18. For shapes select sh1.
19. Click select.
20. Click animate.
This takes you to the Deformed Shape panel.
21. Change the animation scale from model units to scale factor.
22. Set the scale factor to 1.
23. Click linear to start the animation.
24. Once you are done viewing your animation and verifying that it is as intended, you can return to the main
panel area.

With this step you have successfully completed morphing one of the middle layers of the four-layer model.
Optional: Using the process shown above, increase the thickness of Adhesive_Inner component by 5
units.

Objective
Use morphing to create multiple configurations of a model.
Tools
Domains, morph
Figure 1: Tube to morph
Step 1: Open the file.

1. Open the file, tube.hm.

1. From the menu bar, click Morphing > Create > Domains.
2. Go to the create subpanel.
3. Switch the domain type to 3D domains.
5. Activate the partition 2D domains option.
6. Click create.
Step 3: Partition the outer domain.

1. Make sure you are still in the domains > create sub panel.
2. In the Model Browser, hide the component solid.

3. Using the Mask panel ( ), display only the outer elements of the component ^morphfaces.
HINT: Select a couple of elements on the face you want to keep. Select elements >> by face, and then
select elements >> reverse. This will reverse the selection to the elements you do not want and will
allow you to mask those elements with the mask button.
4. Click return to return to the domains panel.
7. Click the + in the Show column for the Local Domains/Handles to display the domains and handles for
8. Change your view to a left view.
9. Change the domain type to 2D domains.
10. Change the elements selector from all elements to elems.
11. Select the elements as displayed in the following picture.
Figure 2: Elements to partition
12. Click create to create the new domain.
Step 4: Increase the outer diameter of the middle section of the tube.
1. Click Morphing > Morph to open the Morph panel.
2. Go to the alter dimensions subpanel.

3. Set the dimension type to radius.
4. Set the center calculation to by edges.
5. Switch the mesh to wireframe.
6. Select the two edge domains and the 2D domain as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3: Select the follow ing Edge and 2D domains.
7. Set the radius= value to 27.
8. Click morph to morph the part.
9. Remain in this panel for the next section.
Figure 4: New profile of the part
Step 5: Offset the inner diameter of the tube.
1. Click unmask all to display all the elements.

2. Use the Mask panel to display only the tube inner elements of the component ^morphfaces.
HINT: Select a couple of elements on the face you want to keep. Select elements by face followed by
elements reverse. This will reverse the selection to the elements you do not want and will allow you to
mask out those elements.
3. Click return to return to the domains panel.
6. Click the + in the Show column for the Local Domains/Handles to display the domains and handles for
7. Select domains >> displayed. This selects the two inner edge domains as well as the 2D domain for
the tube inner.
Figure 6: edge domains on the inner radius
8. Change the center calculation: to by axis.
9. For the axis, switch to the y-axis.
10. For base point, select the temp node at the center of the tube arc.
11. For radius= enter 3.
12. Check add to current.
13. Click morph to morph the inner diameter of the tube.

Figure 7: Tube w ith offset inner
Summary
Using morphing operations, dimension changes have been successfully performed on a tubular mesh.

Exercise: Using Cyclical Symmetry to Assist in the Morphing of a Bottle
In this exercise you will create a dome shape at the bottom of the bottle using morph volumes.

Open the HyperMesh file bottle.hm

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes.
2. Switch create morphvol to create matrix.
3. Set:
x density = 3
y density = 8
z density = 5

buffer % = 5
5. Toggle global system to local system.
6. For syst, select the system located at the top of the bottle.
7. Use the default values for the remaining settings.
8. Click create to create the morph volumes.
Note that morph volumes are created, encompassing the bottle, with red colored handles created at the
corners of each morph volume.
Step 3: Create symmetry.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create >Symmetries:
2. Under domain, activate morph volumes.
Symmetries can either be linked to domains or to morph volumes. Here you are associating the
symmetries to the morph volumes.
3. Change 1 plane to cyclical.
4. Change 180 degrees to set freq.
5. Set # of cycles to 8.
6. For syst select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.
7. Click create.
Note that a cyclical symmetry is created.
Step 4: Create the dome.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes, and then select the update edges
subpanel.
2. Toggle update nodes to update ends.
3. Change the view to the bottom view by selecting the XY Bottom Plane View .
4. Verify that the options by edges and free are selected (see image below).

5. Using the image below as reference, select the line to the left of the tangency at the top of the center
circle.
Figure 2: Updating tangencies, selecting line
6. After selecting the line, select the tangency (shown below).
Figure 3: Updating tangencies, select tangency
Notice that after selecting the tangency, the two arrows are replaced with a single arrow.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 on the three other tangencies shown in the image below:

Figure 4: Updating tangencies, additional tangencies to update
8. When finished, click return to exit the panel.
9. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph and then select the move handles subpanel:
10. Select the handles at the bottom of the bottle, as shown in Figure 5.
Figure 3: Handles to translate
11. Switch the morphing method from interactive to translate.
12. Switch to along xyz
13. Set z val = 10
14. Click morph.
Since you have symmetries defined, translating a single handle on the inner ring at the bottom, ensures
that a similar behavior is imparted on all the handles symmetrically associated to it.
15. To reduce the number of domains and handles shown on the screen, click the Mask tab. If this isn’t
displayed, select View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Mask.

16. Click the - in the Hide column to turn off the display of all morphing entities.
17. Rotate the model to view the changes made.
Figure 6: Morphed model
Summary
Using morph volumes with appropriate tangencies, and by creating symmetries you are able to create a
dome-shaped feature at the bottom of the bottle.
Remarks
There are four different methods to define the continuity between the morph volumes.
Free makes morph volume edges independent of other edges.
Fixed connectivity allows you to prescribe the angle at the end of an edge.
Master-slave maintains tangency between two morph volume edges while keeping the master edge
independent of the slave edge. (When the master edge moves, the slave edge follows, but when the
slave edge moves, the master edge does not have to follow.)
Continuous maintains tangency between two morph volume edges while allowing both edges to

affect each other.
The default setting in morph volume is always set to tangent which is continuous edge connectivity. This
definition can always be changed in the update edges subpanel, based upon the morphing needs.

Exercise: Creating a Circular Bead on the Bottle
Figure 1: Adding beads to the bottle
In this exercise you will first create a bead using the default continuous edge connectivity. You will then
update the edges to free and see how it affects the bead creation.

Open the HyperMesh file bottle.hm

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes.
2. Switch create morphvol to create matrix.
3. Set:

x density = 3
y density = 8
z density = 5
buffer % = 5
5. Toggle global system to local system.
6. For syst, select the system located at the top of the bottle.
7. Use the default values for the remaining settings.
8. Click create to create the morph volumes.
Note that morph volumes are created encompassing the bottle, with red colored handles created at the
corners of each morph volume.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create, >Symmetries.
2. Under domain, activate morph volumes.
Symmetries can either be linked to domains or to morph volumes. In this case, you are associating the
symmetries to the morph volumes.
3. Change 1 plane to cyclical.
4. Change 180 degrees to set freq.
5. Set # of cycles to 8.
6. For syst select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.
7. Click create.
Note that a cyclical symmetry is created.
Step 4: Split the morph volumes.
1. On the toolbar, click XZ Left Plane View .
2. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes, then select the split/combine
subpanel.
3. Set the toggles to split mvols and by edges.
4. Set single split to 0.8.

5. Select an edge of Morph Volume 1 (Figure 2).
6. Click split.
7. Set single split to 0.2.
8. Select an edge of Morph Volume 2 (Figure 2).
9. Click split.
Figure 2: Splitting morph volumes
Step 5: Morph the part.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph, then select the move handles subpanel.
2. Switch the morphing method from interactive to translate.
3. Switch the translate option to along xyz.
4. Set x-val = -5.0.
5. For system =, select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.
6. Select a handle as shown in figure 3.
7. Click morph.

Figure 3: Selecting a handle for morphing
As the bead is created, the upper and lower portions of the bottle deform too (figure 4). This is not the
intention, as you want to create a bead without affecting the other parts of the bottle.

Figure 4: Morphing using continuous morph volumes
8. Click undo to undo the morphing operation.
Step 6: Update the morph volume edges.

To stop this bulging effect of the upper and the lower portions of the bottle, you will use the free edge
connectivity between these morph volumes.
1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes, and then select the update edges
subpanel.
2. Toggle update nodes to update ends.
3. Switch edge tangency to free.
4. Update the edges, working your way around the bottle (see figures 5 and 6 below).

Figure 5: Selecting edges to update the tangencies
Figure 6: Changing the tangencies from continuous to free

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph, then select the move handles subpanel.
2. Verify that the morphing method is translate.
3. Switch the translate option to along xyz.
4. Set x-val = -5.0.
5. For system =, select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.
6. Select the handle as shown previously in figure 3.
7. Click morph.

Figure 7: Bead created w ith free edge connectivity
Summary
Using morph volumes with appropriate tangencies and symmetries you were able to create a bead on the
given bottle.

Objective
Update the mesh to a new geometry quickly using symmetry.
Tools
3-D domains, symmetry, interactive morphing.
Figure 1: Mesh to morph
Step 1: Load the model.

1. From the menu bar, select File > Open > Model and load the file fe_only.hm.
2. From the menu bar, select File > Import > Geometry and load the file new_design.igs.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Domains.
2. Switch the domain type from global domains to 3D domains.

4. Activate the partition 2D domains option.
5. Click create to create the domains.
6. Select return to exit the panel.
Step 3: Create symmetries.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Symmetries to enter the Symmetry panel.
2. Switch the symmetry type to cyclical.
3. Switch the symmetry angle from 180 degrees to set freq.
4. Set the # of cycles to 18.
5. Click syst.
6. Select the center point of the gear.
7. Click domains >> all.
8. Click create.
9. Click return.
Step 4: Morph the mesh to the new geometry.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Morph , then select the move handles subpanel.
2. Zoom in to one of the cogs of the gear as in the following image:

Figure 2: Mesh, domains handles and the new geometry
3. Switch the morphing method to move to point.
4. With from: handle active, select the node depicted in the following image.
5. With to: point active, select the point on the geometry you want to move the handle to, as depicted in
the following image:
Figure 3: Morphing handle to point
As the handles are moved, you will see that the mesh starts conforming to the new geometry.
Figure 4: Mesh mapped onto the new geometry
6. In the same manner, move the following handles:

Figure 5: Handles to map
7. Return to the main menu.
Figure 6: Updated (morphed) mesh
Summary
Notice how each cog on the gear is updated. Taking advantage of the symmetry in this part, you are able to
morph it much quicker.


Exercise: Morphing a Yoke via Morph Volumes and Shapes
In this exercise you will increase the diameter of one of the prongs of a yoke using morph volumes. You will
reflect the shape on to the other prong and finally position the combined shapes from one yoke to the other.
Figure 1: Yoke model

1. Open the HyperMesh file yoke.hm.
2. In the Model Browser, right-click components yoke_1 and yoke_2, then select Hide.
Step 2: Convert hexas to morph volume.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes, then select the convert subpanel.
2. Select elems >> by collector.
3. Select hexas.
4. Click select.
5. Click convert.
Figure 2: Converting hexas volumes to morph volumes
Note that all the seven hexa elements are converted into morph volumes.
Step 3: Increase the prong diameter.

1. In the Model Browser, right-click Tag and select Show to display all the tags.
2. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Morph, then select the move handles subpanel.
3. Set the mode selector to move to node.
4. Click options and make sure mvols: is set to active (toggle if it is set to inactive).
5. Click return.
6. For handle, click Handle 1, and for node, click tag 1’.
7. Repeat this process for the other 35 handles.

Figure 3: Using tags to change the morph volumes
Step 4: Save the morphed shape.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Shapes, then select the save as shape subpanel.
2. For name = enter Prong1.
3. Toggle as handle perturbations to as node perturbations.
4. Click create and select Yes to the message which appears.
5. Click undo all to bring the model to its original position before morphing.
Step 5: Create coordinate system.

You need to reference a coordinate system in order to create symmetry.
1. In the Model Browser, right-click and select Hide for Shape and Morphing Volume. Right click on
yoke_1 and select Show.
2. From the menu bar, select Geometry > Create > Systems > Axis Direction to open the Systems
panel, create by axis direction subpanel.

3. Click origin and select the node labeled "origin."
4. For X-axis, select the node labeled "X."
5. For XY plane, select the node labeled "Y."
6. Click create.
7. Click return.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Symmetries.
2. For name =, enter symm1.
3. Under domains, click the check-box for morph volumes. (make sure it is active).
4. Keep the rest of the default settings.
5. Click syst and select the newly created coordinate system.
6. Click create.
7. Click return.
Step 7: Reflect shape.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Shapes.
2. Change the subpanel to apply shapes.
3. Under shapes, change apply shapes to reflect shapes.
4. Change apply only to apply & create.
5. Keep the default auto-envelope.
6. Click shapes and select the newly created shape from the previous section.
7. Under reflect using: click symmetries and select the newly created symmetry.
8. Click reflect.

Note that a reflected shape has been created and applied on the other prong.
The name of the shape, created by reflecting, has the same name as the original shape with a suffix
“1.”
Step 8: Position the shapes onto the other yoke.

In this step, you will position the shapes of the two prongs of the yoke onto the opposite yoke.
1. In the Model Browser, right-click Title and select Show.
2. In the Model Browser right-click yoke_2 and click Show.
3. In the apply shapes subpanel, under shapes, change reflect shapes to position shapes.
4. Change the selector from scale to no scale.
5. Click shapes and select the two shapes present in the model.
6. Under from: select the three nodes named from_N1, from_N2 and from_N3 for N1, N2 and N3.
7. Under to: select the three nodes named to_N1, to_N2 and to_N3 for N1, N2 and N3.
8. Click position.
9. Click return.

Note that the two or more shapes have been created and applied to the other yoke. The name of the first
new shape (on the other yoke) will have a suffix “2” because it is the second copy of the first shape and
the second shape will have a suffix of “11” as it is the first copy of the reflected shape.

Exercise: Using Shapes to Interpolate Loads
Shapes are one of the most versatile types of the morphing entities. Loads can be converted into shapes and
vice versa. When you position shapes, they act on a volume equivalent to the initial volume, but at the new
location. In this regard, shapes can be used to interpolate loads on a mesh given the loading at the
boundaries of a volume.
In this exercise you are given a temperature distribution at points defined by a cube (hexa element). You will
use shapes to interpolate the temperatures to the tube lying inside the cube.

Figure 1: Model

Open the HyperMesh file s_bend_tube.hm.
Step 2: Convert temperatures to shapes.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Shapes, then select the convert subpanel.
2. Switch the conversion type to temperature to shapes.
3. For loadcols, select temperature.
4. Click select.
5. Click convert.
Figure 2: The base and the node for translating the shape
Note that the temperature loads have been converted into shape vectors.
The shape vectors are proportional to the temperature loads on the corners of the cube and the distances
from those corners.
The name of the converted shape is the same as the temperature load collector.
Step 3: Translate the shape.

1. Click the apply shapes subpanel.

2. Change the operation to translate shapes.
3. Change apply only to create new.
4. For envelope, use auto-envelope.
5. For shapes, select temperature.
6. Click select.
7. For from: base, select the node shown in Figure 2.
8. For to: nodes, select the node shown in Figure 2.
9. Click translate.
The shape has been transferred to the tube. You selected the same base and to node, effectively
selecting a translate distance of 0.
A new shape is created with the suffix 1 (temperature1).
Step 4: Convert shape vectors to temperature loads.

1. Click the convert subpanel.
2. Switch the conversion type to shapes to temperatures.
3. For shapes, select temperature1.
4. Click select.
5. Click convert.
The shape has been converted into temperature load.
Step 5: Check the result.

1. In the Model Browser, right-click and select Hide for Shape.
2. In the Model Browser, right-click component cube and select Hide.
3. In the Model Browser, right-click LoadCollector and select Hide.
4. From the BCs menu, select BCs Contour.
Make sure you expand the BCs contour panel appropriately to visualize all the buttons.
5. From the list of loads, select temperature1.
6. Click Accept.
This takes you to the contour panel.
7. Select simulation = temperature1.
8. Select data type = Temperature.

9. Click contour.
Figure 3: The contoured temperature results
Summary
Using shapes you have been able to interpolate temperatures from the corners of a volume on to an object
located in that volume.

Exercise: Recording Shapes
The Record panel gives you the flexibility of making changes to the mesh using panels outside the
HyperMorph module and saving them as shapes.
In this exercise you will change a bead using the Node Edit > align node subpanel and record the shape
function. You will then reflect the shape to the other side of the mesh to complete the mesh update.
Figure 1: Location to record the nodal movements on and reflect

Open the HyperMesh file floor.hm.
Step 2: Start recording nodal movements.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Free Hand, then select the record subpanel.
2. Click start.
3. Click return.

Step 3: Change the bead profile.
1. From the menu bar, select Geometry > Edit >Nodes > Align to enter the align node subpanel.
2. Select the nodes shown below for the 1st end and 2nd end.
Figure 2: first set of nodes to align
3. Select the nodes between the selected nodes to align the nodes to the 1st end: and 2nd end: nodes.
4. Repeat the same process to align the next row of nodes (figure 3).
Figure 3: Second set of nodes to align
5. Select the nodes between the selected nodes to align the nodes to the 1st end and 2nd end nodes.
6. Repeat the same process to align the next row of nodes (figure 4).

Figure 4: Third set of nodes to align
Step 4: Stop the recording.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Free Hand, then select the record subpanel.
2. Click finish.
This stops the record process.

2. Set name= Morph1.
3. Toggle save option to as node perturbations.
4. Click save.
Step 6: Create coordinate system.

1. From the menu bar select Geometry > Create > Systems > Axis Direction.
2. For origin select the node with tag or i gi n.
For x-axis select the node with tag x-axis.
For xy-plane select the node with xy-plane.
3. Click create.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Symmetries.
2. Set name = symm1.
3. For symmetry type use 1 plane.
4. For align with use x-axis.
5. Select the syst created in step 4.
6. Click create.
Note that 1 plane symmetry is created with a square symbol.
Step 8: Reflect shape.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Shapes, then select the apply shapes subpanel.
2. Under shape change the option to reflect shapes.
3. Under reflect shapes change the option to apply & create.
4. For shape, select Morph1.
5. For symmetries, select symm1.
6. Click reflect.
Summary
The shape (Morph1) is reflected to the other side. Also, the reflected shape has the same name with the
suffix 1. The changes that you made on one side are thus transferred to the other side.

Exercise: Using Morph Constraints to Keep the Area of a Windshield Constant

while Changing its Shape
In this exercise will change the shape of the windshield while keeping its area constant.
Figure 1: Windshield mesh

Open the HyperMesh file windshield.hm.
Step 2: Create a shape to define the degree of freedom for the mesh.
1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Free Hand and select the move nodes subpanel.
2. Switch the method to translate.
3. Key in
x = 0;
Y = -5 (negative 5);
Z= 0

4. Under moving nodes: click nodes >> by sets and select move_node.
5. Click select.
6. Under fixed nodes: click nodes >> by sets and select fix_node.
7. Click select.
8. Under affected elements: click elems >> displayed.
9. Click morph.
11. For name =, enter Shape1.
12. Toggle the save option to as node perturbations.
13. Click save.
This initial shape defines the direction in which the nodes have the freedom to move, as the shape of the
windshield is changing, thus enabling us to keep the area at a constant.
Step 3: Create a constraint.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Morph Constraints.
2. Set name = const1.
3. Change the constraint type to area.
4. For shapes, select Shape1.
6. Switch the area option to equal to.
7. Click calculate to calculate the area of the mesh:
Note that the value shows in the area box is: 1.085e+06.
This is the actual surface area of the windshield which will be maintained.
8. Click create.
Note that the constraint is created. The symbol for the constraint is a matching-mesh.
9. Right-click Shape and select Hide in the Model Browser.
10. Right-click MorphingConstraint and select Hide in the Model Browser.
Step 4: Create morph volume.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes.

2. Switch the method to create morphvol.
3. Toggle entity type to enclose elems.
5. Toggle coordinate system to global system.
6. Click create.
The morph volume is created.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph and select the move handles subpanel.
2. Change the morph type to move to node.
3. For from: handle, select handle1 (Figure 2).
4. For from: node, select node1 (Figure 2).
5. Repeat the process for the other handles and nodes.
Figure 2: From handles and from nodes

1. Click the save shape radio button.
2. Set name = Shape2.
3. Toggle the save option to as node perturbations.
4. Click save.

Step 7: Check the result.
1. Right-click MorphingVolume in the Model Browser and select Hide.
2. On the Tool page, go to the mass calc panel.
3. For comps, select windshield.
4. Click select.
5. Click calculate.
The final area of the windshield is 1.085e+06, which is the same as the initial area. So, even though the
profile of the windshield has changed, its area has not. As the height of the windshield reduced, it
expanded in the direction provided by Shape1.
Summary
Using morph constraints, you able to change the shape of the windshield, while keeping its area constant.

Exercise: Using Limiting Constraints and Freehand Morphing to Position a Dummy

and Morph the Seat
In this exercise, you will learn to position the H-point of the dummy on a seat cushion.
This helps to reduce design and remeshing of the seat based on the pre-stress analysis. To do this exercise
you will be using a limiting constraint and freehand morphing.
Figure 1

Open the HyperMesh file dummy.hm
Step 2: Create constraints.

2. Set name= const1.
3. Set type of constraint to on elements.
4. Set the option under nodes to bounded.
5. Set project along: to normal.
6. Set distance= 2.
This will ensure that there is a distance of 2 units between the dummy and the seat after the morphing is
complete.
7. Use nodes >> by collector and select cushion.
8. Click select.

9. Use elems >> by collector and select dummy.
10. Click select.
11. Click create.
Constraints with a diamond shape are created.

1. Right-click MorphingConstraint in the Model Browser and select Hide.
2. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Free Hand and select the move nodes subpanel.
3. Switch moving method to translate.
4. For moving nodes, use nodes >> by collector and select cushion.
5. Click select.
6. For fixed nodes, use nodes >> by collector and select dummy.
7. Click select.
8. For affected elements, use elems >> by collector and select cushion.
9. Click select.
10. For the translate magnitude, set
x=0
y=0
z = 80
11. Click morph.
The top surface of the cushion has conformed to the shape of the dummy.
The distance between the dummy and the seat-cushion is 2 mm.
Summary
Using limiting constraints, you are able to move a mesh such that it moves an adjoining mesh along with it,
thus preventing penetration between the two of them.

Exercise: Using Cluster Constraints to Preserve the Wheel Shape while

Lengthening the Body of a Truck
When circular features are stretched, they become elliptical in shape. In some cases as in the wheels of a
truck, this effect is not desirable. In such cases, using cluster constraints will allow you to translate the
features, along with the morph, while maintaining its circular shape.
In the exercise you will be changing the length of the cab while preserving the shape of the wheel. To
facilitate the morphing process you will be employing constraint and symmetry.
Figure 1: Truck model

Open the HyperMesh file truck.hm.
Step 2: Create a coordinate system.

1. Using the menu bar select Geometry > Create > Systems > Axis Direction.
2. For origin select the node with tag or i gi n.
3. For x-axis, select node with tag x - ax i s .
4. For xy-plane, select node with x y - pl ane.
5. Click create to create the coordinate system.
6. On the toolbar, select XZ Right Plane View ( )

Step 3: Create and split the morph volume.
1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes.
2. Switch the creation method to create morphvol.
3. Set entity type to enclose elements.
5. Set system to global system.
6. Set buffer % = 5.
The morph volume is created.
7. Click create to create the morph volume.
8. Click the split/combine subpanel.
9. Toggle the operation to split mvols.
10. Toggle to split the morph volume by edges.
11. Toggle the type of split to single split.
12. Set single split = 0.44.
13. Select the morph volume in the graphics window.
14. Click split to split the morph volume.
The original morph volume is now split into two morph volumes.
Step 4: Create a Symmetry.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Symmetries:
2. For name =, enter symm1.
3. Under domain, check the box for morph volumes.
Symmetry can be linked to either domains or morph volumes. In this exercise since you are dealing with
morph volumes you will use the check to link the symmetry to the morph volume.
4. Switch the symmetry type to 1 plane.
5. For syst, select the coordinate system created in step 4.2.
6. Click create to create the symmetry.
A 1 plane symmetry with a square symbol has been created.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph, then click the move handles subpanel.
2. Switch the morphing mode to translate.
3. Switch the along option to along xyz.
4. Set the following values:
X val = 500
Y val = 0
Z val = 0
5. Select two handles as shown in figure 3.
6. Click morph to morph the front half of the truck.
Figure 2
The front end is stretched 500 units. Since the front wheels are also the part of the morph volumes they
became elliptical after morphing. This is not desirable. You will undo this morphing, constrain the wheels
and re-do it.

Figure 3
7. Undo all morphs.
Step 6: Create a cluster constraint.

As seen in the previous image, the front wheels, after morphing, become elliptical. To fix this issue, you will
be employing a particular type of constraint, called a cluster constraint, which helps to keep the original
shape of a portion of the model while morphing.
2. Set name = const1.
3. Switch the constraint type to cluster.
4. Select nodes >> by collector .
5. Select comps >> by id.
6. Use id = 1-8 and then hit Enter on the keyboard.
7. Click select to select the components.
8. Click create to create the cluster constraint.
The cluster constraints are created on the nodes of the selected components.

Figure 4
10. In the Model Browser, right-click MorphingConstraint and click Hide to turn off the constraints.

Repeat the procedure in Step 5 to morph the front of the truck by 500 units.
The front end is stretched 500 mm. The front wheels are moved in the morphing process while
maintaining their circular shape.
Summary
Using cluster constraints and morph volumes you are able to stretch the cab of the pickup without distorting
the wheels.

Exercise: Remeshing Domains After Morphing
Depending on the morphing being performed, there is a possibility that the mesh can get distorted. For such
cases, HyperMorph provides a remeshing capability. The advantage of this remeshing is that the newly
created elements are automatically a part of the original domain. This provides continuity to the morphing
process along with proper element quality.
Figure 1: Model

Open the HyperMesh file arm2D.hm.
Step 2: Set the morph options.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Assign > Morph Options.
2. Select the auto qa subpanel.
3. Switch auto quality check to 2D jacobian.
4. Set limit = to 0.7.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Domains.
2. Switch the creation type to 2D domains.
3. Switch from all elems to elems.

4. Use elems >> by sets and select s et _1.
5. Click select.
7. Use elems >> by sets and select s et _2.
8. Click select.
Note that two 2D domains are created.
Step 4: Translate the washer.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph, then select move handles.
2. Switch the mode to translate.
3. Switch the along option to along vector.
4. Select N1 and N2 as shown in figure 2.
Figure 2: Selecting N1 and N2 for the translate vector
5. Set dist = 0.25.
6. Select the two handles on the washer.
7. Click morph to morph the washer.
The elements outside the washer get compressed as the washer moves. Also, as the elements fail

(jacobian < 0.7) they are highlighted (figure 3).
Figure 3: Elements after morphing
Step 5: Remesh the domain.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Domains and then select the update subpanel.
2. Select the update subpanel.
3. Switch the update option to remesh 2D/3D.
4. Switch new mesh type: to quads.
5. Select both 2-D domains on the model.
6. Click calc avg to get the average element size.
7. Click remesh to remesh the domain.
Figure 5: Updated mesh
The mesh is updated.

Summary
Using this technique, you can update the mesh in regions that might have undergone excessive elemental
deformation during morphing. Since the domains and handles are maintained, it allows you to conduct further
morphing if need be.

Analysis Setup

HM-4070: OptiView

Create constraints (RADIOSS SPC) on the channel’s geometry lines
Create a force (RADIOSS FORCE) on the bracket to simulate a pressing load on it
Define a load step (RADIOSS SUBCASE)
Export the model to a RADIOSS bulk data input file
Submit the RADIOSS bulk data input file to RADIOSS
Review the resulting HTML report file
The purpose for using a finite element (FE) pre-processor is to create a model, which can be run by a solver.
A finite element solver can solve for responses of parts to loading conditions on them. The loads can be in
the form of boundary constraints, forces, pressures, temperatures, etc.
In this exercise, you will gain an understanding of the basic concepts for creating a solver input file by using
a template. More specifically, learn how to define loading conditions on a model, specify solver specific
controls and submit an input file to a solver from HyperMesh.
Exercise: Setting up Loading Conditions
This exercise uses the model file, channel_brkt_assem_loading.hm. It contains the bracket and
channel assembly in the following image.
Step 1: Retrieve and view the HyperMesh model file,

channel_brkt_assem_loading.hm.

Step 2: Load the RADIOSS (Bulk Data) user profile.
1. From the Preferences menu, click User Profiles.
2. Select RADIOSS.
3. From the drop down, select BulkData.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.
Step 3: Create two load collectors named pressing_load and constraints.

1. From within the Model Browser right click and select Create > Load Collector.
2. For Name: enter pressing_load.
3. Set Card image: to none if it is not.
4. Select your desired color by clicking on the active color.
5. Click Create to create the load collector pressing_load.
6. Repeat steps 1 – 5 and create another load collector called constraints.
Step 4: Apply constraints (RADIOSS SPC) to the channel’s line geometry.
1. In the Views folder in the Model Browser click next to View2 to se a User Defined view.
Note: Setting this view will set Component & Load Collectors displays back to what they were when the
view was saved. The load collectors that we created in step 3 are now turned off because they did
not exist when the view was saved. You will need to turn these back on to see the display of the
BCs when you create them in the next steps.
2. Use the Model Browser to display the geom ( ) for the load collectors pressing_load and
constraints.
3. Use the Model Browser to display the geom ( ) for the component channel.
4. Use the menu bar to enter the Constraints panel by selecting BCs > Create > Constraints.
5. Go to the create subpanel, if not already selected.
6. Switch the entity selector to lines using the down arrow on the left side of the yellow entity button.
7. Select the six lines on the perimeter of the channel’s bottom surface as shown in the following image.

8. Activate degrees of freedom (dof) 1 through 6.
For a RADIOSS linear static analysis, dof 1, 2, and 3 represent translations in the global x-, y-, and z-
directions respectively. Dof 4, 5, and 6 represent rotations about the global x-, y- and z-axis,
respectively.
9. Set load types = to SPC.
10. Click create to create the constraints on the lines.
11. For size = enter 5.
The display size of the constraints is reduced.
12. Activate the option, label constraints.
A label is displayed for each constraint. The labels identify what dofs are assigned to the constraints.
Step 5: Map the constraints (RADIOSS SPC) on the geometry lines to the channel
nodes associated to the lines.
1. Access the Loads on geom panel from the menu bar by selecting BCs > Loads on Geometry.
2. Select loadcols >> constraints.
3. Click select to complete the selection of load collectors.
4. Click map loads.
A constraint is at each node associated to the geometry lines.

6. On the Model browser, turn off the display of geometry for all component collectors.
Step 6: Prepare to create forces (RADIOSS FORCE) on the bracket for the pressing
load case.
1. In the Views folder in the Model Browser click next to View3 to see a User Defined view.
2. On the Model Browser, right-click on the pressing_load load collector and select Make Current.
The pressing_load load collector is now the current load collector, and any loads created will be placed
in this collector.
Step 7: Create two forces (RADIOSS FORCE) on the bracket for the pressing load
case.
1. Access the Forces panel through the menu bar by selecting BCs > Create > Forces.
3. With the nodes selector active, select the two nodes as indicated in the following image.
4. For magnitude =, enter 5.
5. Switch the direction selector from N1, N2, N3 to y-axis.
6. Set load types = to Force.
7. Click create to create the forces.
8. For magnitude % = specify 200.0.

The display size of the force is increased.
9. Activate the option label loads.
Each force displays the label FORCE = 5.00e+00.
The tw o forces created for the pressing load case
Step 8: Define the load step for the pressing load case.
1. Access the LoadSteps panel through the menu bar by selecting Setup > Create > LoadSteps.
2. For name =, enter pressing_step.
3. Activate the SPC and LOAD options.
4. Click the "=" next to SPC.
5. In the lower right corner, switch name to name(id).
This shows the names of the load collectors with their ID numbers in parenthesis.
6. Select the constraints load collector.
Note that the field next to the = now has a value of 2, which is the ID of the constraints load collector.
7. Click the = next to LOAD and select the pressing_load load collector.
8. Set the type: to linear static.

9. Click create to create the load step, pressing_step.
Step 9: Display and mask the load step (the load collectors defined in the load
step).
1. Using the Model Browser, turn the display of the load step pressing_step off.
Notice the load collectors constraints and pressing_load are no longer displayed.
2. Turn the display of the load step pressing_step back on.

Create a solver input file by using a template
Review entities in HyperMesh to see how they will appear in the solver input file
Define materials and properties
Select solver element types for HyperMesh element configurations
The purpose for using a finite element (FE) pre-processor is to create a model that can be run by a solver.
HyperMesh interfaces with many FE solvers and all of them have unique input file formats. HyperMesh has a
unique template(s) for each solver it supports. A template contains solver specific formatting instructions,
which HyperMesh uses to create an input file for that solver.
Exercise: RADIOSS Linear Statics Setup for a Shell Assembly
This exercise uses the file, channel_brkt_assem_Analysis.hm. It contains the bracket and channel
assembly in the following image.
Step 1: Retrieve and view the file, channel_brkt_assem_analysis.hm.
Step 2: Load the RADIOSS (Bulk Data) user profile.

1. From the Preferences menu, click User Profiles

2. Select RADIOSS.
3. From the drop-down menu, select BulkData.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.
Step 3: Review a bracket element to identify what type of RADIOSS element it is

and to see how it will be formatted in the RADIOSS input file.
1. Access the Card Editor panel by going to the Collectors toolbar and selecting Card Edit ( ).
3. In the graphics area, select an element of the (blue) bracket.
4. Click edit.
The card image for the element appears above the panel menu area. It indicates the element is a
RADIOSS CQUAD4 or CTRIA3, depending on whether you selected a quad or tria element. EID is the
element’s ID. PID is the ID of the element’s property. G(X) is the grid (node) ID that makes up the
element.
Options specific to the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 appear in the menu panel area.
5. Click return to return to the Card Edit panel.
Step 4: Review and edit the existing steel material’s card image by accessing the
card editor from the Model browser.
This material is defined for the channel.
1. In the Model Browser, open the Material branch of the browser list to show the material steel.
2. Right-click steel and select Card Edit.
The card image for the material appears. It indicates the material is of RADIOSS Bulk Data type MAT1.
3. Under Poisson’s Ratio [NU], change the value from 0.3 to 0.28.
4. Click return to accept the change and return to the main menu.
Step 5: Define a material collector named aluminum for the bracket.

This material is defined for the channel.
1. Right-click in the white space of the Model Browser.
2. Select Create > Material.
The Create material popup dialog appears.
3. For Name: enter aluminum.

4. Set Card image: to MAT1.
5. Make sure Card edit material upon creation is selected.
6. Click Create to create the material and edit it.
The card image for the new material appears.
7. Click [E] and enter 7.0e4 in the field that appears.
This is Young’s Modulus.
8. Click [NU] and enter 0.33 in the field that appears.
This is Poisson's Ratio.
Step 6: Define a property collector (PSHELL card image) that will be assigned to
the channel component collector.
1. On the Collectors toolbar, go to the Properties panel ( ).
3. For prop name=, enter channel.
4. Click type= and select 2D.
5. Click card image= and pick PSHELL.
6. Click material= and select the steel material collector.
7. Click create/edit.
This will open the card editor panel.
8. Click [T] and enter 3.0 into the field that appears.
This will assign a 3.0 unit thickness.
Step 7: Assign the channel property to the channel component.
1. On the Collectors toolbar, go to the Components panel ( ).
2. Go to the assign subpanel.
3. Select comps >> channel.
5. For property=, select channel.

6. Click assign.
Step 8: Update the bracket property to have a PSHELL card image, a thickness of
2.0, and the aluminum material.
1. On the Collectors toolbar, go to the Properties panel ( ).
2. Go to the update subpanel.
3. Select props >> bracket.
5. For card image =, select PSHELL.
6. For material =, select aluminum. (Click the text field to select from the material list.)
7. Click update/edit to load and edit the card image and assign the material.
Notice the material ID MID is 2, which is the ID of the aluminum material you created earlier and
assigned to the bracket component.
8. For the thickness [T] enter 2.0.
9. Click return to return to the Properties panel.
Step 9: Calculate the section properties for the bar elements (RADIOSS CBEAM)
by using HyperBeam.
1. From the menu bar select Properties > HyperBeam.
2. Go to the standard section subpanel.
3. Switch the standard section type: to solid circle.
4. Click create to invoke the HyperBeam module.
The HyperBeam module appears and the HyperMesh session is not visible. (HyperMesh is visible again
upon exiting HyperBeam.)
The solid, green circle represents the cross section. Under the local coordinate system you should see
the number, 20.0000, which is the circle’s diameter.

HyperBeam module w ith the standard solid circle section
5. In the lower left side under Parameter Definition, click in the Value field next to Radius (r) and update
the value to 3.
In the section property display area, the values are automatically updated to reflect the circle’s new
diameter.
6. In the Model tree area, right click on the section’s name, auto_standardsection_1 and select Rename.
7. Rename the section by entering 6mm_Beam_Sect.
8. From the HyperBeam File pull-down menu, select Exit.
Step 10: Create a property collector named bars_prop for the bar elements
(RADIOSS Bulk Data).
1. Create a new property collector by right-clicking in the Model Browser and selecting Create > Property
.
2. Enter the name bars_prop.
3. Set the Card Image: to PBEAM.
4. Click on the Material tab and select Assign material.
5. For Name: select steel.
6. Activate the option Card edit property upon creation.
7. Click Create to create the property and edit it.
8. At the top of the card image, select beamsec >> 6mm_Beam_Sect.

The parameter fields in the PBEAM card are automatically populated by the data in the beam section
6mm_Beam_Sect.
Step 11: Update the CBEAM element to use the PBEAM Property.
1. Access the Properties: assign subpanel.
2. Select elems>>by collector and pick the bolts component collector.
3. Click select.
4. Set type= to 1D.
5. Click property= and select the bars_prop property collector.
6. Click assign.
Step 12: Define a H3D file to be output from RADIOSS by using the control cards
panel.
1. Access the Control Cards panel from the menu bar by selecting Setup > Create > Control Cards
2. Select the control card FORMAT.
You may need to click next to get to the second page of cards.
Notice in the card image the one FORMAT line is set to H3D. This specifies RADIOSS to output results
to a Hyper3D (H3D) file, which can be viewed in HyperView Player. Also, an HTML report file will be
output and the H3D file will be embedded in it.
3. For number_of_formats =, specify 2.
A second FORMAT line appears in the card image.
4. Click H3D in the second line of the card image and select HM.
This specifies RADIOSS to output the results to a HyperMesh binary results file, allowing the results to
be post-processed within HyperMesh.
5. Click return to exit to the Control Cards panel.
Notice the FORMAT button is green. This indicates the card will be exported to the RADIOSS input file.
Step 13: Export the model to an RADIOSS Bulk Data input file.
1. From the menu bar select File > Export > Solver Deck.
2. In the File: field, type channel_brkt_assem_loading.fem.

Note that the extension for an RADIOSS Bulk Data input file is .fem.
3. Click Export to export the model as an RADIOSS .fem input file.
This exports the model as an input file for the solver specified by the current user profile.
Step 14: Review the contents of the file channel_brkt_assem_loading.fem.

1. Using any text editor (Notepad, Wordpad, Vi, etc.), open the file channel_brkt_assem_loading.
fem.
2. Near the top of the file, notice as shown in the following image:
The line FORMAT HM which you specified in HyperMesh
The load step (RADIOSS Bulk Data SUBCASE) named pressing_step which you defined in
HyperMesh
Under the load step, the load collector ids (RADIOSS load and constraint set identification numbers)
3. Search for "FORCE."
Notice the load set identification number for each force (RADIOSS FORCE). It is either 1 or 2 as shown
in the following image. These numbers correspond to the numbers under the load steps in the file.
4. Search for "SPC" (HyperMesh constraint).
Notice the constraint set identification number for each constraint (RADIOSS SPC). It is 2 as shown in
the following image, which lists a few of the constraints. This number corresponds to the number under
the load steps in the file.
5. Search for the load collector name "pressing_load."
Notice the load collectors, pressing_load and constraints. Also, notice their collector ID and color ID.

When the model is imported into HyperMesh, the loads are organized into these load collectors and have
these IDs and colors.
6. Close the file channel_brkt_assem_loading.fem.

With the exercise completed, you can save the model as a HyperMesh file, if desired.

HM-4020: Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties
using HyperBeam
In this tutorial you will learn how to:
Obtain beam section properties for various types of beam cross-sections using HyperBeam, a
module within HyperMesh
Populate the fields of property collectors with these beam properties
Assign the property collector to a beam element you create
In FEA, beams are typically modeled as 1-D elements. This tutorial is particularly useful for becoming
familiar with the modeling of beam sections for 1-D elements (beam, bar, and rod) in HyperMesh. The focus
is on obtaining and assigning beam-section properties, not on creating beam elements themselves.
Exercise: Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties using

HyperBeam
This exercise uses the model file, hyperbeam.hm.
Model geometry
The model geometry represents different types of cross-sections used in this tutorial: standard, shell, and
solid. The model consists of a solid cylinder attached to a hollow trapezoidal structure, which is further joined
to an irregularly shaped solid component (see previous image).

1. Open the file hyperbeam.hm from <installation_directory>\tutorials\hm.
2. From the menu bar select Preferences > User Profiles and select OptiStruct.
3. Click OK.
The model geometry represents different types of cross-sections: standard, shell, and solid. You will create a
standard circular section to represent the cross-section of the cylinder, a shell section created with lines to
represent the cross-section of the hollow trapezoidal feature, and a solid section created with lines to
represent the cross-section of the solid irregular feature.
The model is organized into four collectors: one contains all the surfaces, two contain the lines for the shell-
section and the solid-section, respectively, and the last component stores beam elements.
Step 2: Model a standard circular section using HyperBeam.

In this step, use the standard section subpanel of the HyperBeam panel to quickly model a solid circular
section.
To define a circular cross-section, HyperBeam requires the diameter of the cross-section as input. Measure
the diameter of the section before invoking HyperBeam using the Distance panel from the Geom page.
1. Create three nodes on the circle defining the base of the solid cylinder using the nodes panel from the
Geom page by doing the following:
- From the Geom page, select the nodes panel.
- Select the Extract on Line subpanel.
- With the lines selector active, select the circular line defining the base of the cylinder.
- Set number of nodes = to 3.
- Click create.
This generates three nodes on the line, two of which are located at the same location (since the circular
line is a line that closes upon itself). With the two independent locations left, you can measure the
diameter.

Nodes on circle to measure diameter
2. Use the Distance panel from the Geom page to measure the distance between the two nodes
diametrically opposed by doing the following:
- From the Geom page, select the distance panel.
- Select the two nodes subpanel.
- For N1 and N2, pick the two nodes that are diametrically opposed.
The distance between the two nodes, which is the diameter of the circle, is displayed in the distance =
field and reads 110 units.
3. Create a solid circle standard section in the HyperBeam panel by doing the following:
- Select the HyperBeam panel from the 1D page.
- Select the standard section subpanel.
- Click the switch for standard section type and select the solid circle option from the pop-up menu.
- Click create.
The HyperBeam window launches with a solid circle cross-section displayed in the center pane. The left
pane (HyperBeam view) lists the cross-sections defined in the model and the right pane (Results
window) displays the results for the various beam properties computed for the dimensions displayed.

HyperBeam w indow (standard section)
Note: For detailed information on HyperBeam, see the HyperBeam section in the HyperMesh
User's Guide > Model Setup > Properties online help.
4. Modify the diameter of the cross-section and assign the value measured earlier by doing the following:
- Click the Value field shown for Radius (r) in the Parameter Definition area.
- Type 110 and press ENTER.
The value of the diameter and the quantities computed for the cross-section are updated and displayed in
the Results window. These properties are calculated based on the dimensions that were input. The
formulae for calculating these properties can be found in the Cross-sectional Properties as Calculated by
HyperBeam section in the HyperMesh HyperMesh User's Guide > Model Setup > Properties >
HyperBeam online help.
HyperBeam calculates, for example, the area of this cross-section, its moments of inertia and its
torsional constant.
Note: Alternatively, you could drag the graphical handles that represent the diameter of the cross-section
until the diameter changes to the desired value.
5. Assign the name “Solid Circle” to this cross-section in the HyperBeam view by doing the following:
- In the HyperBeam view, right click the name of the cross-section under the auto1 folder and
select Rename.

- Type Solid Circle and press ENTER.
6. Use the File menu to Exit HyperBeam and return to HyperMesh.
The information that was computed is automatically stored in a beamsect collector with the name you
specified for the section. This beamsect collector is later used to populate the fields of a property card.
Note: Since geometry information was available, this cross-section could have been defined as a solid
section using the solid section subpanel. A standard section was used instead because it did not
require selection, although it required a diameter measurement.
You may save your HyperMesh model to your working directory at this point.
In this step, a beam cross-section for standard sections was created using HyperBeam. You also learned
how to specify the dimensions for the standard section, and how to save this section for subsequent use.
Step 3: Model a shell section.

In this step, the shell section subpanel of the HyperBeam panel is used to model a beam section for the
trapezoidal feature of the geometry.
Use the lines in the pre-defined component shell_section to define the section. Note that these lines are
located at the mid-plane of the trapezoidal geometry. In addition to these lines, HyperBeam also requires the
thickness of the feature as input to calculate the shell section properties.
Shell section lines
You can use various panels, such as the Distance panel, to find the thickness of this feature. The thickness
of the feature is equal to 2 units.
1. Create a shell section using the lines in the shell_section component by doing the following:
- From the 1D page, select the HyperBeam panel.
- Select the shell section subpanel.
- Set the entity selector to lines.
- Click lines and select by collector.
- Select the shell_section collector from the list and click select.
- Set cross section plane: to fit to entities.
- Set plane based node to specify node to make this option active.

- In the graphics area, hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse on top of one of the mid-
plane lines, as shown in the image above.
- Click specify node >> base.
- Click anywhere on the highlighted line to define the base node.
- Click return.
- Set part generation: to auto.
- Click create to bring up the HyperBeam window.
Note: The cross section plane: option allows the software to define the plane for calculating beam
cross-sectional properties based on the entity (lines/element) selection. A user-controlled plane
can also be defined by changing the cross-section plane using the toggle.
When using the fit to entities: option you can select a reference node for the plane if you want
properties about a point other than the section centroid. This is done using the plane base
node: option. This node defines the origin of the coordinate system that serves as the reference
when computing the various beam cross-section properties. All the properties are calculated
both about the centroid and about the node you select.
Shell section
The coordinates of the centroid are calculated with respect to the user-defined coordinate system
appearing at the node location specified earlier. The coordinates of the shear center are calculated both
from the centroid and from the origin of the section. Local Ys and Zs are the coordinates of the shear

center with respect to the origin of the section, while principal Vs and Ws are the coordinates of the
shear center from the centroid of the section.
2. Modify the thickness of the cross-section and assign the value of 2 units by doing the following:
- Right click in the Model Browser on auto_shellsection.3 and select Edit.
This opens the following window:
- In the Part thickness field, type 2 and press ENTER.

The values for the beam properties computed in the Results window are updated.
- Click OK to close the window.
3. Rename the section, “Trapezoidal Section.”
4. Exit from HyperBeam panel using the File menu.
In this step, a beam cross-section representing a shell section was created using HyperBeam, and the
thickness for the shell section was assigned. Note that the shell section is defined with only one thickness
as it is defined as one part. For shell sections comprised of multiple parts, each part is assigned an
independent thickness.
You may save your model to your working directory.
Step 4: Create a solid section using surfaces.

In this step, model the irregular solid feature of the geometry as a solid section using the solid section
subpanel of the HyperBeam panel.
The input for a solid section can be 2-D elements, surfaces, or a set of lines that form a closed area. Use the
surfaces in the solid_section collector to define the solid section.
1. Create a solid section using the surfaces in the solid_section component by doing the following:
- Select the solid section subpanel.
- Set the entity selector to surfs.
- Pick the highlighted surface in the following image.
- Click specify node to make it active.
- Select a node within the area formed by the surfaces by holding the left mouse button down until a
line or the surface highlights, then clicking anywhere on the highlighted entity.
Defining the solid section
- Set analysis type: to first order.

This option tells HyperBeam to use first order (linear) elements to calculate the properties of the
section.
- Click create to launch HyperBeam.
HyperBeam meshes the area enclosed by the selected curves with quadrilateral elements, and the
properties are calculated using these elements.

Solid section
3. Rename the section "Solid Section" and save your data.
4. Exit HyperBeam and save your data.
Step 5: Assign beam properties to a property collector and a beam element.

In HyperMesh, you can easily assign the beam properties computed in HyperBeam and stored in a
beamsect collector to your solver beam property card. To achieve this, simply create a property collector with
the solver beam property card of interest, and assign the beamsect collector to the property collector.
When creating an actual beam element, simply assign the property collector to the element itself.
1. Create a property collector with a PBEAM card and assign the Solid Circle beamsect collector to it by
doing the following:
- Create a Property collector using the Model Browser with Name set to standard_section,
Card Image set to PBEAM, and assign the Material as steel.
- In the card previewer, click beamsec twice and select Solid Circle from the list of beamsect
collectors defined in the model.
The properties calculated using HyperBeam are automatically assigned to the PBEAM card. Observe
that the values of the parameters (A, I1a, I2a, I12a, J, etc.) are extracted from the properties of the
selected section.
2. Create a beam element in the bars panel with a direction vector set to the global x-axis and using the
standard_section property by doing the following:
- From the 1D page, select the bars panel.

- Click property = and select standard_section.
- Click the lower-left switch and select vectors as the option to define the orientation of the beam.
- Set the direction to x-axis.
- Click node A to make it active.
- In the graphics area, hold the left mouse button down and place the cursor on top of the line that
runs though the cylinder until it is highlighted.
- Release the left mouse button and select two nodes at the ends of the line for node A and node B.
Creating a beam element
The beam element is created and placed into the beam component.
Note: When creating beam elements, the z-axis is defined by the two nodes selected as node A
and node B. The direction of the cross-section (x- or y-axis) is defined either by using
components, vectors, or a direction node. Due to the nature of this solid circle, how you
define the x- or y-axis is unimportant.
Changes made to a beamsect collector (for example, through editing of a cross-section) are also
automatically applied to any property collector referencing this beamsect collector.
Summary
In this tutorial, you experimented with the tools and techniques for modeling beam cross-section and
obtaining their properties using HyperBeam. You learned how to edit cross-sections and assign their
properties to property collectors, which can then be assigned to 1-D elements.
For more details on how to create 1-D elements, review the tutorial, Creating 1-D Elements. Additional
techniques for creating 1-D elements from connector entities are discussed in the tutorial, Creating
Connectors.

In this tutorial, you will learn how to assign element material orientation using the following:
System ID
Vector
Angle
Step 1: Retrieve the model file, composites.hm.

1. Retrieve the file, composites.hm.
2. From the Preferences menu, select User Profiles.
3. In the pop-up window, select the RADIOSS radio button.
4. From the drop-down list box, select BulkData.
5. Click OK.
6. On the Visualization toolbar, click Shaded Element and Mesh Lines ( ).
Step 2: Update all the elements to the correct element types for RADIOSS (Bulk
Data).
1. On the 2D page, select the elem types panel.
2. Click the elems selector and select all.
All element types (1-D, 2-D, and 3-D) are selected.
3. Click update to update the element types.
Step 3: Assign element material coordinate direction using system ID.

1. Go to the composites panel on the 2D page.
2. Go to the material orientation subpanel.
4. Under Material orientation method, toggle to by system ID.
5. Select system and select the rectangular system on top of ball (system ID = 1).
6. Click color and choose the display color of the review vectors or lines.
7. Set size = 2.0.
This value specifies, in model units, how large the review vectors are when displayed.

8. Click assign.
9. On the Collectors toolbar, click Card Edit ( ).
10. Set the entity selector to elems.
11. Select any element in the model.
12. Click edit.
13. Review the card.
This function assigns the ID of the coordinate system to the selected elements. This can be verified by
reviewing the MCID field of the CQUAD4 card populated with System ID 1 for the currently loaded
RADIOSS (Bulk Data) user profile. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For
RADIOSS (Bulk Data), refer to the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in the Bulk Data Section of
the RADIOSS Reference Manual. For visualization purposes HyperMesh also projects the x-axis of the
selected coordinate system onto the face of the shell elements to define the x-axis of the material
coordinate system. If you later modify the system, the element material coordinate directions change
implicitly.
14. Click return to exit the Card Previewer.
15. Click return to exit the Card Edit panel and return to the Composites panel.
Step 4: Assign element material coordinate direction using a system axis.

1. If not already there, go to the Composites panel, material orientation subpanel.
3. Under Material orientation method, toggle to by system axis:
4. Select system and select the rectangular system on top of ball (system ID = 1) .
5. Set the switch under system to local 2-axis.
6. Set size = 2.0.
7. Click color and select the display color of the review vectors or lines.
8. Click project.
9. On the collectors toolbar, click Card Edit ( ).
12. Click edit.
This function assigns a material angle to the selected elements, which for RADIOSS (Bulk Data) is

defined as the angle between the vector direction connecting node1 and node2 of the shell element (that
is, the element coordinate system x-axis) and the projection of the selected local axis onto the surface
of the shell element. This can be verified by reviewing the THETA field of the CQUAD4 card populated
with an angle (in degrees) for the currently loaded RADIOSS (Bulk Data) user profile. Each element in
this case will have a unique THETA value as defined by the projection. How each analysis code
interprets this information varies. For RADIOSS (Bulk Data), refer to the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk
data cards in the Bulk Data Section of the RADIOSS Reference Manual. For visualization purposes
HyperMesh also projects the local axis of the selected coordinate system onto the face of the shell
elements to define the x-axis of the material coordinate system.
Step 5: Assign element material coordinate direction using a vector.

3. Under Material orientation method, toggle to by vector.
4. Set the switch to vector.
5. Select the radial r vector from the spherical coordinate system on the bottom of the ball; the r-axis will
flash once when you click on it.
6. Click B and select the origin of the local spherical system as the base.
7. Set size = 2.0.
9. Click project.
13. Click edit.
This function assigns a material angle to the selected elements, which for RADIOSS (Bulk Data) is
defined as the angle between the vector direction connecting node1 and node2 of the shell element (that
is, the element coordinate system x-axis) and the projection of the selected vector onto the surface of
the shell element. This can be verified by reviewing the THETA field of the CQUAD4 card populated with
an angle (in degrees) for the currently loaded RADIOSS (Bulk Data) user profile. Each element in this
case will have a unique THETA value as defined by the projection. How each analysis code interprets
this information varies. For RADIOSS (Bulk Data), refer to the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk data cards
in the Bulk Data Section of the RADIOSS Reference Manual. For visualization purposes HyperMesh
also projects the selected vector onto the face of the shell elements to define the x-axis of the material

coordinate system.
Step 6: Assign element material coordinate direction using an angle.

3. Under Material orientation method, toggle to by angle.
4. Enter angle = 45.00.
5. Set size = 2.0.
7. Click set.
11. Click edit.
This function assigns a material angle of 45 degrees to the selected elements, which for RADIOSS (Bulk
Data) is defined as the angle 45 degrees from the vector direction connecting node1 and node2 of the
shell element (that is, the element coordinate system x-axis) using right hand rule. In order to use right
hand rule, the normal direction of the element must be known and can be determined from the Tools
page, Normals panel. This can be verified by reviewing the THETA field of the CQUAD4 card populated
with a 45-degree angle for the currently loaded RADIOSS (Bulk Data) user profile. Each element in this
case will have a THETA of 45 degrees. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For
RADIOSS (Bulk Data), refer to the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in the Bulk Data Section of
the RADIOSS Reference Manual. For visualization purposes HyperMesh defines a vector using
RADIOSS (Bulk Data) convention on the face of the shell elements to define the x-axis of the material
coordinate system. This option should be used only in situations where great care has been taken to
assure that the node1-node2 direction of the shell elements are initially aligned properly.
Step 7: Review ply directions.

1. Go to ply directions subpanel within the Composites panel. Make sure zone based model is

selected.
2. Select elems >> by collector.
3. Select the yellow_sample collector.
4. Click select.
5. Set ply = 1.
This defines the ply number to review.
The yellow_sample collector has a PCOMP card image assigned to it with the following laminate
definition (45/60/90)s. The PCOMP definition assigned to the yellow_sample collector can be reviewed
through the card editor, as follows:
7. Set the entity selector to props.
8. Click props.
9. Select yellow_sample.
10. Click select.
11. Click edit.
The first ply defined on the PCOMP card is the most negative z-axis ply as determined from the element
normal. All ply angles on the PCOMP card are relative to the material coordinate direction set in the
above exercises using right hand rule. In order to use right hand rule, the normal direction of the element
must also be known and can be determined from the Tools page, Normals panel. For RADIOSS (Bulk
Data), refer to the PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in the Bulk Data Section of the RADIOSS Reference
Manual.
15. Set size = 2.0.
17. Click review.
18. Additional ply angles can be reviewed by reselecting elements, entering a ply ID, and clicking review.
Elements that do not have ply angles assigned will not be displayed. Ply directions are set through card
images in solver template; an example is PCOMP card for RADIOSS (Bulk Data).

Create loads and boundary conditions on geometry
Map the loads from geometry to elements
Export to a solver deck
Modify the mesh and remap the loads to the new mesh
Exercise: Working with Loads on Geometry
This exercise uses the model file, c-channel0.hm.
C-channel model in shaded mode
Step 1: Retrieve the model file, c-channel0.hm.

In this tutorial, you will experiment with the export of the loads applied to geometry entities. Therefore, you
will need to have a template loaded. In this section, retrieve the c-channel model and load the OptiStruct user
profile. By loading this user profile, the template will be automatically loaded. You will also apply some
constraints, forces and pressure load to your model, and you will need load collectors to organize them.
1. Open the model file c-channel0.hm.
The model geometry is of a C-channel with two reinforcement ribs. The various surfaces are organized
into several component collectors.
3. Select OptiStruct.
4. Click OK.

Step 2: Create three load collectors for constraints, forces, and pressure loads.
1. In the Model Browser, right-click in the white space of the browser list and click Create >
LoadCollector.
2. In the Name: field, type constraints.
3. Select a color.
4. For Card image: select none.
5. Click Create.
6. Similarly, create two more load collectors with names pressure and forces, assign colors to them, and
select no card images.
Different boundary conditions can now be created.
Defining loads and boundary conditions on geometry.
You can apply loads to geometric entities in a way similar to the manner in which loads are applied to mesh
by using the following panels from the Analysis page: forces, moments, constraints, pressures, and
temperatures.
In this step, you will apply constraints, pressure, and forces to geometric entities in the model. Constrain the
bottom portion of the c-channel using line data. Then create pressure loads on the top surfaces. Finally, add
forces at the eight corners of the surfaces defining the top of the c-channel (see following image).
Constraints on lines, pressures on surfaces and forces on fixed points

Step 3: Fully constrain the bottom eight lines of the c-channel using the constraints
panel from the Analysis page.
1. In the Model Browser right-click the constraints load collector and pick Make Current.
2. From the menu bar select BCs > Create > Constraints to open the Constraints panel.
3. Select the create subpanel.
4. Set the entity selector to lines.
5. Select the eight lines defining the bottom portion of the c-channel.
Lines to constrain
6. For size=, enter the value 1.
This is the size of the icons that will be used to represent the constraints in the graphics area.
7. Clear the label constraints check box.
8. Constrain dof1, dof2, dof3, dof4, dof5, and dof6 by checking their respective boxes.
Dofs with a check will be constrained, while dofs without a check will be free. Dofs 1, 2, and 3 are x, y,
and z translation degrees of freedom. Dofs 4, 5, and 6 are x, y, and z rotational degrees of freedom.
9. For load types =, select SPC.
10. Click create.
This applies these constraints to the selected lines. They display as a triangular icon. Checking the box
for label constraints displays what degrees of freedom are constrained.
Step 4: Apply a pressure of 25 units normal to the top three surfaces using the

pressures panel.
1. Set pressure as your current load collector by right-clicking it in the Model browser and selecting
Make Current.
2. From the menu bar select BCs > Create > Pressures to open the Pressures panel.
4. Set the entity selector to surfs and pick the three surfaces defining the top of the c-channel.
Surfaces to apply pressure to
5. For magnitude = enter the value –25 for the pressure.
Specifying a negative magnitude ensures that the pressure load is pushing down on the surfaces. By
default the pressure load is created normal to the surfaces.
6. Toggle the display of the pressures from magnitude % = to uniform size =.
An arrow is used for the graphical display of pressure loads. The size of the arrow can be input as a
value or as a percentage of the actual pressure load applied. In this exercise, you will specify its length
as a certain number.
7. For uniform size = enter the value 1.
This is the size the arrows will have in the graphics area.
8. Clear the label loads check box.
In this exercise, you will not display the actual value of the pressure load in the graphics area.
9. For load types =, select PLOAD.
10. Click create.
This applies the pressure loads to the selected surfaces. They are represented with an arrow as well as

a label. This label can be template based (PLOAD4 here) or follow the HyperMesh terminology (P) as
specified in the modeling subpanel of the Options panel.
Step 5: Create forces at the eight corners of the three top surfaces.
1. In the Model Browser, set the current load collector to forces.
2. From the menu bar select BCs > Create > Forces to open the Forces panel.
4. Set the entity selector to points and select the eight fixed points defining the corners of the c-channel’s
top surfaces.
Fixed points to apply forces to
5. Set the coordinate system toggle to global system.
6. Click the vector definition switch and select uniform size =.
7. For uniform size = enter the value 1.
8. Clear the label loads check box.
9. For magnitude = enter the value –15.
The minus sign is used to specify a direction opposite to the one you will select in the next step.
10. Click the direction definition switch below magnitude =, and select z-axis.
11. For load types =, select FORCE.
12. Click create.
This creates a number of point forces, with the given magnitude in the z-direction, to be applied to the
fixed points selected.

Loads on geometry
Note: If you sent some loads into the wrong load collector, use the Organize panel on loads to move
them into the right collector.
In this section you created various types of loads on various geometric entities: lines, surfaces and fixed
point. The ultimate goal is to have these loading conditions applied to finite elements. You will now create
these elements.
Step 6: Generate elements on the surfaces.

Use the Automesh panel to create a quad dominant (mixed) mesh. The elements generated will be
organized into their surfaces’ component collectors to avoid the need of setting current component collectors.
1. Press F12 to go to the Automesh panel.
2. Set the entity selector to surfs.
3. Click surfs and select displayed.
4. For element size =, enter the value 0.25.
5. Set the mesh type to mixed.
6. Click the toggle to switch from elems to current comp to elems to surf comp.
This ensures that the elements created go into the surface’s component collector.

7. Set the meshing mode to automatic.
In this mode HyperMesh will automatically generate a mesh on the surfaces based on the element size
and the type of elements selected. No further user input is required or can be supplied.
8. Click mesh.
10. Click Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines ( ).
Meshed c-channel
In this step, you quickly created a shell mesh on the surfaces. You can now try to map the loads that were
applied to geometric entities onto these finite elements.
Step 7: Map the loads from geometry to elements.

A load collector, just like component collectors, can store both loads on geometry and loads on finite
elements. These two types of loads are separate and independent, and can therefore be manipulated
independently. At this time, your load collectors contain loads only in their geom side. By mapping these
loads on geometry onto finite elements and using your existing loadcols, you will also populate their elems
side.
In this step, use the Load on Geom panel to map the loads from the geometric entities (to which the
geometric loads are applied) to the mesh associated with these geometric entities for the constraints and
pressure load collectors.
1. From the menu bar select BCs > Loads on Geometry.
2. Click loadcols and check the box next to constraints from the list of load collectors.

3. Click select.
4. Click map loads.
The constraints previously applied to the lines are now also applied to the nodes of the mesh associated
to these lines. These constraints are placed in the same load collector as the ones applied to the
geometry, only in the elems portion.
Constraints mapped to the elements
5. Repeat 7.1 - 7.4 to map the pressure loadcol to the mesh.
The pressure loads previously applied to the surfaces are now mapped to the nodes associated with
these surfaces. These pressure loads are placed in the same load collector as the ones applied to the
geometry.
Step 8: Export the model to a solver deck.

When exporting the model using an export template, only the loads on mesh are exported. These loads on
mesh may have been applied directly to the mesh, mapped from geometry to the mesh, or both. The Export
tab allows you to export loads to an ASCII solver-specific file (according to the loaded export template). The
loads are exported as mesh loads.
The Custom template allows you to determine which loads are exported.
If all is selected, all the loads on geometry that have not been mapped (if any), are mapped to loads on
mesh and all the loads on mesh are exported.

If displayed is selected, all the displayed loads on mesh (if any) are exported. All the loads on mesh
associated with the displayed loads on geometry (if any) are exported as well. If any loads on geometry are
displayed and have not been mapped, they will automatically be mapped to loads on mesh and exported as
well.
In this step, use the Model Browser to ensure that only the already mapped loading conditions are
exported. One load collector stores both loads on geometry and loads on mesh. The mesh (or multiple
meshes) is associated with the geometrical entities to which the loads on geometry have been applied.
Each load type is stored in a dedicated section of the same load collector.
The display panel allows separate or simultaneous visualization of loads on mesh and loads on geometry.
Turn off the display of loads applied to the geometric entities to display only the loads applied to the mesh.
1. Use the Model Browser to turn off the display of the loads applied to geometric entities.
Left-click the geometry display buttons in your Model Browser so your component display changes
from this:
to this:
2. From the menu bar select File > Export > Solver Deck.
3. Click the arrows ( ) next to Export options to expand the dialog.
4. Set Export: to Displayed, and export the model to your working directory as an OptiStruct deck.
Since loads applied to geometry were turned off in the Model Browser previously, only the loads
mapped previously will be exported. You may open the exported deck in any text editor to verify that no
RADIOSS FORCE card has been exported in the deck.
5. Specify a file name.
6. Click Export to export the file.
In this section you experimented with the behavior of the Export panel when it comes to loads applied to
geometry and elements. You learned that with different combinations of the all/displayed option and loads
displayed in the Model Browser, you can control what information gets exported.

Step 9: Modify the mesh and remap the loads to the new mesh.
Besides the convenience they offer, loads applied to geometry give you the flexibility of re-applying them as
many times as you want to different meshes. This feature is particularly useful when remeshing a model
without deleting complicated loads or boundary conditions. After remeshing, loads or boundary conditions
that have been applied to geometrical entities can be easily remapped to the new mesh, while loads applied
to elements are automatically deleted when the elements themselves are deleted.
In this step, remesh the surfaces and remap the loads on geometry to the new mesh.
2. Click surfs and select displayed.
3. For element size =, enter the value 0.5.
4. Leave all other options used earlier unchanged.
5. Click mesh.
The automesher deletes the existing elements before creating a completely new set based on the new
element size. As you exit the Automesh panel, the loads that were applied to the initial mesh are
removed since the elements are no longer there.
New mesh
Step 10: Map all the loads on geometry to the new mesh using the load on geom
panel.
1. From the menu bar select BCs > Loads on Geometry panel.
2. Click loadcols and check the boxes next to constraints, pressure, and forces.

3. Click select.
4. Click map loads.
The loading conditions initially defined for the geometric entities are now applied to the new mesh. The
various loading conditions are placed into the same load collector as the corresponding ones applied to
the geometry. Note that you did not have to display these loads to map them.
Note: Deleting geometric entities to which loads are applied will also result in the deletion of these
loads. It will not affect any loads applied to the mesh, though.
In this step, you experimented with the remapping of loads applied to geometry onto a new mesh. Loads
applied on geometric entities can be mapped several times onto the different finite element entities attached
to these geometric entities. You took advantage of this in a situation where a mesh had to be changed, and it
saved you from having to recreate loads on the elements.

With all of the exercise complete, you can save the model if desired.
Summary
In this tutorial, you used several boundary condition creation panels to generate constraints and various
loading conditions on geometric entities. You then experimented with the mapping of these loads on
geometry onto finite elements. You also familiarized yourself with the rules that govern the export of loads on
geometric entities.
No consideration to the creation of specific card images that need to accompany the various loading
conditions was given. For more information on how to generate the various loading conditions for different
solvers, refer to the Modeling / Solver Specific section of the HyperMesh tutorials.

Import include files
Review and manipulate includes
Create includes and reorganize the database
Locate entities in includes
Import new data into includes
Export options
While HyperMesh supports include formulations for several other solvers, LS-DYNA 970 input decks will be
used for the purpose of this tutorial.
Many FEA solvers allow you to organize your input deck into separate files and provide a mechanism to read
all files linked to a single input deck. This capability is commonly known as "includes." HyperMesh provides
several options for importing such models, one of which preserves the include structure upon import. The
Include view in the Model Browser is available to manipulate these includes. The Include view lets you
create, review, edit, organize, and update the contents of any HyperMesh model into various include files.
Every entity in HyperMesh then belongs to either the master model or one of its include files.
Step 1: Load the LS-DYNA user profile and import the model.
Import Solver Deck ( ) has the following options for importing include files:
Merge: with this option, all the data in the individual includes are merged into the master model and
imported in HyperMesh as a single model. HyperMesh has no knowledge regarding individual
include files with this option.
Skip: with this option, the INCLUDE statements are simply read as control cards and none of the
contents of the include files are processed. The data within the include files is therefore ignored.
Preserve: when you select this option, the INCLUDE statements are preserved and the contents of
the include files are processed. In addition, the contents of the include files are "marked" to
remember which include file they belong to. When the deck is exported from HyperMesh, if desired,
all of the entities that are marked as belonging to include files get written back to that include file.
The entire file structure (the master file and all its include files) are rewritten from the HyperMesh
database.
In this section, load the LS-DYNA user profile, then import the LS-DYNA decks (master file and include files)
defining the model. Preserve the organization of the data into the various include files.
2. Select LsDyna.
3. Click OK.
Selecting a solver user profile sets the FE input reader to this solver and loads the solver’s FE output
template. It also loads a macro menu with numerous tools specific to this interface. The graphical user

interface is tailored to this solver with panel names and options renamed or removed to match its
terminology as much as possible.
4. Click Import Solver Deck ( ).
5. Under Import options, from the Include Files: menu, select Preserve and import the following file:
<installation_directory>\tutorials\hm\master.k.
6. Click Import.
This loads the master.k deck into HyperMesh as well as the include files, wheels.key, frame.key and
engine.key, which are also present in the same directory.
Truck model
In this section, the truck model defined with a master deck and several include files was imported into
HyperMesh while preserving the organization of the data between the various files.
Step 2: Review the model organization using the Include view in the Model
Browser.
The Include view, , is located in the Model Browser It allows you to create, review, edit, organize, and
update the contents of a model into various include files. A context sensitive pop-up menu provides many
other Include view functionalities. For a complete description of the options available, refer to the Model
Browser's include view in the online help.
In this section, launch the Include view, review the structure of the model and its organization into the
various includes, and experiment with some of the display and configuration options available.
1. From the Model Browser, select the Include View .
This is a tree-like organization of the database structure. The Master Model is at the top level of the
include browser. Data, which does not have any references to an include file, is stored in the master
model. Each include file is represented with an icon ( ) along with its name (file name). Each include
can be expanded to reveal its contents. The contents of each include is organized (grouped) into folders
containing each type, next to which appears the total number of entities of that type. Each of the folders

can be expanded to review the individual entities in that folder. The browser can be configured to show
only specific entities of interest.
2. Expand the engine.key include to review its content.
This include contains three folders: Component, Material, and Property.
3. Expand the Component directory from the engine include.
This folder contains six component collectors as indicated next to its name.
Components content of the engine.key include
4. Similarly, review the content of the other includes as well as the content of the folders belonging to the
Master Model.
The wheels.key include contains, for example, components, control volumes, groups, materials,
properties, and sets.
Note: While most entities are presented in this tree, elements and nodes are not listed, as this
would not be practical for larger models.
5. Right-click white space in the browser and select Collapse All from the context menu to collapse all the
trees that you expanded.
6. Right-click Master Model and experiment with the display options Show, Hide, and Isolate.
7. Use the Isolate option on each one of the includes to visually review the components they contain.

Displaying only the frame.key include
8. Use the display options in the Include view to turn on the display of the entire model.
In this section, the Include view was launched and the organization of the model into the various includes
was reviewed. The Include view was customized and some of the display options were used to modify the
display of the model in the graphics region.
Step 3: Create new includes, reorganize the model, and locate entities in includes.
Whether you import includes or are simply starting from a ‘flat’ HyperMesh model, you can create new
includes in your database using the Include view, and organize entities into them using the Organize
panel. You can also select entities (using the standard SHIFT and CTRL keys) from the Include view and
drag them between two includes or between the master model and an include.
To determine which include a specific entity belongs to, you can use the Organize panel’s locate function.
In this section, create a new include for the doors and organize the corresponding collectors into it using the
Organize panel. Finally, determine which include a certain material belongs to using the locate function.
1. Right-click Master Model and select Create > Include File.
This adds a new include under the master model with an editable name.
Note: You can add includes under the master model or under includes themselves.
2. Type in the name doors.key for this new include.
This include is now displayed in bold, signifying that it is the current include.
Note: You can rename or make current an include using the context menu displayed when you
right-click the include.
3. From the Tool page, select the organize panel.
4. Select the includes subpanel and set the entity selector to comps.
5. Click dest = and select the doors.key include as the destination for the components.
6. From the graphics area, pick the two doors and their windows, or click comps to access the list of

components and select the components SHELL: DOOR-LEFT, SHELL: DOOR-RIGHT, and SHELL:
DOOR-WINDOWG-LEFT.
7. Click move to place these components into the include.
An expand/collapse icon is added next to the doors.key include, signifying that data has been placed
under it.
8. Review the components that were placed in the doors.key include.
9. Right-click doors.key and select Isolate.
The elements are displayed in the graphics area.
Door and w indow elements in doors.key.
10. Change the display back to Display All.
11. In the Organize panel, includes subpanel, set the type of entities to mats.
12. Click locate.
This brings up the list of materials available in this model.
13. Select MATL1_38.
The dest = field is updated to show which include (or master) file this particular material belongs to. In
this case, it belongs to the wheels.key include.
In this section, a new include was created in the Include view, and some components from the master
model, as well as their corresponding elements, were moved into it. Finally, the locate function was used to

quickly identify which include a material belonged to.
Step 4: Import new data into an include and export the model.
Initially, the Master Model is always the current file (displayed in bold in the Include view) and any new
entity you create or bring in HyperMesh is automatically placed in it. You can use the Make Current option
from the Include view context menu to make any include the current include. As you create a new include,
this include automatically becomes the current include.
The Include File Options… function from the Include view context menu lets you define export options for
each individual include file: whether the include file should get exported, when the export function is used,
and where the file should be exported.
Under Export options of Export Solver Deck, , you have two options for exporting models that contain
includes:
Merge: in this case, all the data in individual include files is merged into a single master model
during export. The exported file does not contain references to any include files.
Preserve: with this option, all the data in individual include files are exported separately to their
corresponding files. The references to these includes in the master model file are also maintained.
In this section, create a new include in the master model called barrier.dyn and import a barrier model
into it. Review the include file options for each one of the includes in the model and modify them as needed.
Finally, export the model preserving the includes.
1. In the Include view, right-click Master Model and select Create > Include File.
2. Name the new include barrier.dyn.
Notice how this new include is displayed in bold, signifying that it is now the current include and any new
data created or brought into HyperMesh will be placed in it.
3. Select Import Solver Deck .
This posts Import menu in HyperMesh browser area.
4. Click File: ( ) and import the file <install_directory>\tutorials\hm\barrier.dyn.
The barrier is imported into HyperMesh

Truck and barrier
5. Review the content of the barrier.dyn include.
Notice how barrier.dyn is displayed as bold and both barrier.dyn and doors.key are non-italicized, while
engine.k ey, frame.k ey, and wheels.k ey are all italicized. This is a visual representation of the export
option that is set for each of these three includes.
6. Right-mouse click engine.key and select Include File Options.
This displays the Include File Options dialog:
The File path: option lets you type in or browse for the directory in which the include is to be exported.
The Do not export option lets you specify whether the include should get exported or not when the
model is exported out of HyperMesh.
This box is automatically checked when you read includes into HyperMesh that have their permission
set to read only, as well as includes that are referenced by the master file using absolute paths.
The three files frame.key, wheels.key and engine.key are referenced by the file master.k that
we imported initially using relative paths (edit the master.k file to verify this), but had their permissions

set to read only. In order to export these includes, the Do not export box should be unchecked.
7. Uncheck the Do not export box and click Set for the includes engine.key, frame.key and
wheels.key.
8. Right-click on an include and select Export All Includes.
This displays the Export all includes dialog.
9. Type in a location and name for the master model and click OK. Or, use the open file icon ( ) to
browse for a location, type in the name of the master file and click Save.
10. Go to the directory you selected and verify that all the includes have been exported with the names set in
the Include view.
Note: Using this option, all the include files are exported as individual files. This is equivalent to using
the Export Solver Deck menu ( ) with the preserve includes option when writing out the
master model. When you want to export a single ‘flat’ file, use the export subpanel and set the
export option to merge includes.
This concludes this tutorial. You may discard this model or save it to your working directory for your
reference.
In this tutorial you used the include browser to manage the use of includes in your truck model. Several
options for import, display, organization, and export were used.

HM-4070: OptiView
Import an optimization model
Create a new set of optimization entities
Organize these into optimization problems
Run both problems
View results
Exercise
Step 1: Launch HyperMesh and set the user profile.
Step 2: Import the ccl i p. f emfile.

1. Select Import Solver Deck from the Standard toolbar.
2. Select OptiStruct for the File type.
3. Click the in the File line to browse to <installation_directory>\tutorial\hm\ and

select cclip.fem.
4. Click Import to open the file.
Step 3: Create Problem 1 and organize optimization entities.
1. From the Model Browser, click Optimization View ( ).
2. Review the Optimization Repository.
The Optimization Repository gives an overview of all optimization related entities in the database. Info
types and children entities help give a clear snapshot without having to review individual entities.

Figure 1
3. Right-click the Optimization Problems folder and click Create > Optimization Problem.
4. Name this problem Topology.
5. Drag and drop all the entities from the repository into the newly created problem.
You can drag and drop entities from the repository into problems or problems into problems. Any
combination of selected entities can be dragged and dropped.
Step 4: Define a new set of optimization entities.

1. Right-click in the white space of the optimization view in the Model Browser and select Create > Free
Size Desvar.
This will take you into the Free Size Optimization panel where you can define a free size design
variable. Give it a meaningful name so you can easily drag and drop.
2. Create a free size design variable for the shells property.
You can create new response/constraint pairs, or anything else you want to change from problem to
problem. For this simple tutorial, we will just compare Topology to Free Size.
Step 5: Create Problem 2 and organize optimization entities.

1. Create another problem using by right-clicking, choosing Create > Optimization Problem. Name this
problem Free Size.
2. Drag and drop all the entities defined in the repository to the newly created problem.
Notice that you will have two design variables defined for the Free Size problem.
3. Right-click on the shell design variable under Free Size and click Remove from Problem.
This will not delete the problem from the repository.

Figure 2
Step 6: Set problems to export and run.

1. Right-click on the Topology problem and click Set Export.
Once problems are defined, only one can be export at a time. The problem set to export is in bold, and
furthermore, the entity state browser shows these rules.
2. Open the OptiStruct panel.
3. Set the export options to custom.
4. Save the input file as cclip_topology.fem.
5. Click OptiStruct to run the analysis.
The Optimization View allows one .hm for all optimization problems, and it is up to the user to wisely
name each input file.
6. Repeat these steps for the Free Size problem and view the results in HyperView.

Customization
Scripts

Scripts


In this tutorial you will:
Create a new button on the User page of the Utility menu
Tools
The User page is available on the Utility menu. It can be accessed in the following way:
1. From the menu bar, select View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Utility
2. At the bottom of the Utility menu, click the User button
Users may add command files and Tcl/Tk scripts to the userpage.mac file. When HyperMesh starts, it
first looks for the userpage.mac file in the directory from which it launches and then in the installation
directory. UNIX users also have the option of putting the userpage.mac file in their home directory.
The userpage.mac file controls the display and available operations on the User page of the HyperMesh
Utility menu. To invoke a command file or Tcl/Tk script from the User page, a button must be defined inside
the userpage.mac file. The *createbutton command is used to define the button and its
characteristics. The syntax for this command is:
*createbutton(page, name, row, column, width, COLOR, helpString, macroName [ ,
arg1 … ])
page The page number on which the button is to appear.

For the User page, this value is 5.
name The text to display on the button, enclosed in quotes:

" ".
row The row in which to place the button. The number of

visible rows depends on your monitor’s graphics
resolution. A positive value indicates an absolute row
number. A 0 indicates the next highest available row.
A negative value indicates the number of rows to skip.
Rows begin at the bottom of the menu.
column The column where the button starts (0-10). Columns

begin to the right of the menu.
width The width of the button (max = 10).
COLOR The color of the button. The available button colors

are: RED, BLUE, GREEN, CYAN, MAGENTA,
YELLOW, GRAY, and BUTTON (background). The
color name must appear in capital letters.

helpString The string to be displayed in the menu bar when the
middle mouse button is pressed and the button is
clicked, enclosed in quotes: " ".
macroName The command to run when the button is pressed,

enclosed in quotes: " ".
arg1… A list of optional arguments passed to the script.
Exercise
To create a button on the User page that will launch the lighting.tcl dialog from the HyperMesh
installation:
Step 1: Create the userpage.mac file.

Using a text editor, create a blank userpage.mac file in the appropriate directory.
When HyperMesh starts, it first looks for the userpage.mac file in the directory from which it launches
and then in the installation directory. On Windows, the default launch directory is in the My Documents
folder. UNIX users also have the option of putting the userpage.mac file in their home directory. It is
not recommended to modify the userpage.mac file in the installation directory.
Step 2: Add the command to create the button.

1. Add the following text to the userpage.mac file:
*createbutton(5,"Lighting",10,5,5,YELLOW,"Launch the lighting.tcl
script","EvalTcl","lighting.tcl")
The EvalTcl macro is defined in the globalpage.mac file in the HyperMesh installation. It takes a
Tcl script as its argument and executes the script.
Notice that the full path is not used to reference the lighting.tcl script. A full path can be specified
if the file is not located in one of the predefined paths that HyperMesh searches to find scripts. Users
can add additional search paths using the TCL_INCLUDE environment variable. Relative paths can also
be used from these search paths.
2. Save the modified userpage.mac file.
Step 3: Load the updated userpage.mac file.

1. Restart HyperMesh from the working directory or reload the current macro menu .mac file. This allows
the current session to use the modified userpage.mac file.
To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open, from the menu bar select
Preferences > Menu Config and click on retrieve next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper .
mac file from the hm/scripts/<profile name> directory based on the current user profile, or load

the default hm.mac in the hm/bin/<platform> directory if no user profile is loaded.
2. Click the User button on the Utility menu. You will see Lighting, the button defined in Step 2. Compare
this button to its definition. It is yellow in color, begins in column 5 of row 10, and extends half way
across the Utility menu.

Determine the commands to save the current HyperMesh model
Create a Utility menu macro to execute the command
Create a new button on the User page of the Utility menu to run the macro
Tools
In order to execute command file commands or Tcl scripts from a button on any of the HyperMesh Utility
menu pages, a Utility menu macro must first be defined. A Utility menu macro contains valid command file
or templex commands that execute the appropriate operations, and is defined using the *beginmacro and
*endmacro commands. Macros may accept data passed to them using the arguments $1, $2, etc. Each
argument specifies where the values should be substituted. These macros are defined within the .mac files,
including the userpage.mac file.
The following skeleton code shows the format of a Utility menu macro:
*beginmacro(macroname)
command statements go here
*endmacro()
Utility menu macros consist of HyperMesh Tcl modify commands.
Exercise
Create a Utility menu macro from a command file that saves the model and add a button on the User page
that will launch the macro:
1. Define the task.
2. Delete the existing command.cmf file. This file is located in either the start-in directory or the current
working directory.
3. Perform the operations in HyperMesh that the script should run.
4. Extract the commands from the command.cmf file.
5. Add the commands to the userpage.mac file.
6. Modify as necessary and add macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro.
7. Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the new macro defined in Step 6.
8. Reload the current .mac file into HyperMesh to load the modified userpage.mac.
9. Test the macro.
Step 1: Define the task.

The first step in creating a macro is to define the process you want to automate and recognize the individual
tasks to reach the desired conclusion. Here, you want to create a one-button macro to automate saving the
current HyperMesh model to a file named temp.hm. The actions necessary to complete this task are:
From the menu bar, select File > Save as > Model….
Use the file browser to locate a directory and enter the name for the filename.
Click Save.
Step 2: Delete the existing command.cmf file.

The current command.cmf file is located in the current working directory. When first opening HyperMesh,
the file is created in the directory HyperMesh is launched from. As soon as you begin working in HyperMesh
all executed commands are written to the command.cmf file. If the file already exists, the commands are
appended to the file. Deleting the file allows HyperMesh to create a new file and allows the user to easily
find the relevant commands.
Step 3: Perform the operations in HyperMesh.

Execute the full process within HyperMesh. Every command issued in HyperMesh appears in the order
executed and is reflected in the command.cmf file.
1. From the menu bar, select File > Save as > Model….
2. Using the file browser, locate a directory to save the temporary file with the name temp.hm.
Remember this is just a temporary file and will be overwritten each time the macro is executed.
3. Click Save.
Step 4: Extract the commands from the command.cmf file.

1. Open the command.cmf file using any text editor.
2. Locate the *writefile command at or near the end of the command.cmf file.
This is the command that writes the model file.
3. Select and copy this line.
Step 5: Add the commands to the userpage.mac file.

1. Open the userpage.mac file using any text editor.
2. Paste the *writefile command copied from the command.cmf file inside the userpage.mac file.
Step 6: Modify as necessary and add Utility menu macro wrapper commands.

1. Remove the path in the *writefile command so that it looks like:
*writefile("temp.hm",0)
2. Enclose the commands from Step 5 between the wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro.
In the *beginmacro command, name the macro macroSave.
*beginmacro(macroSave)
*writefile("temp.hm",0)
*endmacro()
The macro name macroSave will be used to connect the button with the macro via the macroName field
in the *createbutton command.
3. Add the command *answer(yes) after the *writefile command.
The command *answer(yes) automatically answers “yes” if prompted to overwrite the file in the event
temp.hm already exists.
4. Save the userpage.mac file.
Step 7: Add the macro button.

Create a button on the User page to execute the macro.
1. Create a new button in the userpage.mac file.
*createbutton(5,"Save File",20,0,10,GREEN,"Save file","macroSave")
This creates a button on page 5 (User page), names it, places it in the 20th row, starts it at column 0,
sets the width at 10 columns, applies to it the color green, provides a help string and references the
macro macroSave defined in Step 6.
Step 8: Reload the current .mac file into HyperMesh to load the modified
userpage.mac.
To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open, select Preferences > Menu
Config from the menu bar and click on retrieve next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper .mac
file from the hm\scripts\<profile name> directory based on the current user profile, or load the
default hm.mac in the hm\bin\<platform> directory if no user profile is loaded.
Step 9: Test the macro.

1. Click the User button on the Utility menu.
The new button labeled Save File should be on the User page.

2. Click this button to automatically save your file.
The file is saved to the directory specified in the *writefile command. In this case no directory is
specified so HyperMesh saves the file to the start-up or current working directory. It will always save
with the name specified in the macro (in this case, temp.hm).

HM-8030: Create a Utility Menu Macro to Create Constraints on a
Plane
Determine the commands to create constraints on a plane
Create a Utility menu macro to execute the commands
Tools
*endmacro()
Load collectors can be created and edited using the Model Browser. Simply right-click in the Model
Browser and select Create > Load Collector to create one. To edit the name, color, or card image of a
load collector, right click on the load collector name in the Model Browser and select Edit
The Constraints panel can be accessed from the menu bar by selecting BCs > Create > Constraints
The Constraints panel allows you to create and update constraints.
Exercise
In this exercise you will create a Utility menu macro from a command file that creates constraints on a plane
and add a button on the User page that will launch the macro:
1. Define the task.
working directory.

5. Add them to the userpage.mac file.
6. Modify as necessary and add macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro.
7. Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the new macro defined in Step 6.
9. Test the macro.

tasks to reach the desired conclusion. Here, you want to create a one-button macro to automatically create
constraints on certain nodes. The actions necessary to complete this task are:
Create a load collector for the constraints.
Enter the Constraints panel.
Apply constraints to the nodes on the end of the beam lying in the YZ plane.


1. From the menu bar, select File > Open > Model and load the file, c_channel-tcl.hm.
2. Right click in the Model Browser and select Create > Load Collector.
3. In the Name field enter the name constraints.
4. Click create.
5. Open the Constraints panel.
6. Active the create subpanel.
7. Click nodes and select the on plane option.

The plane that will be selected is the YZ plane. This is accomplished by selecting the x-axis vector,
which is normal to the YZ plane. The base node option is then highlighted, allowing a node on one end
of the beam to be selected as the base node for the plane. All nodes on that plane are highlighted when
select is clicked.
9. Click create.

2. Select and copy all lines in the file.
Observe the *createmark command and the list of entity ID numbers. A mark is a storage buffer in
HyperMesh. For some actions performed on entities, the entity ID is first entered into the designated
mark.
There are two marks available to the user (1 and 2) for each entity type (elements, nodes, lines,
surfaces, points, etc…). At the execution of the command using the mark, the changes apply to all
entities identified in the mark.
Step 5: Add the commands to the userpage.mac file.

1. Open the userpage.mac file using any text editor.
2. Paste the commands copied from the command.cmf file inside the userpage.mac file.
Step 6: Modify as necessary and add Utility menu macro wrapper commands.
1. Enclose the commands in Step 5 between the wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro. In
the *beginmacro command, name the macro macroEdge_Const as shown, following. Remove any
lines copied from the command.cmf file that are not shown in the following.
*beginmacro(macroEdge_Const)
*collectorcreate(loadcols,"constraints","",11)
*createmark(nodes,1) 3358-3360 3296 3297 3142 etc …
*loadcreateonentity_curve(nodes,1,3,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0)
*endmacro()
The macro name macroEdge_Const will be used to connect the button with the macro via the
macroName field in the *createbutton command.
2. Change the *createmark(nodes,1) command to *createmark(nodes,1) "on plane" 0 0

0 1 0 0 0.5 1 0

"on plane" is one of many selection methods available. This method allows the selection of only
entities that lie within a tolerance (in this case, 0.5) of the plane defined at the point (0,0,0) with normal
vector (1,0,0). In this exercise, this is the YZ plane. See the Input Collectors online help topic for further
details.
The final macro should look like:
*beginmacro(macroEdge_Const)
*collectorcreate(loadcols,"constraints","",11)
*createmark(nodes,1) "on plane" 0 0 0 1 0 0 0.5 1 0
*loadcreateonentity(nodes,1,3,1,0,0,0,0,0,0)
*endmacro()

*createbutton(5,"Edge Const",18,0,10,GREEN,"Add constraints to outer edge

of elements","macroEdge_Const")
makes it 10 columns wide, gives it the color green, provides a help string and references the macro
macroSave defined in Step 6.
userpage.mac.
To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open, select Preferences > Menu Config
from the menu bar and click on retrieve next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper .mac file from
the hm\scripts\<profile name> directory based on the current user profile, or load the default hm.mac
in hm\bin\<platform> if no user profile is loaded.


The new button labeled Edge Const should be on the User page.
2. Click this button to run the macro that automatically creates constraints on the outer row of nodes.
Some commands used in this exercise are very model-specific. For example, creating a load collector
named “constraints” may cause an error if the collector already exists. Also, selecting nodes using the
by plane option and specifying the YZ plane may not be applicable to a lot of situations.
Several options exist to make the *createmark commands general enough to work with any model.
For example, to select all the currently displayed elements in the model use the command
*createmark(elements,1) "by displayed".
Another option is to replace the *createmark command with *createmarkpanel. When executed,
this command presents the user with a selection panel for the entity specified. For this macro, the
*createmarkpanel command could be used to allow the user to select the appropriate nodes.
Additionally, this Utility menu macro could be converted to a Tcl script that allows for additional logic
and error checking controls. This way, the user could also be prompted to enter a name for the load
collector using hm_getstring. An error check could then be performed to determine if that load
collector already exists, and appropriate action would then be taken.

Determine the commands to save the current HyperMesh model
Tools
*endmacro()
Exercise
In this exercise you will create a Tcl script from the command file commands, create a Utility menu macro
that runs the Tcl script and add a button on the User page that will launch the macro:
1. Define the task.
working directory.
5. Create a Tcl script by converting the commands to Tcl format and modifying as necessary.
6. Create a new Utility menu macro that runs a Tcl script.
7. Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the macro created in Step 6 with the appropriate
Tcl script filename.
9. Test the macro.

tasks to reach the desired conclusion. Here, you want to create a one-button macro to automate saving the
current HyperMesh model to a file named temp.hm. The actions necessary to complete this task are:
From the menu bar, select File > Save as > Model.
Use the file browser to locate a directory and enter the name for the filename.
Click Save.


1. From the menu bar, select Files > Save as > Model.
2. Using the file browser, locate a directory to save the temporary file with the name temp.hm.
Remember this is just a temporary file and will be overwritten each time the macro is executed.
3. Click Save.

2. Locate the *writefile command at or near the end of the command.cmf file.
This is the command that writes the model file.
3. Select and copy this line.
Step 5: Create a Tcl script names savefile.tcl, convert the commands to Tcl
format and modify as necessary.
1. Create a new file named savefile.tcl using any text editor.
2. Paste the *writefile command copied from the command.cmf file inside the savefile.tcl file.
3. Remove all () and , and replace them with spaces. Also remove the “ “. The command should look
like:

*writefile temp.hm 0
4. Add the command *answer yes after the *writefile command.
The command *answer yes automatically answers “yes” if prompted to overwrite the file in the event
temp.hm already exists. Notice that there are no parentheses.
5. Save the savefile.tcl script in the current working directory.
Step 6: Create a Utility menu macro that runs a Tcl script.

1. Create a new Utility menu macro that calls the *evaltclscript command to run a Tcl script, using
the macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro. In the *beginmacro command, name
the macro EvalTcl.
*beginmacro("EvalTcl")
*evaltclscript($1,0)
*endmacro()
The macro name EvalTcl will be used to connect the button with the macro via the macroName field in
the *createbutton command.

*createbutton(5,"SaveFile TCL",15,0,10,GREEN,"Save file using TCL macro",

"EvalTcl","savefile.tcl")
sets its width at 10 columns, applies to it the color green, provides a help string and references the
macro EvalTcl defined in Step 6.
Notice that the full path is not used to reference the savefile.tcl script. A full path can be specified
if the file is not located in one of the predefined paths that HyperMesh searches to find scripts. Users
can add additional search paths using the TCL_INCLUDE environment variable. Relative paths can also
be used from these search paths.
userpage.mac.

To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open, select Preferences > Menu Config
from the menu bar and click on retrieve next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper .mac file from
the hm\scripts\<profile name> directory based on the current user profile, or load the default hm.mac
in hm\bin\<platform> if no user profile is loaded.

The new button labeled Save File TCL should be on the User page.
2. Click this button to automatically save your file.
The file is saved to the directory specified in the *writefile command. In this case no directory is
specified so HyperMesh saves the file to the start-up or current working directory. It will always save
with the name specified in the macro, in this case temp.hm.

HM-8050: Create Forces on Nodes and Add a Button on the User
Page
Determine the commands to create forces on nodes
Tools
*endmacro()
Load collectors can be created and edited using the Model Browser. Simply right click in the Model
Browser and select Create > Load Collector to create one. To edit the name, color, or card image of a
load collector, right click on the load collector name in the Model Browser and select Edit
The Forces panel can be accessed from the menu bar by selecting BCs > Create > Forces.
The Forces panel allows you to create and update forces.
Exercise
In this exercise you will create a Tcl script from the command file commands, create a Utility menu macro
that runs the Tcl script and add a button on the User page that will launch the macro:
1. Define the task.
working directory.

6. Create a Utility menu macro that runs a Tcl script.
7. Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the macro created in Step 6 with the appropriate
Tcl script filename.
9. Test the macro.

tasks to reach the desired conclusion. Here, you want to create a one-button macro to automatically create
forces on certain nodes. The actions necessary to complete this task are:
Create a load collector for the forces
Enter the Forces panel
Apply forces to the nodes of interest


1. From the menu bar, select File > Open > Model and then load the file, c_channel-tcl.hm.
2. Right click in the Model Browser and select Create > Load Collector.
3. In the Name field enter the name forces.
4. Click Create.
5. Open the Forces panel.
6. Activate the create subpanel.
7. Click nodes and select one node in the model.

a. For the direction of the force choose the z-axis option.
b. For magnitude=, enter 23.
c. Toggle from magnitude % option to uniform size option for load size and set the value to 15.
9. Click create.
1. Open the command.cmf file using any text editor or use the Open Command File option in the
Scripting Toolbar.
2. Select and copy the following three lines in the file:

*loadsize(1,15,0,1)
*createmark(nodes,1) 3237
*loadcreateonentity_curve(nodes,1,1,1,0,0,23,0,0,23,0,0,0,0,0)
Observe the *createmark command and the list of entity id numbers. A mark is a storage buffer in
HyperMesh. For some actions performed on entities, the entity ID is first entered into the designated
mark.
There are two marks available to the user (1 and 2) for each entity type (elements, nodes, lines,
surfaces, points, etc.). At the execution of the command using the mark, the changes apply to all
entities identified in the mark.
Step 5: Create a Tcl script named create_force.tcl, convert the commands to

Tcl format and modify as necessary.
1. Create a new file named create_force.tcl using any text editor.
2. Paste the copied commands from the command.cmf file inside the create_force.tcl file.
3. Remove all () and , and replace them with spaces. The commands should look something like:
*loadsize 1 15 0 1
*createmark nodes 1 3237
*loadcreateonentity_curve nodes 1 1 1 0 0 23 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0
Simply running the above commands will work without a problem, but note that the *createmark
command is hard coded to the single node picked when generating the command file. Also notice that
the magnitude is hard coded as well. This is not very useful for a generic utility.
4. Replace the *createmark command with the *createmarkpanel command.
The command *createmarkpanel presents the user with a selection panel for the entity specified.
The commands should now look like this:
*loadsize 1 15 0 1

*createmarkpanel nodes 1 "Select nodes for load creation"
*loadcreateonentity_curve nodes 1 1 1 0 0 23 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0
5. If you want to let the user specify the magnitude, prompt the user for a value using hm_getfloat. Then
replace the hard coded magnitude in the *loadcreateonentity_curve command with the user
defined value. The commands should now look like this:
*loadsize 1 15 0 1
*createmarkpanel nodes 1 "Select nodes for load creation"
set mag_val [hm_getfloat "Magnitude=" "Enter force magnitude:"]
*loadcreateonentity_curve nodes 1 1 1 0 0 $mag_val 0 0 $mag_val 0 0 0 0

0
6. Save the create_force.tcl script.
Step 6: Create a Utility menu macro that runs a Tcl script.

1. Create a new Utility menu macro that calls the *evaltclscript command to run a Tcl script, using
the macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro. In the *beginmacro command, name
the macro EvalTcl.
*beginmacro("EvalTcl")
*evaltclscript($1,0)
*endmacro()
The macro name EvalTcl will be used to connect the button with the macro via the macroName field in
the *createbutton command.

*createbutton(5,"Create Force",16,0,10,GREEN,"Create z-direction force on

selected nodes","EvalTcl","create_force.tcl")
This creates a button on page 5 (User page), names it, places it in the 16th row, places its start at
column 0, gives it a width of 10 columns, applies to it the color green, provides a help string and
references the macro create_force.tcl defined in Step 6.
Notice that the full path is not used to reference the create_force.tcl script. A full path can be
specified if the file is not located in one of the predefined paths that HyperMesh searches to find scripts.

Users can add additional search paths using the TCL_INCLUDE environment variable. Relative paths
can also be used from these search paths.
userpage.mac.
To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open from the menu bar select Preferences
> Menu Config and click on retrieve next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper .mac file from the
hm\scripts\<profile name> directory based on the current user profile, or load the default hm.mac in
hm\bin\<platform> if no user profile is loaded.

The new button labeled Create Force should be on the User page.
2. Click this button to run the Tcl script that automatically creates forces in the z-direction of the selected
nodes.
The new forces are created on the specified nodes with the given magnitude and placed in the current
load collector If no load collector exists, the forces are placed in a load collector called auto1.
It is often necessary to debug Tcl scripts using the command window. This allows you to run the Tcl
script and easily review error messages, as well as print out debug information. Additional details can be
found in the Creating Tcl Scripts and Running Tcl Scripts sections.

In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that:
Determines the components of a given set of force vectors
Calculates a vector resultant sum of the forces
Reports the resultant sum
Tools
The Tcl commands if, foreach and expr will be used to add logic and mathematical functions to the
script. The command hm_getentityvalue is used to extract information from HyperMesh entities, based
on data names.
Data names are generic references to the information that physically define an entity in the HyperMesh
environment. An example of this is the x, y, and z coordinates that define a node location in three-
dimensional space. The available data names for each entity can be found in the HyperMesh Reference
Guide Data Names topic.
Data names are accessed using the hm_getentityvalue command. This command uses the data
names available for an entity to return the particular value of interest. The command will return a value that is
either a string or a numeric value, depending on the command syntax and the value stored in that particular
data name field. The basic syntax of the command is:
hm_getentityvalue entity_type id data_name flag
where entity_type is the requested entity type (elements, loads, nodes, etc.), id is the entity ID, the
data_name is the data field name of interest, and flag is either 0 or 1 depending on whether the command
should return a numeric value (0) or a string (1).
To retrieve the x-component of a force with ID 12, the following command can be used:
set force_x [hm_getentityvalue loads 12 "comp1" 0]
Note that to assign the value from the command to a variable, the command is placed within square
brackets.
Exercise
Create a Tcl script to compute the resultant sum of a given selection of forces. This requires that the script
read data from the force entities and manipulate the data to calculate the resultant. To calculate the
resultant of the forces, retrieve the x, y, and z components of the forces and compute a vector sum.
1. Define the process.
2. Determine the data names to use to extract the force components.
3. Create the Tcl script and add logic as necessary.
4. Test the script.
Step 1: Define the process.

The script should automate the following process:
Prompt the user to select a number of forces to calculate the resultant.
Make sure the user has selected one or more loads.
Extract the components of each force.
Sum the components.
Report the result to the user.
Step 2: Determine the data names to use to extract the force components.
The following table lists several relevant data names for force loads:
comp1 x component of the vector
comp2 y component of the vector
comp3 z component of the vector
config The number "1" for forces
The number "2" for moments
The number "8" for velocities
The number "9" for accelerations
entitytype the type of entity to which this load is applied

(1=node, 3=component, 10=set)
node when a load is applied to a node, this serves as a

pointer to the node
inputsystemid reference system ID
Steps 3-9: Create the Tcl script and add logic as necessary.
A Tcl script to perform this function might be similar to the following:
Step 3: Open a text file and save the file as HM8060.tcl.
Step 4: Allow the user to select the desired loads and then add those loads to a
list.
The *createmarkpanel command is used to allow the user to graphically select the loads from the

HyperMesh interface and add them to the mark. The command below adds the loads to mark 1. Once the
loads have been added to mark 1, the load ids are assigned to a list called loads_list, using the TCL
command set. Add the following 2 lines to the file HM8060.tcl:
*createmarkpanel loads 1 "Select forces to compute resultant";
set loads_list [hm_getmark loads 1];
Step 5: Initialize the variables for the x, y, and z components.

Use the TCL command set to initialize the variables for the x, y, and z components of force to 0. These
variables will be used later in the script to compute the resultant force for each component. Add the following
3 lines to the TCL file HM8060.tcl:
set x_comp_sum "0";
set y_comp_sum "0";
set z_comp_sum "0";
Step 6: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable loads_list has values.
If it does, proceed with the macro.
Before calculating the resultant of the forces selected, we should check to make sure that the variable
loads_list has values in it. This is done by using an if loop. In the if loop below, we are checking that the
variable loads_list is not empty. Add the following line to the TCL file to initialize the if loop:
if {$loads_list != ""} {
Step 7: Use a foreach loop to iterate through each load in the list loads_list and
extract the x, y, and z components using the hm_getentityvalue command and
the appropriate data name.
Using a foreach loop, each load in the list loads_list will be iterated through. Within the foreach loop,
each load is referenced by load_id and then the component value is added to the previous loads component’s
value. For example, let’s look at the x component. Using the set command, the variable x_comp_sum is
defined as the previous value of x_comp_sum, plus the x component of the current load. The x component of
the current load is retrieved by using the hm_getentityvalue command and the data name comp1 (all
the available data names for loads are shown in the table above). This process is done for the y and z
components as well. Add the following 4 lines to the TCL file:
foreach load_id $loads_list {
set x_comp_sum [expr $x_comp_sum + [hm_getentityvalue
loads $load_id "comp1" 0]];
set y_comp_sum [expr $y_comp_sum + [hm_getentityvalue

set z_comp_sum [expr $z_comp_sum + [hm_getentityvalue
Step 8: Report the Resultant Force to the user.

Use the command hm_usermessage to report each of the components of the resultant force. Add the
following line to the TCL file:
hm_usermessage "Resultant force: $x_comp_sum, $y_comp_sum
$z_comp_sum ";
Step 9: Complete the if loop and report an error message if no loads are found.
To complete the if loop, add an else statement. Remember the if statement checked to see if the
variable loads_list was not empty. This else statement returns an error message to the user to let them
know that no loads were selected.
} else {
hm_errormessage "No loads selected";
Step 10: Test the script.

1. From the menu bar, select View > Command Window to display the Command window at the
bottom of the screen.
2. Click and drag to open the Command window from the bottom edge of the screen.
3. Open the file c_channel-tcl.hm.
4. Use the source command to execute the script. For example:
source HM8060.tcl
It is often necessary to debug Tcl scripts using the Command window. This allows you to run the Tcl
There are several important assumptions used when creating this script.
The user will always select force loads, as opposed to moments, pressures, etc.
The forces are applied to nodes, as opposed to comps or sets, and are valid to sum.
All of the forces are applied in the same coordinate system so that it is valid to sum the component
values directly.
If any of these assumptions are not true, the values returned by the script may be invalid. Additional

conditional logic can be programmed to check for each of these situations and an error message can be
returned or they can be handled appropriately.
5. The result of the macro is shown in the status bar. Either a message with the resultant force is shown or
else there is a note saying that no loads were selected.

In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that creates spline surfaces from the nodes of selected tria
elements.
Tools
The Tcl commands if, foreach, and incr will be used to add logic to the script. The command
hm_getentityvalue is used to extract information from HyperMesh entities, based on data names.
environment. An example of this is the x-, y-, and z-coordinates that define a node location in three-
dimensional space. The available data names for each can be found in the HyperMesh Reference Guide
Data Names topic.
where entity_type is the requested entity type (elements, loads, nodes, etc…), id is the entity ID, the
brackets.
Exercise
Create a Tcl script that creates spline surfaces from the nodes of selected tria elements. This requires that
the script read data from the element entities. To create the spline surfaces, retrieve the 3-node IDs of the
tria elements.
2. Determine the data names to use to extract the element type and node IDs.
4. Test the script.

Prompt the user to select a number of tria elements to create spline surfaces from.
Make sure the user has selected one or more elements.

If a selected element is not a tria, skip that element.
Extract the node IDs of each element.
Create the spline surface from the nodes.
Report on the number of spline surfaces created.
Step 2: Determine the data names to use to extract the element type and node IDs.
The following table lists several relevant data names for tria elements:
config The number, “103”
node1 first node (node pointer)
node2 second node (node pointer)
node3 third node (node pointer)
Step 4: Allow the user to select the desired elements and then add those loads to a
list
The *createmarkpanel command is used to allow the user to graphically select the elements from the
HyperMesh interface and add them to the mark. The command below adds the elements to mark 1. Once
the elements have been added to mark 1, the element ids are assigned to a list called elems_list, using
the TCL command set. Add the following 2 lines to the file HM8070.tcl:
*createmarkpanel elems 1 "Select tria elements to create surfaces";

set elems_list [hm_getmark elems 1];
Step 5: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable elems_list has
values. If it does, proceed with the macro.
Before continuing with the macro, we should check to make sure that the variable elems_list has values
in it. This is done by using an if loop. In the if loop below, we are checking that the variable
elems_list is not empty. Add the following line to the TCL file to initialize the if loop:

if {$elems_list != ""} {
Step 6: Initialize a variable which counts the number of times the foreach loop is
entered.
The variable success_count is initialized and set to 0. This variable is used to count the number of times
the foreach loop (defined in Step 7) is entered. We will use this variable at the end of the script. Add the
following line to the TCL script:
set success_count 0;
Step 7: Use a foreach loop to iterate through each element in the list
elems_list and then set a variable config which stores the element
configuration. This is extracted using the hm_getentityvalue command and the
appropriate data name.
Using a foreach loop, each element in the list elems_list will be iterated through. Within the foreach
loop, each load is referenced by elem_id and then the variable config is defined. This variable is set to
the result of the hm_getentityvalue which uses the element data name config to report the configuration of
the element. A tria element will have an element configuration of 103 while a quad element will have a
configuration of 104. Add the following 2 lines to the TCL file:
foreach elem_id $elems_list {

set config [hm_getentityvalue elems $elem_id "config" 0];
Step 8: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable config has a value of
103. If it does, proceed with the macro.
Using an if loop, the variable config is checked to see if it doesn’t have a value of 103. A value of 103
means that the element configuration is a tria element. If the value is not equal to 103, the continue
statement is used to move outside of the foreach loop. If the value is the config variable is 103, then the
macro is continued. Add the following lines to the TCL script:
if {$config != 103} {
continue;
}
Step 9: Set 3 variables which contain the node id of each of the nodes used to
define the tria element.

Three variables are defined (node1, node2, and node3) which represent the 3 nodes that define the tria
element. These 3 nodes will be used to create the spline surface. Using the hm_getentityvalue
command and the element data names node1, node2, and node3 along with the pointer id, the node id is
retrieved and assigned to the appropriate variable. Add the following 3 lines to the TCL script:
set node1 [hm_getentityvalue elems $elem_id "node1.id" 0];
Step 10: Set the appropriate mode to create the surface.

Using the *surfacemode command, the surface mode can be set according to the following:
1 – mesh keep surface
2 – mesh delete surface
3 – mesh without surface
4 – surface only
In this example, we only want to create a surface, so mode 4 is used. Add the following line to the TCL
script:
*surfacemode 4;
Step 11: Create a node mark which contains the 3 nodes defined in Step 9 and
then use the *splinesurface command to create a spline surface using the
nodes in the mark.
Using the *createmark, mark 1 for nodes is created and it contains the 3 nodes defined in the variables
node1, node2, and node3.
*createmark nodes 1 $node1 $node2 $node3;

*splinesurface nodes 1 0 1 1;
Step 12: Increase the variable success_count which is used to count the number
of times the foreach loop is entered. Then, close the foreach loop.
Using the incr command, the variable success_count is increased. Following this command, a } is used
to close the foreach loop. Add the following 2 lines to the TCL script:
incr success_count;
}

Step 13: Clear the node and element marks, and then use the hm_usermessage
command to report the number of spline surfaces created.
Using the command *clearmark, mark 1 for the nodes and elements is cleared. Following these
commands, the hm_usermessage command is used to report the number of spline surfaces created. The
variable success_count is used to do this. Because this variable was increased each time the foreach
loop was entered and the element configuration was 103, this variable kept a count of the number of spline
surfaces that were created. Add the following 3 lines to the TCL script:
*clearmark nodes 1;
*clearmark elems 1;
hm_usermessage "$success_count splines created."
Step 14: Add an else statement which compliments the if statement which
checked to see if the elems_list variable was empty. If it is empty, the else
statement is executed.
The else statement compliments the if statement defined in Step 5 which checks to see if the
elems_list variable is empty. If it is empty the else statement is executed. Inside the else statement,
the hm_errormessage command is used to report to the user that no elements were selected. Following
the hm_errormessage command, the if statement is closed using a }. Add the following 3 lines to the
TCL script file:
} else {
hm_errormessage "No elements selected";
}

1. From the menu bar, select File > Open > Model and then load the file, spline-tcl.hm.
2. From the menu bar, select View > Command Window display the Command window at the bottom
of the screen.
source HM8070.tcl
5. Select a few of the tria elements and observe the spline surfaces that are created.
There are several important things to notice.

Only first order tria elements are considered. It is possible to add if/elseif logic to support other
element configurations.
The data names for the nodes associated with an element are pointers. A pointer is used to directly
access another data name. This means they “point” to the data names available for nodes. In order
to retrieve any data from a pointer, the data name requested for the particular pointer must also be
supplied. The additional data names are separated by a period or dot (.).
The *entityhighlighting and hm_commandfilestate commands are used to speed up the

execution of the script. The *entityhighlighting command disables highlighting entities when
the *createmark command is used. The hm_commandfilestate command controls if
commands are written out to the command file. It is always important to “reset” these commands
after a script is complete or before exiting due to an error.

In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that determines the radius of an arc.
Tools
The Tcl commands if and expr will be used to add logic and mathematical functions to the script. The
command hm_getentityvalue is used to extract information from HyperMesh entities, based on data
names.
environment. An example of this is the x, y, and z coordinates that define a node location in three-
dimensional space. The available data names for each entity can be found in the HyperMesh Reference
Guide Data Names topic.
where entity_type is the requested entity type (elements, loads, nodes, etc…), id is the entity ID, the
brackets.
Exercise
Create a Tcl script that determines the radius of a user selected arc. One point on the line and the center of
the arc will need to be calculated.
2. Determine the data names to use to extract the node coordinates.
4. Test the script.

Prompt the user to select a line.
Make sure the user has selected only one line.

Determine the center of the arc by creating temporary nodes.
Calculate the distance between one end of the arc and the center node using node coordinate data
names.
Step 2: Determine the data names to use to extract the node coordinates.
The following table lists several relevant data names for nodes:
globalx x coordinate in the global system
globaly y coordinate in the global system
globalz z coordinate in the global system
Step 4: Allow the user to select the desired line which defines a circle or an arc
and then add that line to a variable
The *createmarkpanel command is used to allow the user to graphically select the line which defines a
circle or an arc from the HyperMesh interface and add it to the mark. The command below adds the line to
mark 1. Once the line has been added to mark 1, the line id is assigned to a variable called line_list,
using the TCL command set. Add the following 2 lines to the file HM8080.tcl:
*createmarkpanel lines 1 "Select line to find radius";

set line_list [hm_getmark lines 1];
Step 5: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable line_list has
values. If it does, proceed with the macro.
Before continuing with the macro, we should check to make sure that the variable line_list has values in
it. This is done by using an if loop. In the if loop below, we are checking to see if the variable
line_list is empty. If the variable is empty, an error message is given to the user. Also, using the
elseif statement in the if loop, we can check to see if more than one line is selected. If more than one
line is selected, an error message is reported. If neither of those conditions are met, the macro proceeds
under the else statement. Add the following line to the TCL file to define the if loop:

if {$line_list == ""} {
hm_errormessage "No lines selected";
} elseif {[llength $line_list] != 1} {
hm_errormessage "Only one line may be selected";
} else {
Step 6: Create 3 nodes on the line selected and then create a node at the circle
center of the 3 nodes. Add those nodes to a variable.
Use the *nodecreateonlines command to create 3 nodes on the line which is in mark 1. This is done
with the first command below. Then, use the *createcenternode to create a node at the center of a
circle formed by the three nodes that were just created in the *nodecreateonlines command. These
three nodes are referenced by using -1. -2, and -3 which reference the last node created, the second to last
node created, and the third to last node created. Then, the nodes are added to the nodes mark 1 using the *
createmark command. Again, the nodes are referenced using -1, -2, -3, and -4 to add the last 4 nodes
created to the mark. Finally, the nodes in mark 1 are added to the variable node_list. Add the following 4
lines to the TCL script:
*nodecreateonlines lines 1 3 0 0;
*createcenternode -1 -2 -3;
*createmark nodes 1 -1 -2 -3 -4;
set node_list [hm_getmark nodes 1];
Step 7: Use the lindex command to get the node id of the first node in the list
node_list. Then get the x, y, and z coordinates for the node.
Set a variable called id which contains the node id for the first node in the list node_list. The id for the
first node is retrieved using the lindex command which takes the variable node_list and using the index
0, retrieves the first node id in the list. Then, using the variable id and the hm_getentityvalue command
with the node data names x, y, and z, the x, y, and z coordinates for the node are set to the variables x1, y1
, and z1. Add the following 4 lines to the TCL script:
set id [lindex $node_list 0];

set x1 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "x" 0];
set y1 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "y" 0];
set z1 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "z" 0];
Step 8: Use the lindex command to get the node id of the last node in the list

node_list. Then get the x, y, and z coordinates for the node.
Set a variable called id which contains the node id for the last node in the list node_list. The id for the
first node is retrieved using the lindex command which takes the variable node_list and using the index
3, retrieves the first node id in the list. Then, using the variable id and the hm_getentityvalue command
with the node data names x, y, and z, the x, y, and z coordinates for the node are set to the variables x2, y2
, and z2. Add the following 4 lines to the TCL script:
set id [lindex $node_list 3 ];

set x2 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "x" 0];
set y2 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "y" 0];
set z2 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "z" 0];
Step 9: Define three variables which are the x, y, and z distance between the two
nodes defined in the last two steps.
Three variables are defined which are simply the x, y, and z distance between the two nodes defined in Steps
7 and 8. The component difference between each node is calculated using the coordinates defined in Steps
7 and 8 and the TCL command expr. Add the following 3 lines to the TCL script:
set dx [expr $x1 - $x2];

set dy [expr $y1 - $y2];
set dz [expr $z1 - $z2];
Step 10: Define a variable called radius which uses the variables dx, dy, and dz
to calculate the radius of the line which is a circle or an arc.
Using the three variables which were defined in the previous step (dx, dy, and dz) the magnitude of the
distance is calculated. This distance corresponds to the radius of the arc/circle which is defined by the line
selected. To calculate the radius, the expr command is used. Add the following line to the TCL script:
set radius [expr sqrt(($dx*$dx) + ($dy*$dy) + ($dz*$dz))];
Step 11: Clear the nodes in the temporary node mark.

To clear all the nodes in the temporary node mark, use the *nodecleartempmark command. Add the
following command to the TCL script:
*nodecleartempmark;

Step 11: Report to the user the radius of the selected line.
Using the hm_usermessage command, the value of the variable radius is reported to the user. Also, close
the if loop which was started back in Step 5. Add the following two lines to the TCL script:
hm_usermessage "Radius = $radius";

}
Step 12: Clear the lines and nodes mark.

Using the hm_markclear command, the nodes mark and the lines mark are cleared. Add the following two
lines to the TCL script:
hm_markclear lines 1;
hm_markclear nodes 1;

1. From the File menu, load the file, radius-tcl.hm.
2. From the menu bar, select View, then Command Window to display the Command window at the

source HM8080.tcl
It is oft*en necessary to debug Tcl scripts using the Command window. This allows you to run the Tcl
5. Select different lines to review the calculated radius.
Important things to notice.
The *entityhighlighting and hm_commandfilestate commands are used to speed up the

execution of the script. The *entityhighlighting command disables highlighting entities when
the *createmark command is used. The hm_commandfilestate command controls if
commands are written out to the command file. It is always important to “reset” these commands
after a script is complete or before exiting due to an error.

In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that:
Prompts the user for a property name and thickness
Creates the property collector
Assigns the OptiStruct PSHELL card image to the property collector
Assigns the thickness value to the property
Tools
The Tcl command if will be used to add logic to the script. The commands *dictionaryload and
*attributeupdatedouble are used to assign information to the property collector.
Solver-specific data created from the HyperMesh template system is stored in card images. Each piece of
data that defines a card image has a text string (data name) and a numeric attribute ID. An example is the
Young’s Modulus for a material.
Templates exist for each solver supported by HyperMesh and are located in sub-folders under the
<altair_home>\templates\feoutput directory. These templates define every solver-specific attribute
including data names, attribute IDs, card image formats, and the format of the data upon export. The
*defineattribute command is used to define attribute data names and IDs in a template file.
In order to determine the commands required to create template-specific data, it is best to run through the
process in HyperMesh and to review the commands that are written to the command.cmf file.
Property collectors can be created and edited using the Model Browser. Simply right click in the Model
Browser and select Create > Property to create one. To change the name, color, or card image of a
property collector, right click on the property name in the Model Browser and select Edit
Exercise
Create a Tcl script to create a property collector and assign a thickness. This requires that the script prompt
the user for a name and a thickness value.
working directory.
6. Test the script.


Prompt the user to enter a name and a thickness value.
Make sure a property collector with the supplied name does not already exist.
Create the new property collector.
Assign the PSHELL card image to the property.
Assign the thickness to the PSHELL card.

the file is created in the directory HyperMesh is launched from. As soon as you begin working in
HyperMesh, all executed commands are written to the command.cmf file. If the file already exists, the
commands are appended to the file. Deleting the file allows HyperMesh to create a new file and allows the
user to easily find the relevant commands.

1. If the RADIOSS BulkData user profile is not currently loaded, please load it at this time.
2. Right click in the Model Browser and select Create > Property.
3. Leave Type set to all and in the Name field, enter a name for the property.
4. For card image=, select PSHELL.
5. Check the option for Card edit property upon creation.
6. Click Create.
7. Activate the T field and enter a thickness value.
8. Click return.

2. Select and copy all lines in the file.
Step 5: Create a Tcl script by converting the commands to Tcl format and modify it
as necessary.
1. Create a new Tcl file using any text editor.
2. Paste the copied commands from the command.cmf file inside the Tcl file.

3. Remove all () and , and replace them with spaces. Also place semi-colons (;) at the end of each line.
The commands should look something like:
*collectorcreateonly properties "my_prop" "" 11;
*createmark properties 2 "my_prop";
*dictionaryload properties 2 "C:/Altair/hw11.0/templates/feoutput/

optistruct/optistruct" "PSHELL";
*attributeupdateint properties 1 3240 1 2 0 1;
*attributeupdatedouble properties 1 95 1 0 0 1;
*attributeupdatedouble properties 1 116 1 0 0 0.833333;
These commands can now be run to duplicate the creation of the PSHELL property. However, simply
running these commands as-is is not very flexible. The property ID, name and values are all hard coded.
The template file location in the *dictionaryload command is also hard coded. Finally, there are a lot of
extra commands that set unnecessary attributes.
4. Remove unnecessary *attributeupdate commands. Since you are only interested in applying the
thickness value, you can remove the other commands, leaving only the following commands:

5. In the *attributeupdatedouble command, the ID of the property is hard coded. In order to make
this flexible, you need to replace the hard coded ID with the ID of the new property collector: (Changes
to the above commands are shown below in bold print).
*createmark properties 2 -1
set prop_id [hm_getmark props 2];


*attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 0.25;
Supplying an ID of -1 to the *createmark command can be used to select the most recently created
entity.
6. The template file path is also hard coded. You can make this flexible using the hm_info command:
*dictionaryload properties 2 "[hm_info -appinfo SPECIFIEDPATH

TEMPLATES_DIR]/feoutput/optistruct/optistruct" "PSHELL";
*attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 0.25;
The user also needs to be prompted to enter a property name and thickness value. You can then
substitute those variables in the relevant commands:
set prop_name [hm_getstring "Name="];
set prop_thick [hm_getfloat "Thickness="];
*collectorcreateonly properties "$prop_name" "" 11;
*createmark properties 2 "$prop_name";

*attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 $prop_thick;
7. Finally, You need to add logic to test in order to make sure that the property name and thickness values
are valid:
set prop_name [hm_getstring "Name="];
if {$prop_name == ""} {
hm_errormessage "No name specified.";
return;
} elseif {[hm_entityinfo exist properties $prop_name –byname] == 1} {
hm_errormessage "Property already exists.";
return;
}
set prop_thick [hm_getfloat "Thickness="];
if {$prop_thick == "" || $prop_thick <= 0.0} {
hm_errormessage "Invalid thickness value specified.";
return;

}
*collectorcreateonly properties "$prop_name" "" 11;
*createmark properties 2 "$prop_name";
*attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 $prop_thick;

1. From the menu bar, select View > Command Window to display the Command window at the
2. Click and drag to open the Command window from the top or bottom edge of the screen.
source filename.tcl

Post-Processing


This tutorial demonstrates how to write an input file for a given fatigue solver using the options available on
the fatigue panel.
Step 1: Retrieve the model file.

For this tutorial, retrieve the file, keyhole.hm. This file contains a finite element (FE) model—for which an
analysis has already been conducted—to obtain the stress/strain information for durability loads of interest.
1. From the menu bar, select File > Open > Model.
2. Retrieve the keyhole.hm file.
Step 2: Load the results file.

1. From the menu bar, select File > Load > Results File.
2. Browse for the keyhole.res file.
Step 3: Export data and write a fatigue solver input deck.

1. From the Post page, enter the fatigue panel.
2. Toggle FE Analysis Type: to static/modal.
Results contained in keyhole.res were obtained from linear statics analysis.
Note: Select the transient dynamic option if a dynamic finite element analysis was used to obtain
the stress/strain results for the model.
3. Toggle Output File Format: to ascii.
Note: Select the binary option if the fatigue solver allows a binary input file.
For more information on fatigue solvers and acceptable input file formats, please see the
fatigue panel in the Panels online Help.
4. Click browse… and locate the file folder you want store the file in, then enter a name for the output file.
This output file is the input file for the fatigue solver.
5. Click data group = and select any of the data groups that you want to write to the output file.
The data groups are organized based on whether nodal or elemental results are available in the results
file.

Note: For more information on how HyperMesh organizes the analysis results available in the results
file, please see the fatigue panel in the Panels online help.
6. Set select simulation: to all.
This specifies the data in the results file that is written to the output file. In this case, selecting all writes
the stress/strain data for the selected nodes or elements for all loadcases represented in keyhole.res
.
Note: You can write out stress/strain information for all of the time steps, or you can choose a range
from a starting time step to an ending time step, or you can choose a selection of time steps
manually from the available list.
For more information, see the fatigue panel in the Panels online help.
The next sub-step is to select the entities for which the finite element analysis results file is written.
Note: The type of entity you select is based upon the data group you selected. Select nodes if the
data group you selected refers to nodal results. Similarly, select elements if the data group
you selected refers to elemental results. Select sets to choose a predefined entity set
comprised of nodes or elements corresponding to a data group with nodal/elemental results,
respectively. If the data group results and the entity type are not the same, HyperMesh
displays the error message, "Results file doesn’t contain nodal values."
7. Set the selector to elems.
8. Click elems >> by window.
9. Draw the window as shown in the following image.
10. Click interior.
12. Click write.
An ASCII file is written to the selected directory.

You can read this file into the appropriate fatigue solver to complete the fatigue analysis.

Understand applications for and be able to extract resultant forces and moments from HyperMesh
free body diagram (FBD) capabilities, including defining cross-sections for which resultant forces and
moments are calculated
Perform free body diagrams within HyperMesh to understand load paths and export free body loads
to detailed models of interest as boundary conditions (BCs) within a submodeling scheme. This
process is graphically shown for reference, following.
Global loads model of a generic w ing.
Spar2 element set from the global loads model (middle Spar) w ith free body loads extracted.

Detailed model of Spar2 w ith free body loads applied as BCs from global loads model.
Exercises
This tutorial contains the following exercises:
Exercise 1: Creating Shear Moment Diagrams and Potato Plots from Global Loads Model using Resultant
Force and Moment Functionality
Exercise 2: Extracting Free Body Loads from Global Loads Model and Transfering to Detailed Model as
Boundary Conditions - Submodeling Techniques
Exercise 1: Creating of Shear Moment Diagrams and Potato Plots from Global
Loads Model using Resultant Force and Moment Functionality
This exercise uses the model file, icw_ex1.hm.
Step 1: Create a coordinate system for spar2.

1. Open HyperMesh and load the model file, icw_ex1.hm.
2. Load the RADIOSS (BulkData) user profile:
1. On the Standard toolbar, click Load User Profile ( ) tool.
2. Toggle to RADIOSS and select BulkData from the pull-down menu.
3. Click OK.
3. From the menu bar, select Tools, then select Set Browser.
Since you will be working with Spar2 you will need to display the elements which represent Spar2 in the
graphics area. Element sets, in addition to components and assemblies, can be used as a model

grouping and visualization tool. Elements sets can be created, deleted, made visible, and hidden using
Set Browser.
4. On the Sets tab, expand the Elements folder.
5. Right-click Spar2 element set, and select Isolate.
Elements that represent Spar2 are now displayed in the graphics area. To turn on element shading, from
the Visualization toolbar, click Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines ( ).
6. To create nodes on the left end of Spar2, from the menu bar, select Geometry > Create > Nodes >
Interpolate Nodes to go to the Nodes panel.
7. Select the nodes on the top and bottom of the left side, and click create.
8. Repeat step 1.7 for the right side of Spar2.
9. Click return to exit the Nodes panel.
10. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Create > Systems > Axis Direction
11. To create a system with origin at the left end and x-axis along the length of the spar, go to the create by
axis direction subpanel.
12. Click origin and select left-middle node (from step 1.7).

13. Select right-middle node (from step 1.8) for x-axis node.
14. Select left-top node for the xy-plane node.
15. Toggle to rectangular, and click create.
16. Click return to exit the Systems panel.
Step 2: Create cross-section definitions for Spar2.

1. On the menu bar, select Post, then Free Body, then Cross-Section to open the FBD Cross-section
Manager tab.
Cross-section definitions are determined by the following criteria:
An element set that contains the nodes that define the cross-section and determines which "side"
the resultant force and moment vectors are to be calculated. Only elements connected to the nodes
that define the cross-section, on one side or the other, need to be included in the element set.
However, additional elements can be included for visualization purposes with no effect on the
calculations.
A node set that defines the cross-section geometry.
A summation node that can be any node in the model or that can be automatically set to the
calculated centroid of the defined cross-section. Centroidal calculations are performed using nodal
coordinates that make up the cross-section only, hence element thicknesses associated with the

elements attached to the section are not considered. As such, there could be slight differences in
the calculated centroid and the "true" centroid of the section if thicknesses vary throughout the
section or the section is overly idealized.
(Optional) A result system that defines the coordinate system for which the resultant force and
moment vectors are transformed into and output for the selected cross-section(s).
2. On the FDB Cross-section Manager panel, click the arrow for Advanced options to display the Auto
create cross-section form.
You will use this form to create cross-sections along the length of Spar2.
Resultant force and moment extractions will be performed on these cross-sections to obtain the
necessary data to generate shear moment diagrams and potato plots. There are two options to define
cross-sections: a manual method and an advanced method. The advanced method automates the
creation of "continuous" cross-sections. The advanced method will be used in this tutorial. See the online
help for details about the manual method.
3. Click Elements twice, and then select all elements that make up Spar2.
4. Click proceed.
5. Click Nodes twice, select the left-top and left-bottom nodes which define the first cross-section for
Spar2.
6. Click proceed.

7. In the Element set prefix field, enter Spar2_E and in the Node set prefix, enter Spar2_N.
Since the cross-section manager utility creates the necessary element and node sets, you must define
a prefix string for both element and node sets. This string will be appended by an incremental number to
give each created set a unique name. Optional input includes numbering offset which defines an initial
number for which the appended set numbers will begin.
8. Verify that the Sets accumulate box is selected.
9. Click Accept.
The spreadsheet populates with the definitions of the cross-sections generated by the Auto create
cross-sections utility.

10. Click Advanced options to close the Auto create cross-sections form.
11. Select the Display sections check box and then select any section in the spreadsheet to review the
selected cross-section.
The graphics area will be updated with the element set, node set, sum node, and result system that
define the selected cross-section. Optionally, if you select the Show model check box, the entire
model will be visible in the graphics area with the selected cross-section highlighted in red and the
remainder of the model transparent.
12. Select the first cross-section in the spreadsheet (Spar2_E1; Spar2_N1), hold SHIFT, and select the last
cross-section (Spar2_E8; Spar2_N9) to select the cross-sections for updating their result system.
To update any single or multiple cross-sections, select the cross-sections from the spreadsheet using
CTRL/SHIFT and then select Summation Node or Result System to update these definitions for all
selected cross-sections.
13. Click Result System twice.
14. Select the system located at the left-middle end of Spar2 (system 102 created in Step 1), and click

proceed.
Note: You may have to display the Longeron2 system collector from the Model Browser (Model tab)
to display system 102.
All cross-sections update to result system 102. Note that system 102 has the x-axis along the length of
the spar, y-axis located at the neutral axis of the beam in the plane of the web, and z-axis perpendicular
to the web of the beam. Also note that the sum node is set to the default centroid, which automatically
calculates the centroid of each cross-section and at which the resulting resultant force and moment
calculations will be performed. The result system is the system for which all resultant force and moment
result vectors will be transformed into and output.
15. Click Close to exit the FBD Cross-Section Manager utility.
Step 3: Extract resultant force and moment data for all cross-sections of Spar2 for
all load cases.
1. From the menu bar, select Post, then Free Body, then Resultant Force and Moment to open the
Resultant Force and Moment tab.
2. From the .op2 file browser, select icw.op2.
The selected .op2 file loads into the HyperMesh database for use with all FBD utilities until another .
op2 file is selected. It also populates the Subcases list box with all subcases in the selected .op2 file
that contain Grid Point Force (GPFORCE) data. See the FBD documentation in the HyperMesh User's
guide for more details.
3. In the Loadsteps list, select all the loadsteps using the filter buttons on the top of the list box or with
CTRL/SHIFT.
4. In the Cross-sections list, select all Spar2 cross-sections previously defined using the filter buttons on
the top of the list box or with CTRL/SHIFT.
5. Review the following table for a description of the Output options for the resultant force and moment
utility.
Function Description

Coordinate System Defines the coordinate system used for output of
node locations (x,y,z) only. The coordinate
system does not affect the transformation of the
resultant force and moment vector results, which
is defined by the result system on each cross-
section definition.
Zero tolerance Defines any number less than this number is set
to zero for numerical issues.
Create load collectors Creates load collectors containing the results of

the resultant force and moment calculations so
that the results can be visualized in the graphics
area as force and moment vectors.
Show summary table Brings up a window with formatted results similar

to the .csv (comma separated) file. Use this
output for quick checks of the data without having
to open an alternative spreadsheet or text editor
program.
Create .csv file Creates a .csv file with the results of the
resultant force and moment calculations, which
can be opened directly within standard
spreadsheet applications.
Create .fbd file Creates an .fbd file with the results of the
can be directly read into HyperGraph to create
shear moment diagrams and potato plots.
6. Click Coordinate system twice.
7. Select coordinate system 102 which is located at left-middle end of Spar2, and then click proceed.
Note: You may have to display the Longeron2 system collector from the Model Browser (Model tab)

8. Set Zero tolerance to 0.01.
9. Activate the Create load collectors check box and optionally select a default color for the created load
collectors.
10. Activate the Show summary table check box.
11. Activate the Create .csv file check box, and click select from list. ( ) to select an existing .csv file
(append data) or enter a new file name; in this case, enter icw_res_force_moment.csv.
12. Activate the Create .fbd file check box, and click select from list. ( ) to select an existing .fbd file
(append data) or enter a new file name; in this case, enter icw_res_force_moment.fbd.
By default, files are put into the HyperMesh start directory unless you specify another directory or enter
a file name.
13. Click Accept to execute the resultant force and moment calculations on all selected cross-sections for
all selected subcases.
The Resultant Force and Moment Output Summary window displays the resultant force and moment
calculations (see the following image). For each cross-section, there is a separate data block grouped by
loadstep. The data block contains cross-section nodal forces, moments, and the sum of those nodal
forces and moments about the defined sum node, in this case the calculated centroid of the cross-
section. Note that the sum of the moment components (Mx, My, Mz) for each node is not the direct
sum, as the (rXF) terms for the force resultant vector about the sum node must also be added to each
moment component appropriately. The sum of the forces components (Fx, Fy, Fz) for each node is,
however, the simple sum.

14. (Optional) Open the .csv (comma separated) file directly with Microsoft Excel by using Windows
Explorer and double-clicking the file, icw_res_force_moment.csv.
This file contains the same results as the summary table in the previous image, but is available for import
into standard spreadsheet or text editor programs.
15. (Optional) Open the .fbd file, icw_res_force_moment.fbd, in any standard text editor program.
By default, files are put into the HyperMesh start directory unless you specify another directory or enter
a file name.
This file contains the same results as the summary table in the previous image, but in a compact format
for use with HyperGraph in generating shear moment diagrams and potato plots of resultant force and
moment data for various cross-sections.
16. Click Close to exit the Resultant Force and Moment utility.
Vector review of the Resultant Force and Moment results in the graphics area is covered in the next
step.
Step 4: Use FBD Results Manager to review resultant force and moment vectors in
graphics area.
1. From the menu bar, select Post, then Free Body Results Manager to open the FBD Results Manager
tab.

2. Click Element Set twice.
3. Click set, and select Spar2_E2.
4. Click proceed.
5. In the FDB Results Manager window, activate the Show model check box to display the entire model
with the selected element set highlighted in red and all other elements transparent. This feature will help
you easily locate the element set within the model.
6. For Results type, select Resultant Force and Moment.
This operation scans the database for available loadsteps with resultant force and moment results and
populates the Loadsteps: list box.
7. For Loadsteps, select SUBCASE1.
This operation scans the database for available node sets with resultant force and moment results and
populates the Node sets: list box.
8. For Node sets, select Spar2_N3.
This operation will scan the database for available force and moment vector results and will enable the
check boxes for those force and moment vectors which are available.
9. For Display options, select Fy (shear—the results coordinate system had y-axis in the plane of the
web) and Mz (principal bending moment—the results coordinate system had z-axis perpendicular to the
plane of the web).
To determine the result coordinate system applied to a given cross-section of interest, use the FBD
Cross-Section Manager to review the defined cross-section. This operation will show the element set,
node set, results system, and sum node defined for the selected cross-section. Optionally, select other
force components to review their magnitude and direction in the graphics area. Single or multiple force
and moment vector results can be displayed in the graphics area to facilitate data mining and reporting.
10. (Optional) Select Update load collector color and select color to change the color of the selected load
vectors.
The new color setting applies only to the load components selected and is saved in the database.
Therefore, this option can be used to recolor any single or multiple load vectors for any FBD result.
11. Click Accept to visualize the resultant force and moment vectors in the graphics area.
12. (Optional) Continue to review resultant force and moment vectors following Steps 4.2-4.14 for additional
cross-sections.
13. Click Reset to clear the display and reset the form.
14. Click Close to exit FBD Results Manager.

Step 5: Generate potato plots for Spar2 for selected cross-sections.
1. Click the Add Page to create a new page.
2. On the toolbar, use the pull-down menu to switch to the HyperGraph 2D client.
3. From the menu bar, select Tools, then Free Body Diagrams, then Potato Plot to open the Potato Plot
dialog.
4. Click Select from List ( ) to load the file, icw_res_force_moment.fbd.
The available cross-sections and loadstpes within the .fbd file are loaded into the form.
5. From the Sections list, select cross-section Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 as the cross-section for which to
generate potato plots.
Potato plots generate a single plot for each selected cross-section which contains data points for all
selected loadsteps Potato plots effectively "take a slice" through shear moment diagrams at a given
cross-section for all selected loadsteps. Since Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 is the wing root section for Spar2, it
will be the largest loaded section and hence can be utilized to determine the critical loadsteps for Spar2.
Potato plots can facilitate critical loadstep determination by identifying maximum and minimum loads on
given cross-section. In this case, you are going to be interested in identifying maximum and minimum
shear and moment forces, Fy and Mz respectively. There are other methods for determining critical
loadsteps and standard practices and methods should be examined and utilized.
6. From the Loadsteps list, select all loadsteps using filter buttons next to the list box or using CTRL/
SHIFT.
7. On the Potato Plots tab, for X component select Fy (shear).
8. For Y Component, select Mz (principal bending moment).

9. Click Add plot.
Note: you can add additional potato plots by selecting alternative X and Y components and clicking Add
Plot. You can also delete defined plots by selecting the plots from the spreadsheet area and
clicking Delete Plots.
10. (Optional) On the Plot Titles tab, enter a Title and Subtitle.
11. On the Plot Options tab, for Reverse sign select cross-section Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 in the top drop-
down list.
12. Select Reverse selected section in the bottom drop-down list.
The explanation for the reverse cross-section options is discussed in Step 6.11.
13. Activate the Label points: Loadstep check box.
14. Click Apply to generate the requested potato plots.
Since one cross-section was selected, one plot will be generated (one for each cross-section). Potato
plots are typically used to determine the loadsteps from which maximum/minimum behavior occurs.
From the resulting potato plot of cross-section Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 it can be determined that maximum/
minimum loadsteps for shear and moment are SUBCASES 9, 11, 14, and 16. These critical loadsteps
will be considered in future submodeling procedures as a subset of all the loadsteps used to design the
spar. FBD forces will be extracted from these loadsteps in Exercise #2 and applied to a detailed model
of Spar2 so that FBD analysis and design of the spar can be performed.
Step 6: Generate shear moment diagrams for Spar2 for selected subcases.
1. Click the Add Page to create a new page.
2. From the menu bar, select Tools > Free Body Diagram > Shear Moment Plot to open the Shear
Moment Plot panel.
3. From the menu bar, select Utilities, then Free Body Diagram, then Shear Moment Plot to open the
Shear Moment Plot dialog.

4. Click Select from List. ( ) to load the file, icw_res_force_moment.fbd.
The available cross-sections and loadsteps within the .fbd file are loaded into the form.
5. From the Sections list, select all sections related to Spar2 (Spar2_E1_Spar_N1 through
Spar2_E8_Spar2_N9) using filter buttons next to the list box or using CTRL/SHIFT.
6. From the Loadsteps list, select SUBCASE 9, SUBCASE 11, SUBCASE 14, and SUBCASE 16 the
critical loadsteps determined in Step 6.5.
7. On the VMT Plots tab, for X component select X. The (X) X component is selected because the
resultant force and moment extraction coordinate system was performed with coordinate system 102
which has the x-axis along the length of the Spar.
Options for X component include X, Y, or Z coordinates as defined from the coordinate system selected
to perform the resultant force and moment extraction (Step 3, part 6).
8. On the VMT Plots tab, for Y component select Fy and Mz to plot the shear and principal bending
moment for Spar2.
To determine the result coordinate system applied to a given cross-section of interest, use FBD Cross-
Section Manager to review the defined cross-section. This operation will show the element set, node
set, results system, and sum node defined for the selected cross-section and can help in identifying
which components of force or moment are required for the desired plot.
9. (Optional) On the Plot Titles tab, type a Title and Subtitle.
10. On the Plot Options tab, for Reverse sign select cross-section Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 in the top drop-
down list.
11. Select Reverse selected section in the bottom drop-down list.
The option allows for methods to reverse the sign of the results from any single or multiple cross-
sections. The option is useful since, for this particular plot, all cross-sections were defined coming from
the right. However the first section [Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1], since it has no elements to the left of this
cross-section, can only be defined from the left. Cross-sections, defined by the nodes and elements
within their respective sets, can be defined coming from the left or right depending on the elements
chosen for any given nodal cross-section definition. Therefore any given cross-section can be defined
from the left or from the right. The only difference in the results defined either way is that the results will
be opposite in sign but equal in magnitude. Either way, for a shear moment diagram, it is important that
all selected cross-sections be defined coming from the same direction so that the resulting plot is valid.
12. Verify that the Envelop results check box is deactivated.
If you only want the maximum/minimum selected Y components to be plotted from all selected
loadsteps for each cross-section, activate the envelop check box. For this tutorial, do not activate this
check box.
13. For Layout, select the layout of plots desired.
This option affects the number of resulting plots that will be generated. The options are: One plot per
loadstep, One plot per Y Component, and One curve per plot. The total number of curves that are
generated is always (Curves = number or loadsteps * number of Y components). In this example, since
you selected four loadsteps and two Y components, there are a total of eight curves that will be
extracted. The number of plots that these eight curves will be displayed on depends on the layout
selection. With the option, One Plot per loadstep, there are four plots since there are four loadsteps;

each plot with both selected Y components, or in this case shear and moment on a single plot for each
loadstep. The results of this layout option are shown in first picture, following. With the option, One Plot
per Y component, there are two plots since there are two Y components, each plot with all four
selected loadsteps, or in this case shear on one plot and moment on another plot for all four selected
loadsteps. The results of this layout option are shown in the second picture, following. Try both options.
14. Click Apply to generate the shear moment plots.
These plots can be used with traditional mechanics of materials calculations such as S = My/I and T =
VQ/IT to calculate stresses for various cross-sections. The plots provide the M (bending or Mz) and V
(shear or Fy) values to these equations which when coupled with cross-section properties which can be
calculated using HyperBeam (from the main menu, select the1D page, then select HyperBeam), allows
for the calculation of the cross-section stresses.
Exercise 2: Extracting Free Body Diagrams from Global Loads Model and
Transfering to Detailed Model as Boundary Conditions – Submodeling Techniques
This exercise uses the model file, icw_ex2.hm.

Step 1: Extract free body diagrams for Spar2 using FBD Forces utility.
1. If continuing from Exercise 1, proceed; otherwise open HyperMesh and load the model file, icw_ex2.hm
.
2. From the menu bar select Post, then Free Body, then Force to open the FBD Forces tab.
3. If the icw.op2 file is currently loaded, proceed; otherwise, from the .op2 file: browser, select icw.op2.
The selected .op2 file loads into the HyperMesh database for use with all FBD utilities until another .
op2 file is selected. It also populates the Subcases list box with all subcases in the selected .op2 file
that contain Grid Point Force (GPFORCE) data. See the FBD documentation in the HyperMesh User's
guide for more details.
4. In the Loadsteps list, select SUBCASE 9, SUBCASE 11, SUBCASE 14, and SUBCASE 16, the critical
subcases determined in Exercise 1, Step 5.
5. In the Entity selection area, click Element Set twice.
6. Click set, then select the Spar2 element set.
7. Click proceed.
Elements that represent Spar2 are now displayed in the graphics area. To turn on element shading,
click Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines ( ).
8. Click Result System twice.
The graphic area is updated with all systems in the model.
9. Select the system located at the left-middle end of Spar2 (system 102 created in Exercise 1, Step 1),
and click proceed.
Note: You may have to display the Longeron2 system collector from the Model browser (Model tab)

The result system is the system for which all free body force and moment result vectors will be
transformed into and output.
10. Click Summation Node twice, select the left-bottom node, and then click proceed.
This summation node is the node for which all free body force and moment vector results will be summed
about to generate a single equivalent resultant force and moment vector. Note that for a free body (all
loads), the summation about any point must be zero. Therefore, this feature is typically used to verify
that the extraction produced a free body with zero summation. However, if a free body other than (all
loads) is performed, the selection of the summation node can be used to determine the equivalent
resultant force and moment vector for the extracted free body (applied load only or reaction loads only)
which in general will not be zero and can be of interest.
Review the following table for a description of the Output options for the FBD Forces utility.
Output Function Description
FBD type Defines the types of grid point forces (GPFORCE)

to consider in the free body extraction.
GPFORCE data available at any given node
includes, element, applied, SPC, and MPC
forces. FBD types include; All loads (which
considers all GPFORCE data), Applied loads
only (which only considers applied forces only),

and Reaction loads only (which considers SPC
and MPC forces only).
Zero tolerance Defines any number less than this number is set
to zero for numerical issues.
Create load collectors Creates load collectors containing the results of

the FBD force calculations so that the results can
be visualized in the graphics area as force and
moment vectors.
Show summary table This option brings up a window with formatted

results similar to the .csv (comma separated)
file. Use this output for quick checks of the data
without having to open an alternative spreadsheet
or text editor program.
Create .csv file Creates a .csv file with the results of the
can be opened directly within any standard
spreadsheet applications.
11. For FBD type, select All Loads.
12. For Zero tolerance, type 0.01.
13. Activate Create load collectors and optionally select a default color for the created load collectors.
14. Activate Show summary table.
15. Activate Create .csv file, browse to the desired location, and type icw_fbd_force.csv.
16. Click Accept to execute the FBD forces calculations for all selected subcases.
The FBD Forces Output Summary window displays the FBD forces calculations (see following image).
There is a separate data block grouped by loadstep. The data block contains free body nodal forces,
moments, and the sum of those nodal forces and moments about the defined sum node. Note that the
sum of the moment components (Mx, My, Mz) for each node is not the direct sum as the (rXF) terms for
the force resultant vector about the sum node must also be added to each moment component
appropriately. The sum of the forces components (Fx, Fy, Fz) for each node is, however, the simple
sum. In addition, the sum for a Free Body – All Loads result should be, and is, zero about any sum
node selected. You can verify this with the SUM line at the bottom of each data block. For other FBD
types, however, the sum about the sum node may or may not be zero, depending on the selections.

17. (Optional) Open the icw_fbd_forces.csv file directly with Microsoft Excel by double-clicking the file
in Windows Explorer. This file contains the same results as the summary table in the previous image,
but is available for import into standard spreadsheet or text editor programs.
18. Click Close to exit FBD Forces utility.
Vector review of the FBD forces results in the graphics area is covered in the next step.
Step 2: Use FBD Results Manager to review FBD force vectors in graphics area.
1. From the menu bar, select Post, then Free Body Results Manager to open the FBD Results Manager
tab.
3. Click set, then check Spar2.
4. Click select.
5. Click proceed.
6. (Optional) Activate the Show model check box to display the entire model with the selected element set
highlighted in red and all other elements transparent. This feature will help you easily locate the element
set within the model.
7. For Results type, select FBD Forces – All Loads.
This operation scans the database for available loadsteps with FBD Forces – All Loads results and
populates the Loadsteps list box.
8. For Loadsteps, select SUBCASE 9.

This operation will scan the database for available force and moment vector results and will enable the
check boxes for those force and moment vectors that are available.
9. For Display options, select Fy (shear—the results coordinate system had y-axis in the plane of the
web).
To determine the result coordinate system applied to a given cross-section of interest, use FBD Cross-
Section Manager to review the defined cross-section. This operation will show the element set, node
set, results system, and sum node defined for the selected cross-section. Optionally, select other force
components to review their magnitude and direction in the graphics area. Single or multiple force and
moment vector results can be displayed in the graphics area to facilitate data mining and reporting.
10. (Optional) Select Update load collector color and select color to change the color of the selected load
vectors.
The new color setting applies only to the load components selected and are saved in the database.
Therefore, this option can be used to recolor any single or multiple load vectors for any FBD result.
11. Click Accept to make visible the FBD force vectors in the graphics area.
12. (Optional) Continue to review FBD Forces – All Load vector results following steps 2.6 – 2.13 for
additional loadsteps and force/moment components.
13. Click Reset to clear the display and reset the form.
14. Click Close to exit the FBD Results Manager utility.
Step 3: Use FBD Export Manager to export FBD Forces to .fem file.
1. From the menu bar, select Post, then Free Body Export Manager to open the FBD Export Manger
tab.
3. Click set, then select Spar2.
4. Click proceed.
5. For Results type, select FBD Forces – All Loads.

This operation scans the database for available loadsteps with FBD Forces – All Loads results and
populates the Loadsteps list box.
6. For Loadsteps, Select SUBCASE 9, SUBCASE 11, SUBCASE 14, SUBCASE 16.
7. Check the options for Create appropriate loadsteps, and for Output file, browse to the desired location
and enter spar2_fbd_forces.fem.
8. Click Add to Export.
This operation turns on the display of all load collectors associated with the currently selected FBD
result type for all selected loadsteps. Additional loadsteps can be selected and accepted, which will
append to the current display on each click of accept. In addition, a new element set or FBD result type
can be selected and appended to the current display on each click of accept. To clear the display click
Reset.
9. Click Export.
This operation will export the currently displayed loads and all other associated/required cards to the
output file selected. This file can subsequently be imported into another HyperMesh database (typically
called the detailed model) and the loads contained therein can be "attached" to the structure of the
detailed model as boundary conditions with the addition of a rigid body constraint. This process will be
carried out in the next step.
10. Click Reset.
This operation clears the current display.
11. Click Close to exit the FBD Export Manager utility.
12. (Optional) On the File menu, click Save as…, and save the HyperMesh database as icw_final.hm.
13. From the menu bar, select File, then Exit to exit HyperMesh.
Step 4: Import FBD forces from .fem file into detailed model and solve.
1. Load the model file, spar2_ex2.hm.
2. From the menu bar, select File > Import > Solver Deck to open the Import tab.
3. Select File type: RADIOSS (Bulk Data), and browse for file: spar2_fbd_forces.fem.
4. Click Import.
This operation imports the free body loads from the global model into the detailed model of Spar2. The
next process is to "attach" the free body loads to the detailed model, perform some clean-up operations,
define new loadsteps with the free body loads and a rigid body constraint, and solve the detailed model.
This process will be accomplished in the remainder of this step.
5. From the menu bar, select Mesh, then Check, then Nodes, then Equivalence to go to the Edges
panel.
The nodes of the imported loads are equivalenced with those of the detailed model which are overlaying
each other as a consequence of importing the free body loads.
6. Toggle selector from comps to elems.
7. Click elems >> displayed.

Eighteen nodes should be found, one at each load.
9. Click equivalence to combine nodes that were imported and attached to the loads with those that are a
part of the detailed mesh of Spar2.
Note that when the detailed Spar2 mesh was constructed, attention to where these interface nodes were
located was taken into account by placing fixed points on the surfaces at these locations. The fixed
points maintain a node at that location from the automesher and thus guarantee that a node will exist
where a load is located. This method is only one of several potential methods. Other options could
include importing the loads which do not line up with any other nodes in the detailed mesh and then
connecting the loads to the detailed mesh with R-type elements (RBE2 or RBE3). Several other
possibilities could also exist and best methods and practices should be considered depending on the
problem type.
10. Click return to exit the Edges panel.
11. Click Delete to open the Delete panel.
12. Click comps.
13. Select TempMass.
14. Click select.
15. Click delete entity to delete the TempMass component entity.
16. Click return to exit the Delete panel.
17. On the Model tab, select the LoadCollector folder, right-click to bring up the context sensitive menu,
and select Hide to remove all loads from the graphics area.
18. To define a rigid body constraint perform the following:
Create a load collector for the rigid body constraint definition. From the menu bar, select Collectors,
then Create, then Load Collectors to to open the Create Load Collector dialog box.
In the Name field enter Const.
Select color red.
Set Card Image to none.
Click create.
Note: this operation sets the current load collector to the newly created Const load collector. The
current load collector is the collector which any newly created load (constrains in this case) are
placed into.
Assign an analysis system to the nodes for which the rigid body constraint will be applied. From the
menu bar, select Mesh, then Assign, then Node Analysis System to go to the Systems: Assign
subpanel.
Select the three nodes highlighted in the following image.
Click system.
Select system 102 on left-middle end (x-axis along length, y-axis along web, z-axis normal to web).

Note: You may have to display the Longeron2 system collector from the Model browser (Model
tab) to display system 102.
Click set displacement.
Click return to exit the Systems panel.
Assign a constraint to left-bottom node. From the menu bar, select BCs, then Create, then
Constraints to go to the Constraints panel.
Select the left-bottom node.
Select dof1, dof2, and dof3.

Make sure all other dofs are unselected.
Click create.
Select the left-top node.
Select dof1 and dof3.

Click create.
Select the right-bottom node.
Select dof3.
Click create.
Click return to exit the Constraints panel.
19. To update the loadsteps for all four free body load cases, perform the following:
From the menu bar, select Setup, then Edit, then LoadSteps to go to the LoadSteps panel.
Click name = and select SUBCASE 9.
Toggle type to linear static.
Select SPC, click =, and select Const load collector.

Click update.
Repeat steps for SUBCASE 11, SUBCASE 14, and SUBCASE 16.
20. From the menu bar, select Setup, then Create, then Control Cards to go to the Control Cards panel.
21. Click FORMAT.
22. For number_of_formats enter 2, and then hit ENTER on the keyboard.
There are now two FORMAT buttons.
23. Click each FORMAT button and set them to HM and OUTPUT2, respectively.
24. Click return to specify output file formats for HyperMesh .res (HM) and .op2 which can be used in
HyperView to post-process the results.
25. Click GLOBAL_OUTPUT_REQUEST
26. Click DISPLACEMENT and STRESS.
27. Click return to request displacement output for both output formats.
28. Click return to exit the Control Cards panel.
29. From the menu bar, select File, then Save As…, and save the model as spar2_ex2_analysis.hm.
30. From the Analysis page, click Radioss to run the model.
31. For run options, toggle to analysis.
32. For export options, toggle to all.
33. Click Radioss to export the solver deck and run the analysis in RADIOSS using the bulk data format. If –
optiskip appears in the options field clear the field before clicking Radioss.
34. Once RADIOSS finishes, click return to exit the RADIOSS panel.
35. In the Post menu, click Deformed panel and review the results of the analysis.
36. Click Simulation = and select SUB9 – PosShear PosMoment PosT.
37. Click data type = and select Displacements.
38. Click deform to produce the deformed shape of Spar2 in the graphics area for the selected simulation.
39. Click return to exit the Deformed panel.
40. In the Post menu, click Contour to go to the Contour panel and review the results of analysis.
41. Click Simulation = and select SUB9 – PosShear PosMoment PosT.
42. Click data type = and select Von Mises Stress.
43. Select the legend subpanel.
44. Toggle find maximum to maximum = and enter 100000.
45. Click contour to produce the contour plot in the graphics area.
46. (Optional) Continue to use the contour panel to review additional results.

47. Click return to exit the Contour panel.
48. (Optional) From the menu bar, select File, then Save.
This operation saves the current HyperMesh database, spar2_ex2_analysis.hm.
49. From the menu bar, select File, then Exit to exit HyperMesh.


HyperMesh 11.0 Core Tutorials

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

HyperMesh 11.0 Core Tutorials

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

HyperWorks 11.

FTP site Address: ftp.altair.com or ftp2.altair.com or http://ftp.altair.com/ftp

Location Telephone e-mail

The following countries have distributors for Altair Engineering:

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Core Tutorials i

Proprietary Inform ation of Altair Engineering

ii HyperMesh Core Tutorials Altair Engineering

Proprietary Inform ation of Altair Engineering

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Core Tutorials iii

Proprietary Inform ation of Altair Engineering

HM-1000: Getting Started with HyperMesh

HM-1010: Opening and Saving Files

HM-1020: Working with Panels

HM-1040: Controlling the Display

HM-2000: Importing and Repairing CAD

HM-2010: Generating a Midsurface

HM-2020: Simplifying Geometry

HM-2030: Refining Topology to Achieve a Quality Mesh

HM-2040: Creating and Editing Line Data

HM-2060: Creating and Editing Solid Geometry

HM-2080: Modifying Models using solidThinking

HM-3000: Creating 1-D Elements

HM-3110: Meshing without Surfaces

HM-3120: 2-D Mesh in Curved Surfaces

HM-3130: QI Mesh Creation

HM-3140: Batch Meshing

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Core Tutorials 1

Proprietary Inform ation of Altair Engineering

HM-3210: Creating a Hex-Penta Mesh using Surfaces

HM-3220: Creating a Hexahedral Mesh using the Solid Map Function

HM-3270: Using the TetraMesh Process Manager

HM-3300: Checking and Editing Mesh

HM-3400: Creating Connectors

HM-3410: Creating Area Connectors

HM-3420: Creating Bolt Connectors

HM-3430: Part Replacement Through Connectors

HM-3510: Freehand Morphing

HM-3530: Changing a Curvature Using Map to Geometry

HM-3540: Changing a Profile Using Map to Sections

HM-3550: Morph Volume

HM-3560: Basics of Domains and Handles

HM-3570: Altering Cross-Sections Using Domains

HM-3580: Morphing About an Axis Using Domains

HM-3590: Morph Adhesive Layers

HM-3600: Morph Tube to Different Configurations

2 HyperMesh Core Tutorials Altair Engineering

Proprietary Inform ation of Altair Engineering

HM-3620: Shaping a Bead Using Cyclic Symmetry

HM-3625: Morph a Symmetric Part onto a New Geometry

HM-3630: Morphing with Shapes

HM-3640: Interpolating Loads Using Shapes

HM-3650: Creating Shapes Using Record

HM-3660: Maintaining Area Using Constraints

HM-3670: Positioning a Dummy Using Limiting Constraints

HM-3680: Preserving a Shape Using Cluster Constraints

HM-3690: Remeshing Domains After Morphing

HM-4000: Setting up Loading Conditions

HM-4010: Formatting Model for Analysis

HM-4020: Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties using HyperBeam

HM-4030: Defining Composites

HM-4040: Working with Loads on Geometry

HM-4060: Working with Include Files

HM-8010: Add a Button to the User Page on the Utility Menu